v. Madam<- ; living at No. 3, 
 
 ought on Friday before the tribunal of 
 at Paris, to answer the charge of SVMU- 
 y practising the medical art \r\ means of 
 Euuiiiaimiuiisui. ihe wife of a person at Mcntmorcncj 
 haying lost two horses which she had let to two young men 
 to make & promenade in the forest, went to Madame San- 
 cerotte, who put herself into a magnetic trance, and took 
 Isold of the woman's hand. The latter then put several 
 questions to her respecting the horses. The somnambulist, 
 to the intense astonishment of the woman, correctly described 
 the colour of the animals, and stated that her'husband and j 
 another person had sought for them in a particular part of 
 the forest, which was perfectly true. Tne sleeping lady 
 then added, that one of the horses would be found at the 
 He Adam, and the other in the forest of Montmorency. 
 For this consultation sho received 10 francs. It turned 
 out that the horses were found, not in the lie Adam or 
 in the forest of Montmorency, but at the Chapelle St. Denis, 
 and this falsification of the prediction coiistituttd the 
 alleged act of swindling. But the woman who was said 
 to have been swindled gave the strongest testimony in 
 favour of t. e accused, stating that the description she had 
 given of the colour of the horses and of the search made by 
 her husband, convinced her that she was no impostor, add- 
 ing that she had no doubt whatever that the horses had 
 really been taken to the lie Adam, and to the place she had 
 mentioned in the forest of Montmorency, and "that she was 
 convinced that if she had pressed the accused with questions 
 she would have finished by stating that the horses twero 
 at the CLapelle St. Denis. In the face of this testimony 
 the public prosecutor abandoned the charge of swindling. 
 To establish the accusation of- illegally practising the medical 
 art, a witness was called who stated that she had paid the 
 somnambulist to prescribe for some dreadful pains which she 
 had in the head; but she added that the prescriptions of 
 that person had completely cured her, though she had not 
 been able to obtain relief from all the doctors of Paris. The 
 witness added that before placing confidence in the accused 
 she determined to put her skil' to the test, by asking her 
 : where the key of a drawer, which sho had lost for a long 
 time, could be found ; whereupon the accused mentioned 
 a spot, and there, sure enough, the key was discovered. In 
 consequence of this favourable evidence, the tribunal only 
 condemned the somnambulist to a fine of 5f. The president 
 recommended her, for the future, not to give consultations 
 without the presence of a physieian.-t-GWj</w''s Alessengtr. 

 
 NEURYPNOLOGY; 
 
 OR, THE 
 
 RATIONALE OF NERVOUS SLEEP, 
 
 CONSIDERED IN' RELATION WITH 
 
 ANIMAL MAGNETISM. 
 
 ILLUSTRATED BY 
 
 NUMEROUS CASES OF ITS SUCCESSFUL APPLICATION 
 IN THE RELIEF AND CURE OF DISEASE. 
 
 BY 
 
 JAMES BRAID, M.R.C.S.E., C.M.W.S. &c. 
 
 DtteaU Stewart. 
 
 LONDON: 
 
 JOHN CHURCHILL, PRINCE'S STREET, SOHO. 
 ADAM & CHARLES BLACK, EDINBURGH. 
 
 1843.
 
 EDINBURGH: 
 
 PRINTED BY ANDREW SHORTRKDK, 
 OKOROB IV. BR1DOK.
 
 CHARLES ANDERSON, M.D., F.R.C.S. ED. &c. 
 
 MY DEAR SIB, 
 
 INCLINATION as well as duty induces me to 
 dedicate this work to you : that I may publicly 
 express the lively sense of gratitude I entertain for 
 the many opportunities enjoyed during my appren- 
 ticeship with yourself and your late father, of acquir- 
 ing a practical as well as theoretical knowledge of 
 my profession; of becoming familiar with your 
 comprehensive views of disease, and their happy 
 application in practice ; for the personal kindness 
 shewn me during my pupilage ; and for the unin- 
 terrupted friendship which has ever since existed 
 betwixt us. 
 
 I am aware that you are not practically acquainted 
 with the subject of this treatise, but your intimate 
 knowledge of general science renders you eminently 
 qualified for prosecuting the subject with success; 
 
 1104488
 
 IV DEDICATION. 
 
 and permit me to assure you, that its value as a 
 curative power, for an intractable class of diseases, 
 renders it well worthy of your best attention. 
 
 Believe me, 
 
 My dear Sir, 
 
 Most faithfully yours, 
 
 JAMES BRAID. 
 
 3, ST PETER'S SQUARE, 
 MANCHESTER, June 2, 1843.
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 General remarks Why Hypnotism has been separated from Animal 
 Magnetism How far considered useful in the cure of disease Its 
 powers on the animal functions Certain erroneous charges refuted 
 Opinions and practice of Bertrand and Abbe' Faria, Mr Brooks, Dr 
 Prichard Its moral influence Should be used by professional men 
 only Definition of terms, .... Page 1 
 
 PART I. 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 Introductory remarks Circumstances which directed to the investigation 
 A real phenomenon observed Experiments instituted to prove the 
 cause of it Opinions and conclusions drawn from them Reasons for 
 separating Hypnotism from Mesmerism Hypnotism more generally 
 successful than Animal Magnetism Mr Herbert Mayo's testimony on 
 this point Proofs of this referred to Different modes by which it can 
 be induced Can only be expected to succeed by complying with the 
 whole conditions required, .... Page 15
 
 Till CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Mode of Hypnotizing Circumstances necessary to be complied with 
 Peculiar phenomena which follow; excitement first, and afterwards 
 depression of function Importance of attending to this How these 
 may be made to alternate with each other Extraordinary influence of 
 a current of air during Hypnotism Reasons for certain modifications of 
 original modes of operating Hypnotism proceeds from a law of the 
 animal economy Arises from the physical and psychical condition of 
 the patient, and not from any emanation or principle proceeding from 
 others Example for proof Exhibits no appreciable electric or mag- 
 netic change. Two patients may hypnotize each other by contact. 
 Phenomena arise spontaneously in course of disease. Mr Wakley's 
 admission on this point. Hr H. Mayo's testimony as to the effects of 
 Hypnotism. Effects of different positions of the eyes. Remarks on 
 articles in Medical Gazette. Consensual adjustment of eyes. Effects 
 on size of pupil. Power of habit and imagination. Docility of pa- 
 tients, and exalted sensibility, and their effects. Patient hypnotized 
 whilst operating on another. Mode of resisting influence, Page 27 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 Phenomena of natural sleep, dreaming, and somnambulism contrasted 
 Causes of common sleep Of dreaming Effects of variety and mono- 
 tony compared Changes alleged to take place in the structure of the 
 brain by exertion Cause of Hypnotism, M'Nish's article on ' ' Reverie" 
 compared with Mr Braid's theory of Hypnotism Mode of arousing 
 patients from the state of Hypnotism, . . Page 43 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Phenomena of common sleep Of Hypnotism Power of locomotion and 
 accurate balancing of themselves Tendency to dance on hearing 
 appropriate music Grace displayed under its influence Tendency to
 
 CONTENTS. IX 
 
 become cataleptiformly fixed in any position if left quiet Probability 
 of Hypnotism having been practised amongst the ancients, and the cause 
 of their superior excellence in sculpture, painting, and dancing Effects 
 analogous to Nitrous Oxide in some in what it differs from this and 
 intoxication from wine and spirits Analogous to conium Effects of 
 monotonous impressions on any of the senses Opinions of Cullen, 
 M'Nish, Willich (Counting and repeating generally known) A 
 writer in Medical Gazette Power of habit and expectation All the 
 phenomena consecutive Note illustrating this Power of Hypnotism 
 to cure intractable diseases and disorders Miss Collins case and 
 Miss E. Atkinson's Extent to which it may be expected to be 
 useful, ...... Page 54 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 Reasons for delivering Public Lectures on Hypnotism Mode of procuring 
 refreshing sleep, with low pulse and general flaccidity of muscle Effi- 
 cacy of this plan, . . . . Page 75 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 Introductory remarks Relation between mind and matter illustrated to 
 disprove materialism Armstrong, Colton, Brown, Abercrombie, 
 Stewart, Plato General conclusion, that mind or life is the cause of 
 organism Power of conscience The passions, how excited Dr 
 Elliotson's opinion as to the efficacy or non-efficacy of volition and sym- 
 pathy with operator's brain Modes of dividing the brain Causes of 
 Phrenology being imperfect Objections to Phreno-Hypnotism Mode 
 of connection between the brain and body First attempts at Phreno- 
 logizing during Hypnotism were failures Succeeded by operating dif- 
 ferently Cases illustrative A child operates successfully Details of 
 the case Other successful cases Proper time for operating Case of 
 an officer in 1758 Inferences as to its curative powers Opinions of 
 La Roy Sunderland, and Mr Hall Presumed cause of phenomena 
 called Cross Magnetism Return stolen property to proper owners and 
 proper place by smell and touch Power of hearing faint sounds
 
 X CONTENTS. 
 
 Additional cases Opposite faculties can be excited at same time by 
 acting on the opposite hemispheres Mode of operating Concludin 
 remarks on the value of testimony, . . . Page 79 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 General resumi Many phenomena admit of physical and chemical proof 
 Difficulties of comprehending many phenomena Effects of prejudice 
 in preventing the reception of truth Critique on debate at Medico- 
 Chirurgical Society on Mr Ward's operation State of the circulation 
 Conjectures as to the cause of the cataleptiform condition, Page 150 
 
 PART II. 
 
 Modes of operating Objects of operations Cases of sight improved 
 Hearing Deaf and dumb Mr Curtis's remarks James Shelmerdine's 
 case Mr Bingham's testimony S. Taylor Sense of smell Touch and 
 resistance Tic, paralysis of sense and motion, cured Miss E. Atkin- 
 son's case, voice recovered Rheumatism, ten cases Irregular muscular 
 action Headache Spinal Irritation Epilepsy Spinal curvature 
 Neuralgia, and palpitation of the heart Surgical operations without 
 pain Diseases of the skin Locked jaw Tonic spasm Miss Collins 
 Concluding remarks, .... Page 161
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 THE circumstances which led me to engage in the 
 investigation of hypnotism, are detailed in the intro- 
 duction to this little work; in the first part of the 
 treatise I have endeavoured to give the results at 
 which I arrived, in most instances sketching the 
 route by which I travelled, and stating the inferences 
 drawn from the various incidents which occurred in 
 the course of my progress. Having furnished the 
 data from which I drew my conclusions, the reader 
 is thus prepared to determine, whether, on any 
 occasion, I have come to these conclusions without 
 what he would consider sufficient evidence, and in 
 such case can institute additional experiments to 
 any extent he may judge requisite. One circum- 
 stance, however, I may remark. From a fear of 
 being misled, I have requested the most sceptical 
 individuals I knew, both professional and merely 
 scientific men, to scrutinize all my experiments in 
 the most critical manner ; and have also induced 
 some of my most intelligent and respected friends 
 to submit to the operations, in the hope that I
 
 Xll PREFACE. 
 
 might thus more certainly guard against being 
 deceived. The results I now submit to the public, 
 and to the kind and candid consideration of my pro- 
 fessional brethren, whom I should wish to investigate 
 the subject coolly, and with an honest desire to arrive 
 at truth. Having myself been sceptical, I can make 
 every reasonable allowance for others. On this 
 point I fully subscribe to the propriety of the 
 remark of Treviranus, the celebrated botanist, when 
 speaking of mesmerism. He says, (I quote from 
 memory,) "I have seen much which I would not 
 have believed on your telling; and in all reason, 
 therefore, I can neither hope nor wish that you 
 should believe on mine." 
 
 It is quite natural for any man to prefer the 
 evidence of his own senses to that of all others, and I 
 think no one who has the opportunity of examining 
 the phenomena for himself should neglect to do so. 
 However, there are some circumstances which ought 
 to be particularly borne in mind, or very erroneous 
 opinions may be formed by the uninitiated, from 
 what is actually witnessed. First, there is a remark- 
 able difference in the degree of susceptibility of diffe- 
 rent individuals to the hypnotic influence, some 
 becoming rapidly and intensely affected, others slowly 
 and feebly so. This is only analogous to what we 
 experience in regard to the effects of medicines on 
 different individuals, and especially as regards wine, 
 spirits, and opium, and nitrous oxide. Whilst this is 
 a recognized fact, as regards the latter, it appears to 
 me somewhat surprising to find many, and even pro- 
 fessional men too, who seem to expect as much 
 uniformity ought to obtain, in regard to the pheno-
 
 PREFACE. Xlll 
 
 mena during hypnotism, as if we were operating on 
 inanimate matter. On the contrary, they ought to 
 be ready to admit that a variety might be expected 
 to arise, even in the same individual, according to the 
 physical and mental condition of the patient at the 
 moment the operation is performed. 
 
 The next most important point for consideration is, 
 the fact of all the phenomena being consecutive. We 
 have thus the extremes of insensibility, and exalted 
 sensibility, of rigidity and mobility, at different 
 stages, and these merging into each other by the most 
 imperceptible gradations, or in the most abrupt 
 manner, according to the mode of treating the 
 patient. It is no unusual thing for different parties 
 to be testing, or calling for tests, for the opposite con- 
 ditions ,' at the same instant of time. These, of course, 
 are incompatible, but, at a certain stage, the transi- 
 tions from torpor of all the senses, and catalep- 
 tiform rigidity, to the most exalted sensibility, and 
 flaccidity of muscle, may be effected almost with 
 the celerity of thought, even by so slight a cause as a 
 breath of air directed against the part. If left at rest 
 it will speedily merge back again, and thus those un- 
 acquainted with such peculiarities, will be continually 
 liable to think they discover discrepancies, which, 
 however, only originate from their imperfect know- 
 ledge of the subject ; just as an unskilful manipulator 
 will be ready to suppose, from his different results, 
 that the observations of other chemists have been 
 erroneous. 
 
 The third point meriting especial attention is, the 
 condition of the mind at different stages. As results 
 from opium, so also from hypnotism. At one stage
 
 XIV PREFACE. 
 
 it gives an extraordinary power of concentration of 
 thought, or disposition to rapt contemplation, where- 
 as, at another stage, the discursive, or imaginative 
 faculties are excited into full play, and thus the 
 most expanded, bright, and glowing scenes and images 
 are presented to the fervid imagination. Such effects 
 are quite analogous to those described as resulting 
 from the use of opium, and detailed by the late Sir 
 Humphrey Davy, as experienced in his own per- 
 son, from the inhalation of the nitrous oxide. " I 
 thus felt a sense of tangible extension, highly plea- 
 surable in every limb, my visible impressions were 
 dazzling and apparently magnified. I heard distinctly 
 every sound in the room, and was perfectly aware of 
 my situation. By degrees, as the pleasurable sensa- 
 tion increased, I lost all connection with external 
 things ; trains of vivid visible images rapidly passed 
 through my mind. I existed in a world of newly 
 connected and newly modified ideas." It must also 
 be borne in mind, that these opposite mental condi- 
 tions may glide into each other by the most imper- 
 ceptible degrees, or by the most abrupt transitions, 
 according to the modes of management, and thus con- 
 sciousness or unconsciousness, sound sleep, dreaming, 
 or somnambulism, will result, according as sensations 
 or ideas predominate, or are equally vivid. See Hib- 
 bert's Philosophy of Apparitions. At a certain stage 
 the same abruptness of transition may be realized in 
 the mental phenomena, as were referred to in the last 
 paragraph, in respect to the physical, and from equally 
 slight causes. I presume it is from this cause that the 
 phrenological manifestation may be so readily and 
 characteristically exhibited at this period. At page 143
 
 PREFACE. XV 
 
 I have stated that, were it not that I should con- 
 sider it an unnecessary waste of time to prosecute the 
 inquiry farther, after the amount of evidence obtained 
 by myself, and others, I had no doubt but I might 
 soon obtain any number of additional cases I might 
 desire. In proof of this, I may remark, that since 
 that period, I was induced one day to try some fresh 
 subjects, when I succeeded in eliciting the manifes- 
 tations in the most satisfactory manner in the case 
 of a man of forty years of age, and in three other 
 male subjects upwards of twenty years of age. Of the 
 latter, under the excitation of constructiveness and 
 ideality, one wrote, and the other drew patterns, and 
 neither of them had seen such experiments, nor 
 expected to be so tested, nor remembered what 
 happened. The same day I also manipulated three 
 females, one 45 years of age, a young lady of 19, 
 and a girl, all of whom exhibited the manifesta- 
 tions quite distinctly. Another day, to satisfy a 
 number of intellectual friends, I hypnotized three of 
 their personal friends, two of whom were entire 
 strangers to me, and were quite sceptical as to the 
 possibility of my being able to affect them at all. 
 They all exhibited the manifestations most dis- 
 tinctly, two of them in a remarkable degree, and to 
 the extent of twenty manifestations at first trial. 
 Under " conscientiousness," one restored a reticule 
 she had stolen, and burst into a flood of tears at the 
 thought of her delinquency. The friends were alarmed 
 at the intensity of her emotion, but by changing the 
 point of contact, I had her changed from the grave to 
 the gay in a few seconds. A few days after I had 
 other two cases, and I feel assured that in most of the
 
 XV PREFACE. 
 
 twelve cases here referred to the parties knew nothing 
 of phrenology, and that not one of them could with 
 certainty point to two of their own organs. I may 
 also add, they were all tested before competent and 
 observant witnesses, who can testify there was no 
 prompting by any one. 
 
 It appears quite evident, that whatever images 
 or mental emotions or thoughts have been excited 
 in the mind during nervous sleep, are generally 
 liable to recur, or be renovated and manifested 
 when the patient is again placed under similar cir- 
 cumstances. Notwithstanding the apparent conclu- 
 siveness of the cases recorded, that there exists a 
 natural connection betwixt certain localities touched 
 and the peculiar manifestations which follow, in 
 order to determine this question in the most decided 
 manner, it is my intention to institute a series of 
 experiments on fresh patients, in order to ascertain 
 to what extent it may be practicable, by arbitrary 
 association, to excite the opposite tendencies from the 
 same points ; also, whether they can be exhibited in 
 the same striking and natural manner by both 
 methods, or by which points they can be elicited with 
 the greatest facility and fidelity to natural expression. 
 There will thus be both positive and negative proof 
 to aid us in determining, whether there is any natu- 
 ral and necessary connection existing betwixt the 
 points manipulated, and the manifestations excited ; 
 or whether it may depend entirely upon associations 
 which have originated from some partial knowledge 
 of phrenology, from arbitrary arrangements, or acci- 
 dental circumstances or causes which have been en- 
 tirely overlooked or forgotten ; and which afterwards
 
 PREFACE. XV11 
 
 produce the results from " that ultimate law of the 
 mind, which ordains, that the repetition of a definite 
 sensation shall be followed by a renovation of the past 
 feelings with which it was before associated." (Hib- 
 bert, page'31G.) I am induced to adopt this course, 
 from my anxiety to remove every possible source of 
 error as to the cause of the original manifestation, and 
 from the recollection of the remarkable circumstance 
 of the woman who, during natural somnambulism, 
 could repeat correctly large portions of the Hebrew 
 Bible, and other books, in languages she had never 
 studied, and was perfectly ignorant of when awake, 
 but which was at length discovered to have been 
 acquired from hearing a clergyman, with whom she 
 resided when a girl, reading them aloud to himself ; 
 and also of some patients whilst labouring under dis- 
 ease remembering languages long forgotten. I wish 
 to ascertain whether any such accidental circumstance 
 may have been the cause of the remarkable manifes- 
 tations arising in the minds of patients when first 
 manipulated. Whatever are the results of my farther 
 inquiry shall be carefully noted and published, as my 
 object is neither to prove nor disprove the truth of 
 phrenology, but to establish the value of hypnotism, 
 and determine how best to apply it, as a means of 
 meliorating the mental, and moral, and physical con- 
 dition of man. 
 
 That during the nervous sleep, there is the power 
 of exciting patients to manifest the passions and 
 emotions, and certain mental functions, in a more 
 striking manner than the same individuals are 
 capable of in the waking condition, no one can 
 doubt who has seen much of these experiments. And 
 b
 
 XV111 PREFACE. 
 
 it can in no way alter the importance of hypnotism, 
 as a curative power, and extraordinary means of 
 controlling and directing mental functions, in a parti- 
 cular manner, by a simple association of impressions, 
 whether we thus act on the brain as a single organ } 
 or as a combination of separate organs ; or whether 
 the primary associations have originated from a 
 special organic connection, or from some accidental 
 and unknown cause, or from preconcerted arrange- 
 ment and arbitrary association. 
 
 In such operations as particularly require the use 
 of the eyes, I have never seen patients in the hypno- 
 tic state perform what they attempted with the same 
 celerity and accuracy as they were capable of doing 
 when awake, and with the aid of sight. In short, I 
 have never witnessed any phenomena which were not 
 reconcileable with the notion that they arose from the 
 abnormal exaltation or depression of sensations and 
 ideas, or to their being thrown into unusual and varied 
 ratios by the processes resorted to. 
 
 Having heard it reported, that by establishing a 
 connection betwixt two patients by a chain or string, 
 that manipulating one would manifest the same 
 phenomena in both, I tried the experiment, but with 
 the precaution that the patients should be in separate 
 rooms, so that the one could not hear, nor feel, from 
 the motion of the air, what the other was doing. I 
 formed the connection by a cord in some cases, and 
 in others by a copper wire, and had parties stationed 
 where they could observe the movements of both at 
 same time. We could discover no such sympathetic 
 influence as is asserted to have been realized by 
 others.
 
 PREFACE. XIX 
 
 The experiments recorded at page 142 of my having 
 caused patients to hypnotize, manipulate, and rouse 
 themselves, (by simply desiring them to rub their own 
 eyes,) and which produced results precisely the same 
 as when done by any one else, seem to me the most 
 decisive proof possible that the whole results from 
 the mind and body of the patients acting and re-act- 
 ing on each other, and that it has no dependence on 
 any special influence emanating from another. My 
 first experiments on this point were instituted in the 
 presence of some friends on the 1st May, 1843, and 
 following days. I believe they were the first experi- 
 ments of the kind which had ever been tried, and 
 they have succeeded in every case in which I have so 
 operated. 
 
 With due attention to the points above referred to, 
 and with that practice which is requisite to insure 
 adroitness in experimenting in any department of art 
 or science, and with an honest desire to view every 
 fact having no bias to uphold some previous prejudice 
 or opinion, I have no doubt that the facts and obser- 
 vations set forth in this treatise will soon be very 
 generally confirmed. 
 
 A perusal of the cases recorded in the second part 
 will, I trust, render the importance of the subject 
 sufficiently apparent to stimulate inquiry ; and I 
 hope it may be gratifying to others to read, as it 
 is to me to be able to record, that the predication I 
 had ventured to make at page 256, as to the pro- 
 bability of hypnotism proving a cure for tetanus and 
 hydrophobia, has already been happily realized in 
 respect to the former intractable and generally fatal 
 disease. After this treatise had been in the press
 
 XX PREFACE. 
 
 the following case occurred, and its importance 
 must be my apology for giving a brief detail of it 
 here : 
 
 Master J. B., 13 years of age, was suddenly attacked 
 with chilliness and pain all over his body, on the 
 evening of 30th of last March. I was called to attend 
 him the following day, when I considered he had got 
 a febrile attack from cold, and prescribed accordingly. 
 Next day, however, it had assumed a very different 
 aspect. I now found I had got a severe case of 
 opisthotonos to deal with. The head and pelvis 
 were rigidly drawn back, the body forming an arch, 
 and the greatest force could not succeed in straighten- 
 ing it, or bringing the head forward. Whilst the 
 spasm never relaxed entirely, it frequently became 
 much aggravated, when the head was so much drawn 
 back as to seriously impede respiration. The legs 
 were also sometimes flexed spasmodically. The effect 
 of the spasm in obstructing the respiration, and hurry- 
 ing the circulation, was very great, and seemed to 
 place the patient in great jeopardy. The pulse was 
 never less than 150, but during the paroxysm was 
 considerably increased. It was evident I had got a 
 most formidable case to contend with, and that no 
 time ought to be lost. I therefore determined to try 
 the power of hypnotism, well knowing how generally 
 such cases end fatally under ordinary treatment. He 
 was quite sensible, and the only difficulty in getting 
 him to comply with my instructions, arose from the 
 recurrence of the severe spasmodic attacks. In a very 
 few minutes, however, I succeeded in reducing the 
 spasm so that his head could be carried forward to 
 the perpendicular, his breathing was relieved, his pulse
 
 PREFACE. XXI 
 
 considerably diminished, and I left him in a state of 
 comparative comfort. In about two and a-half hours 
 after I visited him again, accompanied by my friend 
 Dr Cochrane. The spasms had recurred, but by 
 no means with the same violence. Dr Cochrane 
 had no difficulty in recognizing the disease, but did 
 not believe any means could save such a case. 
 He had never seen a patient hypnotized till that 
 afternoon, and watched my experiment with much 
 interest and attention. He seemed much and agree- 
 ably surprised by the extraordinary influence which 
 an agency so apparently simple exerted over such a 
 case. The pupil was speedily dilated, as if under the 
 influence of belladonna ; the muscular spasm relaxed, 
 and in a few minutes he was calmly asleep. Having 
 ordered three calomel powders to be given at intervals, 
 we left him comfortably asleep. Next day there was 
 still spasm of the muscles, but by no means so severe. 
 Whilst I determined to follow up the hypnotic treat- 
 ment, which had been so far successful, I considered it 
 would be highly imprudent to trust wholly to that in 
 the treatment of such a case. As I consider such cases 
 are generally attended with inflammation of the 
 medulla oblongata, and upper part of the spinal cord, 
 I bled him, and ordered the calomel to be continued. 
 The same plan was persevered in, hypnotizing him 
 occasionally for some days, administering calomel till 
 the gums were slightly affected, cold lotion to the 
 head, and the antiphlogistic regimen till I considered 
 all risk of inflammatory action past, when he was 
 treated more generously, and I am gratified to say he 
 is now quite well. 
 c I feel confident that without the aid of hypnotism
 
 XX11 PREFACE. 
 
 this patient would have died. I sincerely wish it 
 may prove equally successful in other cases of the 
 kind, and also in that hitherto fatal disease, hydro- 
 phobia. My anxiety to see it fairly tried in the 
 latter disease induces me to offer my gratuitous services 
 in any case of that disease occurring within a few 
 hours' journey of Manchester. 
 
 I consider it necessary to explain that my reason for 
 having inserted some cases attested by the patients 
 and others is, that most unwarrantable interferences 
 have been resorted to by several medical men, in 
 order to misrepresent some of them. In one instance, 
 in order to obtain an attested erroneous document, the 
 case was BEAD to the patient and others present, THE 
 
 VERY REVERSK OF WHAT WAS WRITTEN. However 
 
 extraordinary such conduct may appear, the fact of 
 its occurrence was publicly proved, and borne testimony 
 to by the patient and other parties present on the occasion 
 when the document was obtained.
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 General remarks Why Hypnotism has been separated from Animal 
 Magnetism How far considered useful in the cure of disease Its 
 powers on the animal functions Certain erroneous charges refuted 
 Opinions and practice of Bertrand and Abb6 Faria, Mr Brooks, Dr 
 Prichard Its moral influence Should be used by professional men 
 only Definition of terms. 
 
 IT was my intention to have published my " Prac- 
 tical Essay on the Curative Agency of Neuro- 
 Hypnotism," exactly as delivered at the Conversazione 
 given. to the members of the British Association in 
 Manchester, on the 29th June, 1842. By so doing, 
 and by appending foot notes, comprising the data on 
 which my views were grounded, it would have con- 
 veyed a pretty clear knowledge of the subject, and of 
 the manner in which it had been treated. It has 
 since been suggested, however, that it might readily 
 be incorporated with the short Elementary Treatise 
 on Neuro-Hypnology, which I originally intended to 
 publish, and which I am earnestly solicited to do, by 
 letters from professional gentlemen from all quarters. 
 I now, therefore, submit my views to the public in 
 A
 
 2 GENERAL REMARKS. 
 
 the following condensed form. I shall aim at brevity 
 and perspicuity ; and my great object will be to teach 
 others all I know of the modes of inducing the pheno- 
 mena, and their application in the cure of diseases, 
 and to invite my professional brethren to labour in 
 the same field of inquiry, feeling assured, that the 
 cause of science and humanity must thereby be pro- 
 moted. 
 
 It was with this conviction I offered my " Practical 
 Essay on the Curative Agency of Neuro-IIypnotism," 
 to the medical section of the British Association. 
 
 In November, 1841, I was led to investigate the 
 pretensions of animal magnetism, or mesmerism, as 
 a complete sceptic, from an anxiety to discover the 
 source of fallacy in certain phenomena I had heard 
 were exhibited at M. Lafontaine's conversazioni. The 
 result was, that I made some discoverieswhich appeared 
 to elucidate certain of the phenomena, and rendered 
 them interesting, both in a speculative and practical 
 point of view. I considered it a most favourable 
 opportunity for having additional light thrown upon 
 this subject, to offer a paper to the medical section of 
 the British Association, which was about to meet in 
 Manchester. Gentlemen of scientific attainments 
 might thus have had an opportunity of investigat- 
 ing it, and eliciting the truth, unbiassed by local 
 or personal prejudice. I hoped to learn some- 
 thing from others, on certain points which were 
 extremely mysterious to me, as to the cause of some 
 remarkable phenomena. I accordingly intimated 
 my intention to the secretaries, by letter, on 18th 
 May, and on the morning of Wednesday, the 22d 
 June, 1842, scut the paper I proposed reading for
 
 GENERAL REMARKS. Jl 
 
 the consideration of the committee, intimating' also, by 
 letter, my intention to produce before them as many 
 of the patients as possible, whose cases were referred 
 to in proof of the curative agency of Neuro-Hypno- 
 tism, so that they might have an opportunity of 
 ascertaining, for themselves, the real facts of the 
 cases, uninfluenced by any bias or partiality that I 
 might exhibit as the discoverer and adapter of this 
 new mode of treatment. The committee of the medi- 
 cal section, however, were pleased to decline enter- 
 taining the subject. 
 
 Many of the most eminent and influential members 
 of the Association, however, had already witnessed 
 and investigated my experiments in private, and ex- 
 pressed themselves highly gratified and interested 
 with them. In compliance with the repeated desire 
 of these gentlemen, and many other eminent members 
 of the Association to whom I could not possibly afford 
 time to exhibit my experiments in private, and who 
 were anxious to have an opportunity afforded them 
 of seeing, hearing, and judging of the phenomena for 
 themselves, I gave a gratuitous conversazione, when 
 I read the " Rejected Essay," and exhibited the ex- 
 periments in a public room, to which all the members 
 of the Association had been respectfully invited. The 
 interest with which the subject was viewed by the 
 members of the Association generally, was sufficiently 
 testified by the number and high respectability of 
 those who attended on that occasion ; in reference to 
 which the chairman requested the reporters to put on 
 record, " that he had been in the habit for many 
 years of attending public meetings, and he had never 
 in his life seen a more unmixed, a more entirely
 
 4 HYPNOTISM SEPARATED FROM 
 
 respectable assembly in Manchester." It was also 
 manifested by their passing a vote of thanks at the 
 conclusion of the conversazione, for my having afforded 
 an opportunity to the members of the British Associa- 
 tion of witnessing my experiments, to which they had 
 previously borne testimony as having been " highly 
 successful." 
 
 On that occasion I stated, there were certain pheno- 
 mena, which I could readily induce by particular 
 manipulations, whilst I candidly confessed myself 
 unable to explain the modus operandi by which 
 they were induced. I referred particularly to the 
 extraordinary rapidity with which dormant func- 
 tions, and a state of cataleptiform rigidity, may be 
 changed to the extreme opposite condition, by a 
 simple waft of wind, either from the lips, a pair of 
 bellows, or by any other mechanical means. I soli- 
 cited information on these points, both privately and 
 publicly, from all the eminently scientific gentlemen 
 who honoured me with their company during the 
 meetings of the British Association in this town ; but 
 no one ventured to express a decided opinion as to the 
 causes of these remarkable phenomena. I now beg 
 to assure every reader of this treatise, that I shall 
 esteem it a great favour to be enlightened on points 
 which I confess are, at present, still above my com- 
 prehension. 
 
 It will be observed, for reasons adduced, I have 
 now entirely separated Hypnotism from Animal Mag- 
 netism. I consider it to be merely a simple, speedy, 
 and certain mode of throwing the nervous system 
 into a new condition, which may be rendered emi- 
 nently available in the cure of certain disorders. I
 
 ANIMAL MAGNETISM. 5 
 
 trust, therefore, it may be investigated quite inde- 
 pendently of any bias, either for or against the 
 subject, as connected with mesmerism ; and only by 
 the facts which can be adduced. I feel quite con- 
 fident we have acquired in this process a valuable 
 addition to our curative means ; but I repudiate the 
 idea of holding it up as a universal remedy ; nor- do 
 I even pretend to understand, as yet, the whole range 
 of diseases in which it may be useful. Time and ex- 
 perience alone can determine this question, as is the 
 case with all other new remedies. 
 
 When we consider that iu this process we have 
 acquired the power of raising sensibility to the most 
 extraordinary degree, and also of depressing it far 
 below the torpor of natural sleep ;* and that from the 
 latter condition, any or all of the senses may be 
 raised to the exalted state of sensibility referred to, 
 almost with the rapidity of thought, by so simple au 
 agency as a puff of air directed against the respective 
 parts ; and that we can also raise and depress the 
 force and frequency of the circulation, locally or 
 generally, in a most extraordinary degree, it must be 
 evident we have thus an important power to act 
 with. Whether these extraordinary physical effects 
 are produced through the imagination chiefly, or by 
 other means, it appears to me quite certain, that the 
 imagination has never been so nnich under our con- 
 trol, or capable of being made to act in the same 
 beneficial and uniform manner, by any other mode of 
 management hitherto known. 
 
 * Vide Experiments, pp. 61 to 67.
 
 6 VALUE AS A CURATIVE POWER. 
 
 That we really have acquired in this process a 
 valuable addition to our curative means, which en- 
 ables us speedily to put an end to many diseases 
 which resisted ordinary treatment, I think will be 
 satisfactorily manifested by the cases which I have 
 recorded. Many of these cases have been seen by other 
 medical men, and are so remarkable, so self-evident 
 to every candid and intelligent mind, that it is im- 
 possible, with any shew of propriety, to deny them. 
 Most unwarrantable and novel attempts have been 
 made, not only to extinguish the farther prosecu- 
 tion of Hypnotism, but also to misrepresent all I 
 had either said or done on the subject, and thus 
 damage me, as well as Hypnotism, in public estima- 
 tion. I am in possession of a mass of documen- 
 tary evidence in proof of this, to an extent which 
 could scarcely be credited. But I shall not trouble 
 my readers with details of all that has been done in 
 order to prejudice my patients against me. 
 
 As regards general principles, it has even been 
 attempted, by garbled statements, to set forth such 
 gross misrepresentations as could only be credited 
 by parties totally ignorant of the subject. Thus it 
 was alleged, that my mode of hypnotizing was no 
 novelty ; on the contrary, that it was an unac- 
 knowledged plagiarism, and that it was the opinion 
 and practice of Bertrand and the Abbe Faria. Now, 
 so far as I have been able to comprehend the mean- 
 ing of Bertrand, which Colquhoun observes, " it is 
 rather difficult to comprehend," he adheres " to the 
 theory of imagination, and imagination alone," 
 (Colquhoun's Ititroduction, p. 94.) At p. 34, vol. iv. of
 
 ERRONEOUS CHARGES REFUTED. 7 
 
 the "Encyclopaedia of Practical Medicine," DrPrichard 
 says of Bertrand, that he " comes at last to the con- 
 clusion, that all the results of these operations are 
 brought about through the influence of the mind ;" 
 that is, through the influence of the imagination of 
 the patients acting on themselves. Bertrand also 
 supports this opinion by the manner in which the 
 Abbe Faria performed magnetization. His plan was 
 this : " He placed the patient in an arm-chair, and 
 after telling him to shut his eyes, and collect himself, 
 suddenly pronounced, in a strong voice and impera- 
 tive tone, the word ' dormez,' which generally pro- 
 duced on the individual an impression sufficiently 
 strong to give a slight shock, and occasion warmth, 
 transpiration, and sometimes somnambulism." Had 
 his success by this method been as general as mine, 
 would he have used the word " sometimes" on this 
 occasion ?* It is farther added, " if the first attempt 
 failed, he tried the experiment a second, third, and 
 even a fourth time, after which he declared the indi- 
 vidual incapable of entering into the state of lucid 
 sleep." Whilst it is doubted that his success was 
 equal to what he represented it, still Bertrand states, 
 in reference to the Abbe Faria, that it was incon- 
 testable, " that he very often succeeded." Now, is 
 this not sufficient proof, that his success was by no 
 means so general as mine ? And who does not see, 
 on perusing my directions for hypnotizing, t that 
 our methods are very different ? 
 
 It is farther added, " The complete identity of the 
 phenomena thus produced by a method which operated 
 
 * Vide p. 24. f For proof of this, see pp. 27 and 28.
 
 8 OPINIONS OF MR BROOKES, 
 
 confessedly through the imagination, with those 
 which display themselves under the ordinary treat- 
 ment of the magnetizers, affords a strong reason for 
 concluding that the results in other instances depend 
 upon a similar principle." It is still farther added, 
 that M. Bertrand denies the necessity of strong intense 
 volitions of the operator being necessary to produce 
 the result. He declared, " that in trials made by him- 
 self, precisely the same results followed, whether he 
 WILLED to produce them or not, provided that the 
 patient was inwardly persuaded that the whole ritual 
 was duly observed" Can any farther remarks be re- 
 quired to prove that Bertrand referred the result en- 
 tirely to the effect of imagination ? And can any one 
 who has attended to what I have given as my opinion, 
 >ay that this either IPOS, or is my opinion ? Certainly 
 quite the contrary. The parties referred to, therefore, 
 have only proved their belief of how easy it is, by 
 garbled statements, to misrepresent the truth, when 
 submitting such remarks to those ignorant of the sub- 
 ject, or who are blinded by prejudice. 
 
 The following remarks by Mr H. Brookes, a cele- . 
 brated lecturer on animal magnetism, will illustrate 
 this point rather better than the individuals referred 
 to. On hearing that I had changed my original opinion 
 about identity, he writes thus : " I am very glad you 
 have at length found reason to change your original 
 opinion as to the identity of your phenomena with 
 those of mesmerism. From the very hrst I freely 
 .i'linitted the value and importance of your discovery, 
 but I could not admit that identity, and I blamed you 
 for insisting upon it so hastily, and using such hard 
 words against the animal magnetists, because they
 
 OF BERTBAND, AND MAYO. 9 
 
 could not agree with you. I thought, and still think, 
 you did wrong iu that, and that you certainly did 
 yourself injustice, for in fact you are the original dis- 
 coverer of a new agency, and not of a mere modifica- 
 tion of an old one." 
 
 But when so much had been said of Bertrand, with 
 the hope of making it appear that I had either been 
 ignorant of, or copied his views without due acknow- 
 ledgment, which is evidently erroneous, why not have 
 quoted him also to prove I was wrong in attributing 
 curative effects as resulting from these operations? 
 Let us hear what M. Bertrand says on this point. 
 He " declares, that it is difficult to imagine with what 
 facility the practisers of the art succeed in relieving 
 the most severe affections of the nervous system. 
 Attacks of epilepsy, in particular, are rendered con- 
 siderably less frequent and severe by their method 
 skilfully employed ; which displays in so remarkable 
 a manner the influence of moral impressions on the 
 physical state of the constitution." After such decla- 
 rations in favour of the curative power of mesmerism, 
 had M. Bertrand's method of inducing the condition 
 been as generally and speedily successful as mine, will 
 any one believe that it would not have been brought 
 more generally into practice ere now ? Mr Mayo, one 
 of our best authorities, in a letter to me on this subject, 
 states distinctly that the great reason for its not being 
 more generally introduced into practice, was the 
 tediousness of the processes for inducing the condition, 
 and the uncertainty, after all the time and trouble 
 devoted to the manipulation, of producing any result 
 whatever. He concludes his observations on this sub- 
 ject, by the remark, "It took up too much time." And
 
 10 DK PRICHARD'S OPINION. 
 
 Dr Prichard, author of the article referred to in the 
 Encyclopaedia of Practical Medicine, adds," " On the 
 whole, when we consider the degree of suffering occa- 
 sioned by disorders of the class over which magnetism 
 exerts an influence, through the medium of the ima- 
 gination, and the little efficacy which ordinary 
 remedies possess, of alleviating or counteracting them, 
 it i> much to be wished that this art, notwithstanding 
 the problematical nature of the theories connected 
 with it, were better known to us in actual practice." 
 I am aware great prejudice has been raised against 
 mesmerism, from the idea that it might be turned to 
 immoral purposes. In respect to the Neuro-Hypnotic 
 state, induced by the method explained in this treatise, 
 I am quite certain that it deserves no such censure. 
 I have proved by experiments, both in public and in 
 private, that during the state of excitement, the judg- 
 ment is sufficiently active to make the patients, if 
 possible, even more fastidious as regards propriety of 
 conduct, than in the waking condition ; and from the 
 state of rigidity and insensibility, they can be roused 
 to a state of mobility, and exalted sensibility, either 
 by being rudely handled, or even by a breath of air. 
 Nor is it requisite this should be done by the person 
 who put them into the Hypnotic state. It will 
 follow equally from the manipulations of any one 
 else, or a current of air impinging against the body, 
 from any mechanical contrivance whatever. And, 
 finally, the state cannot be induced, in any stage, 
 unless with the knowledge and consent of the party 
 operated on. This is more than can be said respecting 
 s great number of our most valuable medicines, for 
 there are many which we are in the daily habit of
 
 SHOULD BE USED BY THE PROFESSION ONLY. 11 
 
 using, with the best advantage in the relief and cure 
 of disease, which may be, and have been rendered 
 most potent for the furtherance of the ends of the 
 vicious and cruel ; and which can be administered 
 without the knowledge of the intended victim. It ought 
 never to be lost sight of, that there is the use and abuse 
 of every thing in nature. It is the use, and only the 
 judicious use of Hypnotism, which I advocate. 
 
 It is well known that I have never made any secret 
 of my modes of operating, as they have not only been 
 exhibited and explained publicly, but also privately, 
 to any professional gentleman, who wished for farther 
 information on the subject. Encouraged by the con- 
 fidence which flows from a consciousness of the 
 honesty and integrity of my purpose, and a thorough 
 conviction of the reality and value of this as a means 
 of cure, I have persevered, in defiance of much, and, 
 as I think, unwarrantable and capricious opposition. 
 
 In now unfolding to the medical profession gene- 
 rally to whose notice, and kind consideration, this 
 treatise is more particularly presented my views on 
 what I conceive to be a very important, powerful, and 
 extraordinary agent in the healing art ; I beg at once 
 distinctly to be understood, as repudiating the idea 
 of its being, or ever becoming, a universal remedy. 
 On the contrary, I feel quite assured it will require 
 all the acumen and experience of medical men, to 
 decide in what cases it would be safe and proper to 
 have recourse to such a mean ; and I have always 
 deprecated, in the strongest terms, any attempts at 
 its use amongst unprofessional persons, for the sake 
 of curiosity, or even for a nobler and more benevolent 
 object the relief of the infirm ; because I am satisfied
 
 12 DEFINITION OF TERMS. 
 
 it ought to be left in the hands of professional men, 
 and of them only. I have myself met with some 
 cases in which I considered it unsafe to apply it at 
 all ; and with other cases in which it would have 
 been most hazardous to have carried the operation so 
 far as the patients urged me to do.* 
 
 In now submitting my opinions and practice to 
 the profession in the following treatise, I consider 
 myself as having discharged an imperative duty to 
 them, and to the cause of humanity. In future, I 
 intend to go on quietly and patiently, prosecuting the 
 subject in the course of my practice, and shall leave 
 others to adopt or reject it, as they shall find con- 
 sistent with their own convictions. 
 
 As it is of the utmost importance, in discussing any 
 subject, to have a correct knowledge of the meaning 
 attached to peculiar terms made use of, I shall now 
 give a few definitions, and explain my reasons for 
 adopting the terms selected. 
 
 Nrtirypnology is derived from the Greek words 
 iiipo, nerve ; I/TVO?, sleep ; Xoyo?, a discourse ; and 
 means the rationale, or doctrine of nervous sleep, 
 which I define to be, " a peculiar condition of the 
 nervous system, into which it can be thrown by arti- 
 ficial contrivance :" or thus, " a peculiar condition of 
 the nervous system, induced by a fixed and abstracted 
 attention of the mental and visual eye, on one object, 
 not of an exciting nature." 
 
 The circumstances which render my operations danger- 
 ous, the symptoms which indicate danger, and the mode of 
 acting wheu they occur, to remove them, are pointed out, pp. 
 .VJ and 53.
 
 DEFINITION OF TERMS. 
 
 13 
 
 By the term " Neuro-Hypnotism," then, is to be 
 understood " nervous sleep ;" and, for the sake of 
 brevity, suppressing the prefix " Neuro," by the 
 terras 
 
 HYPNOTIC, 
 HYPNOTIZE, 
 
 HYPNOTIZED, 
 
 HYPNOTISM, 
 
 DEHYPNOTIZE, 
 
 DEHYPNOTIZED, 
 
 and 
 HYPNOTIST, j 
 
 be understo 
 
 The state or condition of nervous sleep. 
 
 To induce nervous sleep. 
 
 One who has been put into the state of 
 
 nervous sleep. 
 Nervous sleep. 
 To restore from the state or condition 
 
 of nervous sleep. 
 Restored from the state or condition of 
 
 nervous sleep. 
 
 One who practises Neuro-Hypnotism. 
 
 Whenever, therefore, any of these terms are used 
 in the following pages, I beg to be understood as 
 alluding to the discovery I have made of certain pecu- 
 liar phenomena derived and elicited by my mode of 
 operating ; and of which, to prevent misconception, 
 and intermingling with other theories and practices 
 on the nervous system, I have thought it best to give 
 the foregoing designation. 
 
 I regret, as many of my readers may do, the incon- 
 venient length of the name ; but, as most of our 
 professional terms, and nearly all those of a doctrinal 
 meaning, have a Greek origin, I considered it most 
 in accordance with good taste, not to deviate from an 
 established usage. To obviate this in some degree, I 
 have struck out two letters from the original ortho- 
 graphy, which was Neuro-Hypnology.
 
 NEUKYPNOLOGY. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 Introductory remarks Circumstances which directed to the investigation 
 Anal phenomenon observed Experiments instituted to prove the 
 cause of it Opinions and conclusions drawn from them Reasons for 
 separating Hypnotism from Mesmerism Hypnotism more generally 
 successful than Animal Magnetism Mr Herbert Mayo's testimony on 
 tUU point Proofs of this referred to Different modes by which it can 
 be Induced Can only be expected to succeed by complying with the 
 whole conditions required. 
 
 HAVING, in the introduction, presented a cursory 
 view of certain points, and given a few explanatory 
 remarks, I shall now proceed to a more particular 
 and detailed consideration of the subject. I shall 
 explain the course I have pursued in prosecuting my 
 investigation ; the phenomena which I discovered to 
 result from the manipulations had recourse to ; the 
 inferences I was consequently led to deduce from 
 them ; the method I now recommend for inducing 
 the hypnotic condition, for applying it in the cure
 
 HYPNOTISM HOW DISCOVERED. 15 
 
 of various disorders, and the result of my experience, 
 as to the efficacy of hypnotism as a curative agent. 
 
 By the impression which hypnotism induces on 
 the nervous system, we acquire a power of rapidly 
 curing many functional disorders, most intractable, 
 or altogether incurable, by ordinary remedies, and 
 also many of those distressing affections which, as in 
 most cases they evince no pathological change of 
 structure, have been presumed to depend on some 
 peculiar condition of the nervous system, and have 
 therefore, by universal consent, been denominated 
 " nervous complaints ;" and as I felt satisfied it was 
 not dependent on any special agency or emanation, 
 passing from the body of the operator to that of 
 the patient, as the animal magnetizers allege is the 
 case by their process, I considered it desirable, for the 
 sake of preventing misconception, to adopt new terms, 
 as explained in the introduction. 
 
 I was led to discover the mode I now adopt with 
 so much success for inducing' this artificial condition 
 of the nervous 'system, by a course of experiments 
 instituted with the view to determine the cause of 
 mesmeric phenomena. From all I had read and 
 heard of mesmerism, (such as, the phenomena being 
 capable of being excited in so few, and these few 
 individuals in a state of disease, or naturally of a 
 delicate constitution, or peculiarly susceptible tem- 
 perament, and from the phenomena, when induced, 
 being said to be so exaggerated, or of such an extra- 
 ordinary nature,) I was fully inclined to join with 
 those who considered the whole to be a system of 
 collusion or delusion, or of excited imagination, sym- 
 pathy, or imitation.
 
 16 PHENOMENON ARRESTING ATTENTION. 
 
 The first exhibition of the kind I ever had an oppor- 
 tunity of attending, was one of M. Lafontaine's con- 
 versazioni, on the 13th November, 1841. That night 
 I saw nothing to diminish, but rather to confirm, my 
 previous prejudices. At the next conversazione, six 
 nights afterwards, one fact, the inability of a patient 
 to open his eyelids, arrested my attention. I con- 
 sidered that to be a real phenomenon, and was anxious 
 to discover the physiological cause of it. Next night, 
 I watched this case when again operated on, with 
 intense interest, and before the termination of the 
 experiment, felt assured I had discovered its cause, 
 but considered it prudent not to announce my opinion 
 publicly, until I had had an opportunity of testing its 
 accuracy, by experiments and observation in private. 
 
 In two days afterwards, I developed my views to 
 my friend Captain Brown, as I had also previously 
 done to four other friends ; and in his presence, and 
 that of my family, and another friend, the same 
 evening, I instituted a series of experiments to prove 
 the correctness of my theory, namely, that the con- 
 tinued fixed stare, by paralyzing nervous centres in 
 the eyes and their appendages,* and destroying the 
 equilibrium of the nervous system, thus produced the 
 phenomenon referred to. The experiments were 
 varied so as to convince all present, that they fully 
 bore out the correctness of my theoretical views. 
 
 My first object was to prove, that the inability of 
 the patient to open his eyes was caused by paralyzing 
 
 * By this expression I mean the state of exhaustion which 
 follows too long continued, or too intense action, of any organ 
 or function.
 
 EXPERIMENTS TO PROVE CAUSE OF. 17 
 
 the levator muscles of the eyelids, through their con- 
 tinued action during the protracted fixed stare, and 
 thus rendering it physically impossible for him to open 
 them.* With the view of proving this, I requested Mr 
 Walker, a young gentleman present, to sit down, and 
 maintain a fixed stare at the top of a wine bottle, placed 
 so much above him as to produce a considerable strain 
 on the eyes and eyelids, to enable him to maintain a 
 steady view of the object. In three minutes his eyelids 
 closed, a gush of tears ran down his cheeks, his head 
 drooped, his face was slightly convulsed, he gave a 
 groan, and instantly fell into profound sleep, the re- 
 spiration becoming slow, deep and sibilant, the right 
 hand and arm being agitated by slight convulsive 
 movements. At the end of four minutes I considered 
 it necessary, for his safety, to put an end to the ex- 
 periment. 
 
 This experiment not only proved what I expected, 
 but also, by calling my attention to the spasmodic 
 state of the muscles^of the face and arm, the peculiar 
 state of the respiration, and the condition of the 
 mind, as evinced on rousing the patient, tended to 
 
 * Attempts have been made to prove, that I got this idea 
 from a person who publicly maintained that the patient re- 
 ferred to could have opened his eyes if he liked ; to this the 
 patient having replied, " I have tried all I could and cannot ;" 
 the individual referred to, in support of his opinion, alleged, 
 that the inability was only imaginary ; that he "could easily 
 believe that a man may stand with his back to a wall, and 
 may really believe that he has no power to move from the 
 wall." It is therefore clear this individual attributed the 
 phenomena to a mental, whilst I attributed it to a j)hysical 
 cause.
 
 18 EXPERIMENTS AND 
 
 prove to my mind I had got the key to the solution 
 of mesmerism. The agitation and alarm of this gentle- 
 man, on being roused, very much astonished Mrs 
 Braid. She expressed herself greatly surprised at hia 
 being so much alarmed about nothing, as she had 
 watched the whole time, and never saw me near him, 
 or touching him in any way whatever. I proposed that 
 she should be the next subject operated on, to which 
 she readily consented, assuring all present that she 
 would not be so easily alarmed as the gentleman 
 referred to. I requested her to sit down, and gaze on 
 the ornament of a china sugar basin, placed at 
 the same angle to the eyes as the bottle in the for- 
 mer experiment. In two minutes the expression of 
 the face was very much changed ; at the end of two 
 minutes and a half the eyelids closed convulsively ; 
 the mouth was distorted ; she gave a deep sigh, the 
 bosom heaved, she fell back, and was evidently pass- 
 ing into an hysteric paroxysm, to prevent which I 
 instantly roused her. On counting the pulse I found 
 it had mounted up to 180 strokes a minute. 
 
 In order to prove my position still more clearly, I 
 called up one of my men-servants, who knew nothing 
 of mesmerism, and gave him such directions as were 
 calculated to impress his mind with the idea, that 
 his fixed attention was merely for the purpose of 
 watching a chemical experiment in the preparation 
 of some medicine, and being familiar with such he 
 could feel no alarm. In two minutes and a half his 
 eyelids closed slowly with a vibrating motion, his 
 chin fell on his breast, he gave a deep sigh, and in- 
 stantly was in a profound sleep, breathing loudly. 
 All the persons present burst into a fit of laughter,
 
 INFERENCES DRAWN FROM THEM. 19 
 
 but still he was not interrupted by us. In about one 
 minute after his profound sleep I roused him, and 
 pretended to chide him for being so careless, said he 
 ought to be ashamed of himself for not being able to 
 attend to my instructions for three minutes without 
 falling asleep, and ordered him down stairs. In a 
 short time I recalled this young man, and desired him 
 to sit down once more, but to be careful not to go to 
 sleep again, as on the former occasion. He sat down 
 with this intention, but at the expiration of two 
 minutes and a half his eyelids closed, and exactly the 
 same phenomena as in the former experiment ensued. 
 I again tried the experiment by causing Mr Walker 
 to gaze on a different object from that used in the first 
 experiments, but still, as I anticipated, the phenomena 
 were the same. I also tried him a la Fontaine, with 
 the thumbs and eyes, and likewise by gazing on my 
 eyes without contact, and still the effects were the 
 same, as I fully expected. 
 
 I now stated that I considered the experiments 
 fully proved my theory ; and expressed my entire 
 conviction that the phenomena of mesmerism were to 
 be accounted for on the principle of a derangement of 
 the state of the cerebro-spinal centres, and of the cir- 
 culatory, and respiratory, and muscular systems, in- 
 duced, as I have explained, by a fixed stare, absolute 
 repose of body, fixed attention, and suppressed respi- 
 ration, concomitant with that fixity of attention. That 
 the whole depended on the physical and psychical 
 condition of the patient, arising from the causes re- 
 ferred to, and not at all on the volition, or passes of 
 the operator, throwing out a magnetic fluid, or ex- 
 citing into activity some mystical universal fluid or
 
 20 JIESMER'S EXPERIMENTS. 
 
 medium. I farther added, that having thus produced 
 the primary phenomena, I had no doubt but the 
 others would follow as a matter of course, time being 
 allowed for their gradual and successive develop- 
 ment.* 
 
 * It has been asserted, for the mere purpose of proving 
 the contrary, that I had claimed being the first to discover 
 that contact was not necessary, and that a magnetic fluid was 
 not required to produce the phenomena of mesmerism. I 
 never made any such claim, but illustrated these facts by 
 the most simple and conclusive experiments probably which 
 were ever adduced for that purpose. In one of my lectures, 
 I gave a history of mesmerism, including Mesmer's attempt 
 to mesmerize trees in Dr Franklin's garden, to prove to the 
 Commission of 1784, that the patients would become affected 
 when they went under the mesmerized trees, from the mag- 
 netic fluid passing from the trees to the patients. This was 
 proof sufficient, that even Mevmer did not hold that contact 
 was necessary. I farther stated the fact, that the experiment 
 was a failure, as the patient became affected, not under the 
 minnerized, but under the wremesmerized trees, which led 
 the Commission to infer, that the phenomena resulted from 
 imagination, and not from the influence of a magnetic fluid. 
 Here, then, we had two theories, neither of which considered 
 contact necessary. Surely no one could suppose that I 
 wished to lay claim to these facts as discoveries of my own, 
 seeing I gave the dates when the occurrence took place, 
 which was many years before I was born. 
 
 Moreover, I explained, at the same lecture, the different 
 modes of mesmerizing, by passes at a distance, and by pointing 
 the fingers at the eyes and forehead, adopted by others, long 
 before I made any experiments on the subject ; and at sub- 
 sequent lectures, from observing the graceful attitudes some 
 patients assumed during the hypnotic state, and the ease 
 with which they could maintain any given position, by be-
 
 HYPNOTISM SEPARATED FROM MESMERISM. 21 
 
 For a considerable time I was of opinion that the 
 phenomena induced by my mode of operating and 
 that of the mesmerizers, were identical ; and, so far as 
 I have yet personally seen, I still consider the condi- 
 tion of the nervous system induced by both modes to 
 be at least analogous. It appeared to me that the 
 fixation of the mind and eyes was attained occa- 
 sionally during the monotonous movements of the 
 mesmerizers, and thus they succeeded sometimes, and 
 as it were, by chance ; whereas, by my insisting on the 
 eyes being fixed in the most favourable position, and 
 the mind thus rivetted to one idea, as the primary 
 and imperative conditions, my success was consequently 
 general and the effects intense, while theirs was feeble 
 and uncertain. However, from what the mesmerizers 
 state as to effects which they can produce in certain 
 cases, there seem to be differences sufficient to war- 
 rant the conclusion that they ought to be considered 
 as distinct agencies ; and for the following reasons. 
 The mesmerizers positively assert that they can pro- 
 duce certain effects, which I have never been able to 
 produce by my mode, although I have tried to do so.* 
 
 coming cataleptiformly fixed in it, I hazarded the opinion, 
 that it may have been to hypnotism the Grecians were in- 
 debted for their fine statuary ; and the Fakirs for their 
 power of performing their remarkable feats. I also ex- 
 pressed my belief, that the rapt state of religious enthusiasts, 
 such as that of the monks of Mount Athos, arose from the 
 same cause, although none of the parties might have under- 
 stood the true principle by which they were pi'oduced. 
 
 * The effects I allude to are such as, telling the time on a 
 watch held behind the head, or placed on the pit of the sto- 
 mach ; reading closed letters, or a shut book ; perceiving
 
 22 HYPNOTISM MORE READILY INDUCED. 
 
 Now, I do not consider it fair or proper to impugn the 
 statements of others in this matter, who are known to 
 be men of talent and observation, and of undoubted 
 credit in other matters, merely because / have not 
 personally witnessed the phenomena, or been able to 
 produce them myself, either by my own mode or 
 theirs. With my present means of knowledge I am 
 willing to admit that certain phenomena to which I 
 refer have been induced by others, but still I think 
 most of them may be explained in a different and 
 more natural way than that of the mesmerizers. When 
 I shall have personally had evidence of the special 
 influence and its effects to which they lay claim, I 
 shall not be backward in bearing testimony to the 
 fact. 
 
 However, the greatest and most important diffe- 
 rence is this, that they can succeed so seldom, and I 
 so generally, in inducing the phenomena which 
 we both profess thus to effect. Granting, therefore, to 
 the mesmerizers the full credit of being able to pro- 
 duce certain wonderful phenomena which I have not 
 been able to produce by my plan, still it follows, that 
 mine is superior to theirs in as far as general appli- 
 cability and practical utility are concerned. Mine has 
 also this advantage, that I am quite certain no one 
 can be affected by it, in any stage of the process, 
 unless by the free will and consent of the patient, 
 which is at once sufficient to exonerate the practice 
 what is doing miles off ; having the power of perceiving the 
 nature and cure of the diseases of others, although unedu- 
 cated in medical science ; mesmerising patients at miles' dis- 
 tance, without the knowledge or belief in the patient that any 
 such operation is intended.
 
 MK H. MAYO'S TESTIMONY. 23 
 
 from the imputations of being capable of being con- 
 verted to immoral purposes, which has been so much 
 insisted on to the prejudice of animal magnetism. 
 This has arisen from the mesmerizers asserting that 
 they have the power of overmastering patients irre- 
 sistibly, even whilst at a distance, by mere volitions 
 and secret passes. 
 
 I am fully borne out by the opinion of that emi- 
 nent physiologist, Mr Herbert Mayo, in my view of 
 the subject, that my plan is " the best, the shortest, 
 and surest for getting the sleep," and throwing the 
 nervous system, by artificial contrivance, into a new 
 condition, which may be rendered available in the 
 healing art. At a private conversazione, which I gave 
 to the profession in London on the 1st of March, 
 1842, he examined and tested my patients most care- 
 fully, submitted himself to be operated on by me 
 both publicly and privately, and was so searching 
 and inquisitive in his investigations as to call forth 
 the animadversions of a medical gentleman present, 
 who thought he was not giving me fair play ; but 
 which he has assured me proceeded from an anxious 
 desire to know the truth, not being biassed by having 
 any peculiar views of his own to bring forward ; and 
 because he considered the subject most important, 
 both in a speculative and practical point of view. 
 
 Whatever I advance, therefore, in the following 
 remarks, I wish to be distinctly understood as strictly 
 in reference to my own mode of operating, and dis- 
 tinct from that of all others. The latter I shall 
 merely refer to in as far as is necessary to point out 
 certain sources of fallacy by which the phenomena of 
 the one may be confounded with those of the other.
 
 24 HYPNOTISM GENERALLY INDUCED. 
 
 In proof of the general success of my mode of 
 operating, I need only name, that at one of my public 
 lectures in Manchester, fourteen male adults, in 
 good health, all strangers to me, stood up at once, and 
 ten of them became decidedly hypnotized. At Roch- 
 dale I conducted the experiments for a friend, and 
 hypnotized twenty strangers in one night. At a 
 private conversazione to the profession in London, on 
 the 1st of March, 1842, eighteen adults, most of them 
 entire strangers to me, sat down at once, and in ten 
 minutes sixteen of them were decidedly hypnotized. 
 Mr Herbert Mayo tested some of these patients, and 
 satisfied himself of the reality of the phenomena. On 
 another occasion I took thirty-two children into a 
 room, none of whom had either seen or heard of 
 hypnotism or mesmerism : I made them stand up at 
 three times, and in ten or twelve minutes had the 
 whole thirty-two hypnotized, maintaining their arms 
 extended while in the hypnotic condition, and this 
 at mid-day. In making this statement, I do not 
 mean to say they were in the ulterior stage, or state 
 of torpor ; but that they were in the primary stage, or 
 that of excitement, from which experience has taught me 
 confidently to rely that the torpid and rigid state will 
 certainly follow, by merely affording time for the 
 phenomena to develop themselves. In the Stockport 
 Chronicle of 4th February, 1842, there is a report of 
 a lecture delivered in that town a few days before. A 
 dozen male patients were made to stand up at once, 
 and treated according to my method, six of them 
 became hypnotized, and two of them so deeply, as to 
 cause the lecturer very considerable trouble to rouse 
 them. With one named "Charlie," all the usual
 
 CAUSES OF FAILURE. 25 
 
 means, including bufferings and frictions before a fire, 
 did not succeed in restoring speech until he had been 
 made to swallow nearly half a tumbler glass of neat 
 gin. I consider this important as being the testimony 
 of an enemy. It can take place also in the dark, as well 
 as by day or by gas light ; when the eyes are bandaged, 
 as when they are uncovered, by merely keeping the 
 eyes fixed, the body in a state of absolute rest, and 
 the mind abstracted from all other considerations. 
 In cases of children, and those of weak intellect, or 
 of restless and excitable minds, whom I could not 
 manage so as to make them comply with these simple 
 rules, I have always been foiled, although most 
 anxious to succeed. This I consider a strong proof 
 of the correctness of my views. By arresting the 
 attention, and fixing the eyes, it is also successful 
 with brute animals. 
 
 This general success of my plan, both with man 
 and brute animals, I consider sufficient to prove it 
 proceeds from a law in the animal economy. The 
 exceptions to success are so few as to lead to the con- 
 clusion that they arise from a non-compliance with 
 the conditions. It is, however, unquestionable, that 
 there exists great difference in the susceptibility of 
 different individuals, some becoming rapidly and 
 intensely affected, others slowly and feebly so. 
 
 I am aware that some say they have tried my 
 mode, and failed to produce the phenomena. The 
 reason, I presume, is simply this. They will not 
 believe the necessity of complying with the WHOLE of 
 the conditions I have distinctly insisted on. But, in 
 all fairness, if they do not comply with the WHOLE 
 conditions, they have no right to expect the promised
 
 26 CAUSES OF FAILURE. 
 
 results, nor to be disappointed because they fail. If 
 the patient and operator comply in all respects as I 
 direct, success is almost certain ; but, on the contrary, 
 he is almost equally certain to fail if all the conditions 
 are not strictly complied with. 
 
 When we consider the great difficulty to some per- 
 sons of abstracting their minds, and the greater diffi- 
 culty of ensuring that patients operated on in a public 
 room shall be able to abstract their minds entirely 
 from the circumstances with which they are sur- 
 rounded, and from other considerations concentrate 
 their ideas entirely on the subject in hand, and the 
 equally great difficulty of securing absolute quiet where 
 a large nnmber of people are assembled, and the ex- 
 treme quickness of hearing when patients are passing 
 into the hypnotic state, which makes them liable to 
 be roused by the slightest noise, it must be evident, 
 that a public lecture-room is by no means a favour- 
 able place for operating on patients for the first time. 
 
 Prosecuting the investigation, as I have been doing, 
 by experiments and observations, I have, as might 
 be expected, had occasion to modify and alter some 
 of my views and manipulations ; but still the prin- 
 ciple remains the same.
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Mode of Hypnotizing Circumstances necessary to be complied with 
 Peculiar phenomena which follow; excitement first, and afterwards 
 depression of function Importance of attending to this How these 
 may be made to alternate with each other Extraordinary influence of 
 a current of air during Hypnotism Reasons for certain modifications of 
 original modes of operating Hypnotism proceeds from a law of the 
 animal economy Arises from the physical and psychical condition of 
 the patient, and not from any emanation or principle proceeding from 
 others Example for proof Exhibits no appreciable electric or mag- 
 netic change. Two patients may hypnotize each other by contact. 
 Phenomena arise spontaneously in course of disease. Mr Wakley's 
 admission on this point. Mr H. Mayo's testimony as to the effects of 
 Hypnotism. Effects of different positions of the eyes. Remarks on 
 articles in Medical Gazette. Consensual adjustment of eyes. Effects 
 on size of pupil. Power of habit and imagination. Docility of pa- 
 tients, and exalted sensibility, and their effects. Patient hypnotized 
 whilst operating on another. Mode of resisting influence. 
 
 I NOW proceed to detail the mode which I practise 
 for inducing the phenomena. Take any bright object 
 (I generally use my lancet case) between the thumb 
 and fore and middle fingers of the left hand ; hold it 
 from about eight to fifteen inches from the eyes, at 
 such position above the forehead as may be necessary 
 to produce the greatest possible strain upon the eyes 
 and eyelids, and enable the patient to maintain a steady 
 fixed stare at the object.* The patient must be made 
 
 * At an early period of my investigations, I caused the 
 patients to look at a cork bound on the forehead. This was
 
 28 DIRECTIONS FOE HYPNOTIZING. 
 
 , understand that he is to keep the eyes steadily _fixed 
 on*e object, and the mind riveted on the idea of that 
 one object. It will be observed, that owing to the 
 conseimal adjustment of the eyes, the pupils wi be 
 ^"contracted: they -ill shortly begin to ^ dilate 
 mid ifter they have done so to a considerable extent 
 and have aimed a wavy motion, if the fore and 
 middle fingers of the right hand, extended and a httle 
 grated, are carried from the object towards the 
 STmort probably the eyelids will close involun- 
 tarTl'y, with a vibratory motion. If this is not the 
 case or the patient allows the eyeballs to mow , desire 
 him to begin anew, giving him to understand that he 
 is to allow the eyelids to close when the fingers are 
 again carried towards the eyes, but that the eyeballs 
 must be kept fixed in the same position, and the mmd 
 riveted to the one idea of the object held above the eyes 
 It will generally be found, that the eyelids close with 
 a vibratory motion, or become spasmodically clo 
 After ten or fifteen seconds have elapsed, by gently 
 elevating the arms and legs, it will be found that the 
 patient has a disposition to retain them in the situation 
 in which they have been placed, if he is intensely a/ected. 
 
 a very efficient plan with those who had the power of con- 
 verging the eyes so as to keep them both steadily directed on 
 the object I very soon found, however, that there were 
 many who could not keep both, eyes steadily fixed on so near 
 an object, and that the result was, that such patients did not 
 become hypnotized. To obviate this, I caused them to look 
 at a more distant point, which, although scarcely so rapid and 
 intense in its effects, succeeds more generally than the other, 
 and is therefore what I now adopt and recommend.
 
 EFFECTS OF HYPNOTISM. 29 
 
 If this is not the case, in a soft tone of voice desire 
 him to retain the limbs in the extended position, and 
 thus the pulse will speedily become greatly accele- 
 rated, and the limbs, in process of time, will become 
 quite rigid and involuntarily fixed. It will also be 
 found, that all the organs of special sense, excepting 
 sight, including heat and cold, and muscular motion, 
 or resistance, and certain mental faculties, are at first 
 prodigiously exalted, such as happens with regard to 
 the primary effects of opium, wine, and spirits. After 
 a certain point, however, this exaltation of function is 
 followed by a state of depression, far greater than the 
 torpor of natural sleep.* From the state of the most 
 profound torpor of the organs of special sense, and 
 tonic rigidity of the muscles, they may, at this stage, 
 instantly be restored to the opposite condition of ex- 
 treme mobility and exalted sensibility, by directing 
 
 * I wish to direct especial attention to this circumstance, 
 as from overlooking the fact of the first stage of this artificial 
 hypnotism being one of excitement, with the possession of 
 consciousness and docility, many imagine they are not affected, 
 whilst the acceleration of pulse, peculiar expression of coun- 
 tenance, and other characteristic symptoms, prove the exis- 
 tence of the condition beyond the possibility of a doubt, 
 to all who understand the subject, I consider it very impru- 
 dent to carry it to the ulterior stage, or that of torpor, at a 
 first trial. Moreover, there is great difference in the suscep- 
 tibility to the neuro-hypnotic impression, some arriving at 
 the state of rigidity and insensibility in a few minutes, whilst 
 others may readily pass into the primary stage, but can 
 scarcely be brought into the ulterior, or rigid and torpid 
 state. It is also most important to note, that many instances 
 of remarkable and permanent cures have occurred, where it 
 has never been carried beyond the state of consciousness.
 
 30 MODES OF OPERATING. 
 
 a current of air against the organ or organs we wish 
 to excite to action, or the muscles we wish to render 
 limber, and which had been in the cataleptiform state. 
 By mere repose the senses will speedily merge into 
 the original condition again. The modus operandi 
 of the current of air producing such extraordinary 
 effects, I acknowledge myself quite unable to explain, 
 but I have no difficulty in producing and repro- 
 ducing the effects by the same means, whether per- 
 formed by myself or others, and whether the current 
 of air is from the lips, from a pair of bellows, or by 
 the motion of the hand, or any inanimate object. 
 The extent and abruptness of these transitions (see 
 page 63) are so extraordinary, that they must be 
 seen before the possibility is believed. 
 
 An abrupt blow, or pressure over the rigid muscle, 
 will de-hypnotize a rigid part ; but, I have found 
 pressing the nose will not restore smell, unless very 
 gentle and continued, nor will pressing a handker- 
 chief against the ear restore hearing when the ear has 
 become torpid, nor will gentle friction over the skin 
 restore sensibility to the dormant skin, or mobility to 
 the rigid muscles underneath, (unless so gentle as to 
 be titillation, properly so called,) and yet a slight puff 
 of wind will instantly rouse the whole to abnormal 
 sensibility and mobility : a fact which has perplexed 
 and puzzled me exceedingly. 
 
 At first I required the patients to look at an object 
 until the eyelids closed of themselves, involuntarily. 
 I found, however, that in many cases this was fol- 
 lowed by pain in the globes of the eyes, and 
 slight inflammation of the conjunctival membrane. 
 In order to avoid this, I now close the eyelids, 
 when the impression on the pupil already referred
 
 GENERAL INFERENCE. 31 
 
 to has taken place, because I find that the beneficial 
 phenomena follow this method, provided the eye- 
 balls are kept fixed, and thus, too,' the unpleasant 
 feelings in the globes of the eyes will be prevented. 
 Were the object to produce astonishment in the 
 person operated on, by finding himself unable to 
 open his eyes, the former method is the better ; as 
 the eyes once closed it is generally impossible for him 
 to open them ; whereas they may be opened for a 
 considerable time after being closed in the other mode 
 I now recommend. However, for curative purposes, 
 I prefer the plan which leaves no pain in the globes 
 of the eyes. 
 
 In fine, from a careful analysis of the whole of my 
 experiments, which have been very numerous, I have 
 been led to the following conclusion : That it is a 
 law in the animal economy, that by a continued 
 fixation of the mental and visual eye, on any object 
 which is not of itself of an exciting nature, with abso- 
 lute repose of body, and general quietude, they become 
 wearied ; and, provided the patients rather favour than 
 resist the feeling of stupor of which they will soon 
 experience the tendency to creep upon them, during 
 such experiments, a state of somnolency is induced, 
 accompanied with that condition of the brain and 
 nervous system generally, which renders the patient 
 liable to be affected, according to the mode of mani- 
 pulating, so as to exhibit the hypnotic phenomena. 
 As the experiment succeeds with the blind, I con- 
 sider it not so much the optic, as the sentient, motor, 
 and sympathetic nerves, and the mind through 
 which the impression is made. I feel so thoroughly 
 convinced that it is a law of the animal economy 
 that such effects should follow such condition of
 
 32 
 
 ALLEGED CAUSE OF PHENOMENA. 
 
 my deliberate o^on,^tt ^ 
 
 not be controverted. to t f go 
 
 may never be able to account for that m ^ ^ 
 
 as Jo satisfy all ^^T^^^t as experience 
 
 why the law of gnmtoto on sh ould ^ ^ 
 
 has taught us it does act St ^,as ow g ^ 
 
 -- ; " 
 
 
 lnotaw ar ehehadcalledher,orofwhathad passed 
 I have also had the state of the patient tested
 
 NO MAGNETIC CHANGE. 33 
 
 before, during, and after being hypnotized, to ascer- 
 tain if there was any alteration in the magnetic or 
 electric condition, but although tested by excellent 
 instruments, and with great care, no appreciable 
 difference could be detected. Patients have been 
 hypnotized whilst positively, and also whilst nega- 
 tively, electrified, without any appreciable difference 
 in the phenomena ; so that they appear to be excited 
 independently of electric or magnetic change. I 
 have also repeatedly made two patients hypnotize 
 each other, at the same time, by personal contact. 
 How could this be reconciled with the theory of a 
 special influence transmitted being the cause of the 
 phenomena, plus and minus being equally efficient ? 
 
 It is also well known, that occasionally the pheno- 
 mena arise spontaneously in the course of disease. 
 
 It is now admitted even by the editor of the Lancet, 
 one of the greatest opponents of mesmerism, in the 
 leading article of 4th February, 1843, that the phe- 
 nomena " are wonderful only to those who are 
 unacquainted with the aspects of disease ;" and " that 
 we continually see patients labouring under hysteria, 
 and analogous forms of nervous disease, falling sud- 
 denly into various states of stupor, trance, and con- 
 vulsion, without any assignable cause." When it is 
 acknowledged that such effects as those named, may 
 spring from such slight influences as to be said to arise 
 " without any assignable cause" can it be wondered at 
 that important changes may be induced by acting on 
 the nervous system in the way I have adopted, of 
 which Mr Herbert Mayo, (whose competence to give 
 an opinion on any physiological subject no one will 
 question, and who himself publicly submitted to be 
 c
 
 ,34 MB MAYO'S OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 operated on by me,) observed, in the course of ottr 
 correspondence, that it induces " a feeling of stupor, 
 which any one may observe has a disposition to creep 
 upon him, when he tries your experiment of looking 
 fixedly at an object as you direct." 
 
 I thought it desirable, therefore, to adopt the name 
 I did, for the reasons explained in the introduction. 
 
 A patient may be hypnotized by keeping the eyes 
 fixed in any direction. It occurs most slowly and 
 feebly when the eyes are directed straight forward, and 
 most rapidly and intensely when they can be main- 
 tained in the position of a double internal and 
 upward squint.* 
 
 * It is not a little amusing to find any one try to distort so 
 greatly, by garbled statements, the plain meaning of an author, 
 as to make it appear that a writer of some articles on Animal 
 Magnetism, in the Medical Gazette in 1833, was well ac- 
 quainted with my mode of operating. He observes at page 
 856, " On the majority of persons no influence whatever is 
 exhibited." How does this coincide with the general success 
 of my mode as stated at page 24 ? " On those least affected 
 a number of anomalous slight symptoms are produced." He 
 then describes those " feelings of heat and cold, and those of 
 creeping and trembling," which, he adds, " are only the usual 
 imaginary feelings which most persons have if their attention 
 be strongly directed to any particular part of the body, more 
 especially if (as i.-j generally the case with magnetic patients,) 
 something is expected to occur." Such are the symptoms 
 attributed by this writer to " attention," but are these the 
 symptoms or phenomena induced by Hypnotism, as stated 
 in Chapter IV. I Or is there the slightest similarity in the 
 cause ! In this author's view it is the result of " attention 
 strongly directed to different parts of tlie body," whereas mine 
 is by attention rivetted to something without the body. The
 
 CONSENSUAL ADJUSTMENT OF PUPILS. 35 
 
 It is now pretty generally known, that during the 
 effort to look at a very near object, there is produced, 
 according to the direction of the object, a double 
 internal squint, or double internal and downward or 
 upward squint, and the pupils are thereby powerfully 
 contracted. I am not aware, however, that it has 
 been recorded, that by directing the eyes loosely, 
 
 best mode of gathering the opinion of an author appears to 
 me to be that of his summing up at the conclusion of his sub- 
 ject. Now, at page 1037, the subject is concluded by the 
 following observations : " This, then, is our case. Every 
 credible effect of magnetism has occurred, and every incredible 
 is said to have occurred in cases where no magnetic influence 
 has been exerted, but in all which excited imagination, irri- 
 tation, or some powerful mental impression, has operated : 
 where the mind has been alone acted on, magnetic effects 
 have been produced without magnetic manipulations : where 
 magnetic manipulations have been employed, unknown, and 
 therefore without the assistance of the mind, no result has 
 ever been produced." Now, can any thing more be required 
 than this, to prove that this writer, as well as Bertrand, 
 adheres to the theory of imagination ? Such was the impres- 
 sion left on my mind by reading these papers when they were 
 published ; and, together with Wakley's experiments, deter- 
 mined me to consider the whole as a system of collusion or 
 illusion, or of excited imagination, sympathy, or imitation. I 
 therefore abandoned the subject as unworthy of farther investi- 
 gation, until I attended the conversazioni of Lafontaine, where 
 I saw one fact, the inability of a patient to open his eyelids, 
 which arrested my attention ; I felt convinced it was not to 
 be attributed to any of the causes referred to, and I therefore 
 instituted experiments to determine the question ; .and exhi- 
 bited the results to the public in a few days after.
 
 36 EFFECTS OF IMAGINATION 
 
 upwards or downwards, to the right or to the left, as 
 if looking at a very distant object, the pupils become 
 very much dilated, irrespective of the quantity of 
 light passing to the retina ; so that in this manner we 
 can contract or dilate the pupil at will. To those who 
 consider the movement of the iris as the mere effect of 
 irritability, I may observe, in that view, the former 
 position increases, the latter diminishes, the irrita- 
 bility. I may farther remark, if the eyes are much 
 strained in ANY direction, I think the pupils will be 
 found to contract as a consequence. 
 
 It is important to remark, that the oftener patients 
 are hypnotized, from association of ideas and habit, the 
 more susceptible they become ; and in this way they 
 are liable to be affected entirely through the imagination. 
 Thus, if they consider or imagine there is something 
 doing, although they do not see it, from which they 
 are to be affected, they will become affected; but, on the 
 contrary, the most expert hypnotist in the world may 
 exert all his endeavours in vain, if the party does not 
 expect it, and mentally and bodily comply, and thus 
 yield to it. 
 
 It is this very circumstance, coupled with the 
 extreme docility and mobility of the patients, and 
 extended range and extreme quickness of action, at a 
 certain stage, of the ordinary functions of the organs 
 of sense, including heat and cold, and muscular 
 motion, the tendency of the patients in this state to 
 approach to, or recede from, impressions, according as 
 their intensity or quality is agreeable or the contrary, 
 which I consider has misled so many, and induced the 
 animal magnetizers to imagine they could produce
 
 AXD HABIT. 37 
 
 their effects on patients at a distance, through mere 
 volition and secret passes.* 
 
 ,* In the Medical Times of 26th March, 1842, 1 published 
 a letter on this subject, from which I make the following 
 extracts : 
 
 " The supposed power of seeing with other parts of the body 
 than the eyes, I consider is a misnomer, so far as I have yet 
 personally witnessed. It is quite certain, however, that some 
 patients can tell the shape of what is held at an inch and a 
 half from the skin, on the back of the neck, crown of the 
 head, arm, or hand, or other parts of the body, but it is from 
 feeling they do so ; the extremely exalted sensibility of the 
 skin enabling them to discern the shape of the object so 
 presented, from its tendency to emit or absorb caloric. This, 
 however, is not sight, but feeling. 
 
 " In like manner I have satisfied myself and others, that 
 patients are drawn, or induced to obey the motions of the 
 operator, not from any peculiar inherent magnetic power in 
 him, but from their exalted state of feeling enabling them to 
 discern the currents of air, which they advance to, or retire 
 from, according to their direction. This I clearly proved to 
 be the case to-day, and that a patient could feel and obey the 
 motion of a glass funnel passed through the air at a distance 
 of fj "teen feet. 
 
 To remove all sources of fallacy as to the extent of influ- 
 ence exercised by the patient herself, independently of any 
 personal or mental influence on my part, whilst I was other- 
 wise engaged, my daughter requested the patient to go into a 
 room by herself, and, when alone, try whether she could 
 hypnotize herself. In a short time I was told the patient was 
 found fast asleep in my drawing-room. I went to her, ban- 
 daged her eyes, and then, with the glass funnel, (which I 
 used to avoid the chance of electric or magnetic influence 
 being passed from my person to that of the patient,) elevated } 
 or drew up her arms, and then her whole body. I now
 
 38 STATE OF THE SENSES, 
 
 It would be difficult to adduce a more striking 
 example than the following of the fact, that the phe- 
 nomena are produced by the fixation of the mind and 
 eyes, and general repose of the patient, and not from 
 
 retired fifteen feet from her, and found every time I drew the 
 funnel towards me, ehe approached nearer, but when it was 
 forced sharply from me, she invariably retired ; and if it was 
 moved laterally, she moved to the right or left accordingly. 
 I now continued drawing the funnel so as to keep up the cur- 
 rents towards the door, and in this way, her arms being 
 extended, and eyes bandaged, she followed me down stairs 
 and up again, a flight of twenty-two steps, with the peculiar 
 characteristic caution of the somnambulist. After arriving 
 at the top of the stair, I allowed her to stand a little, and 
 again began the drawing motion. She evidently felt the 
 motion, and attempted to come, but could not. I now 
 endeavoured to lead her by the band, but found that the legt 
 had become eataleptiform, so that the could not more. I now 
 carried her into the drawing-room, and, after she was seated on 
 a chair, awoke her. She was quite unconscious of what had 
 happened, and could not be made to believe she had been 
 down stairs said she was quite sure she could have done no 
 such thing without falling and to this moment believes we 
 were only hoaxing her by saying she had had such a ramble. 
 ** I had repeatedly performed this experiment with this 
 patient and others before, with the same result in all respects 
 but walking up and down stairs ; and proved their readiness 
 to be drawn by others equally as myself when in that state ; 
 BO that I consider it quite evident to any unprejudiced person, 
 that a patient can hypnotize himself independently of any 
 personal influence of another ; and that it is by extreme sen- 
 Ml.ility of the skin, and docility of the patients, that they are 
 drawn after an operator, rather than by magnetic attraction ; 
 and that the power of discriminating objects held near the
 
 AND DOCILITY OF PATIENTS. 20 
 
 imagination, or the look or will of another. After 
 my lecture at the Hanover Square Rooms, London, on 
 the 1st of March, 1842, a gentleman told Mr Walker, 
 who was along with me, that he was most anxious to 
 
 skin in different parts of the body, is the result of feeling, and 
 not of sight. 
 
 " The moment I witnessed the attempts of a celebrated pro- 
 fessor to draw a patient, I formed my opinion of the cause ; 
 that it arose from currents of air produced by his hand, to- 
 gether with the extreme sensibility of the skin, and docility of 
 the patients when in that state ; and my experiments have 
 clearly proved this, some patients acknowledging the fact. 
 
 "It may be interesting to remark, that whilst passing up 
 and down stairs the door bell rang, which produced such a 
 tremor through the whole frame as nearly caused the patient's 
 fall a fact quite in accordance with the effect of any abrupt 
 noise on NATURAL somnambulists." 
 
 It is owing to this extreme sensibility of the skin during 
 hypnotism, that patients may walk through a room blindfolded, 
 without running against the furniture the difference of 
 temperature, or rather degree of conducting power of objects, 
 and the resistance of the air directing them. 
 
 I have frequently illustrated this with very sensitive 
 patients in the most beautiful and satisfactory manner, thus : 
 By throwing any fragrant and agreeable scent on a bare table 
 the patients will approach, anxious to smell it, but are re- 
 pelled before they come quite close to the cold table. Place a 
 handkerchief on the table, on which place the scent, and now 
 the patient will approach close to it, and revel in its fragrance. 
 Remove the handkerchief, and the attractive and repulsive 
 movements will again ensue. 
 
 This was beautifully illustrated at a private conversazione 
 at my house lately, in the presence of several medical and 
 other eminently scientific gentlemen. Two patients were
 
 40 OPERATOR HYPNOTIZED. 
 
 see me, that I might try whether I could hypnotize 
 him. He said both himself and friends were anxious 
 he should be affected, but that neither Lafontaine nor 
 others who had tried him, could succeed. Mr Walker 
 said, if that is what you want, as Mr Braid is engaged 
 otherwise, sit down, and I will hypnotize you myself 
 in a minute. When I went into the room I observed 
 what was going on, the gentleman sitting staring at 
 Mr Walker's finger, who was standing a little to the 
 right of the patient, with his eyes fixed steadily on 
 those of the latter. I passed on, and attended to some- 
 thing else, and when I returned a little after, found 
 
 hypnotized, when one became so enamoured of the scent of a 
 gentleman's snuff-box as to follow him round the room. He 
 then laid the box about eighteen inches from the edge of an 
 uncovered table, when she advanced, her arms being 
 extended, anxious to reach the box, but when about ten or 
 twelve inches from it, she started back, from perceiving the 
 impression of the cold table at that distance. She now made 
 another attempt to approach the box, being attracted by the 
 fragrance of its contents, but was as speedily repelled by the 
 cold table before she approached it, and now kept bobbing 
 over the box, much in the same manner as I have witnessed 
 in the attempts of a hungry dog to partake of very hot food. 
 The other patient, in passing round the table, also caught the 
 smell of the box, and advanced from another point, and thus 
 both kept bobbing over it, much to the amusement of all pre- 
 sent. I now covered the table with a handkerchief, and 
 placed the box on it, when they instantly approached close to 
 it, and seemed to feast on its fragrance ; on removing the 
 handkerchief they withdrew, and commenced bobbing over it 
 at first The former patient had never seen such experi- 
 ments, or been tested in this way before.
 
 MODE OF PREVENTING HYPNOTISM. 41 
 
 Mr Walker standing in the same position fast asleep, 
 his arm and finger in a state of catalcptiform rigidity, 
 and the patient wide awake, and staring at the finger 
 all the while. After I had roused Mr Walker, the 
 gentleman observed, " this is really very strange, that 
 no one can mesmerise me ; I must have extraordinary 
 powers of resistance." I requested him to stay a 
 little, and I would try what I could do for him when 
 all was quiet. In three minutes I had him asleep, 
 and in a little more quite rigid. The following rea- 
 sons may be assigned for my success after Mr Walker 
 had so signally failed. He tried it whilst there were 
 several people in the room, who were moving about 
 and talking ; I took care not to commence till all was 
 quiet Mr Walker had not taken the precaution to 
 make the patient direct his eyes in the best possible 
 manner, but I was careful that he should do so. More- 
 over, although Mr Walker had not succeeded in putting 
 him into the somnolent condition, he had, no doubt, 
 partially affected him, and the influence had not en- 
 tirely passed off when I began my operation. Two 
 days after, Mr Walker accompanied me when I called 
 on one of the most celebrated mesmerizers in Europe, 
 who, during our conversation, stated, that a glance of 
 the eye was quite enough, in many cases, to produce 
 the effects. During our conversation, I presume, he 
 had determined to surprise both Mr Walker and my- 
 self, by keeping his large intellectual eyes fixed on Mr 
 Walker. The latter, however, suspecting what was 
 intended, and knowing my opinion as to the. mode 
 of resisting the influence of such fascination, kept his 
 eyes moving, and his mind roaming, and thus frus- 
 trated the volition of one of the most energetic minds,
 
 42 PATIENT HYPNOTISES HIMSELF. 
 
 and the glances and fascination of one of the finest 
 pair of eyes imaginable for such a purpose. I must 
 remark, that Mr Walker was once magnetized by M. 
 Lafontaine, after having been several times operated 
 on by me, a circumstance which of course would ren- 
 der him more susceptible to the influence of the ani- 
 mal magnetizers' modes of operating, according to their 
 own theory. Had Mr Walker believed in the power, 
 I know he would have become affected, even suppos- 
 ing the gentleman referred to had no such inten- 
 tion, and I am not prepared to say he had. Mr 
 Walker, however, firmly believed he was trying to 
 mesmerize him by the fascination referred to ; but, 
 relying on my opinion, and acting accordingly, he 
 escaped. In order to shew the efficacy of my simple 
 plan, in a short time after, in the presence of the 
 same gentleman, I requested Mr Walker to hypnotize 
 himself. By simply fixing his eyes and mind this 
 was accomplished in about a minute.
 
 43 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 Phenomena of natural sleep, dreaming, and somnambnlism contrasted 
 Causes of common sleep Of dreaming Effects of variety and mono- 
 tony compared Changes alleged to take place in the structure of the 
 brain by exertion Cause of Hypnotism, M'Nish'g article on ' ' Reverie" 
 compared with Mr Braid's theory of Hypnotism Mode of arousing 
 patients from the state of Hypnotism. 
 
 I CONSIDER it unnecessary, in this treatise, to enter 
 into a detailed account of the ordinary phenomena of 
 sleep, dreaming, and sonnambulism, as contrasted with 
 the waking state. Suffice it to say, the waking con- 
 dition is that of mental and bodily activity, during 
 which we are enabled to hold communion with the 
 external world, by perceiving the ordinary impres- 
 sions of appropriate stimuli through the organs of 
 special sense, and of exercising the power of voluntary 
 motion, and the mental functions generally. The 
 state ofprofound sleep is exactly the reverse of this 
 a state of absolute wnconsciousness of all that is going 
 on around, and suspension of voluntary motion, and 
 intellectual activity. In as far as regards the organs 
 of special sense, and voluntary motion, and a tempo- 
 rary suspension of the mental energies, it is the em- 
 blem of death. 
 
 Between these extreme points there are gradual
 
 44 SLEEP, DREAMING, 
 
 transitions, so that there are all possible varieties of 
 condition imaginable, from the highest state of mental 
 and bodily activity, to absolute torpor of both. There 
 are two conditions, however, to which I may briefly 
 advert, that of dreaming and of somnambulism. In 
 the former there are some of the mental and bodily 
 functions in a state of partial activity, but, from the 
 sensations arising from external stimuli being per- 
 ceived very imperfectly, erroneous impressions are 
 conveyed to the mind ; and, as happens in some cases 
 of insanity, the power of controlling the current of 
 thought being absent, one idea excites another, until 
 the most incongruous combinations are produced in 
 many instances. Somnambulism, properly so called, 
 is a state still more nearly allied to the waking con- 
 dition than dreaming. The mental functions are 
 more awake, a more just estimate of external im- 
 pressions can be formed, and there is the power 
 of voluntary motion present in a remarkable degree. 
 Persons in this state are thus capable of being 
 directed by those around, into certain trains of 
 thought and action. The principal difference be- 
 tween the natural somnambulists, and those who 
 become so through hypnotizing in the manner pointed 
 out in this treatise, is the greater tendency of the latter 
 t" lujise into a state of profound sleep, unless prevented 
 by being roused and directed by those present. Natu- 
 ral somnambulists seem to be impelled to certain trains 
 of action by internal impulses ; but, so far as I have 
 seen, the artificial somnambulists have an inclination 
 to remain at absolute rest, unless excited to action by 
 some impression from without. In compliance with 
 such excitement, however, they evince great acuteness
 
 AND SOMNAMBULISM. 45 
 
 and docility. There is also another remarkable differ- 
 ence. It is stated, that although natural somnam- 
 bulists cannot remember, when awake, what they 
 were engaged in when asleep, they have a vivid re- 
 collection of it when in that state again ; but I have 
 found no parallel to this in the somnambulism induced 
 by hypnotism. 
 
 By this I mean that they cannot explain what 
 happened during the former somnambulic state, but 
 they may approximate to the words and actions 
 which had formerly manifested themselves, provided 
 they are placed under exactly similar circumstances. 
 For the extent to which peculiar manifestations may 
 be brought out by manipulating the head and face, at 
 a certain stage of hypnotism, see Chapter VI. where 
 examples are given of memory as regarded events 
 which happened during the waking condition, whilst 
 they seemed to have no recollection of what happened 
 during a former state of hypnotism. 
 
 As to the causes of common sleep, I may remark, 
 that, by the exercise of the mental operations, and 
 the impressions conveyed through the organs of special 
 sense, muscular effort, and the discharge of other ani- 
 mal functions, the brain becomes exhausted, and 
 ceases to be affected by ordinary stimuli, and lapses 
 into that dormant state we call sleep. During this 
 condition it becomes recruited, and fitted for again 
 receiving its wonted impressions through the organs 
 of sense, and of holding intercourse with external 
 nature, and exercising those powers of voluntary 
 motion and mental function peculiar to the waking 
 condition.
 
 46 CAUSES OF SLEEP. 
 
 It will be generally admitted, that the most refresh- 
 ing, and therefore the most natural sleep, accompanies 
 that condition or languor which follows the moderate 
 exercise or fatigue of all the bodily and mental func- 
 tions, rather than an undue exercise of one or more to 
 the neglect of the others. It is long since it was ob- 
 served that inordinate attention to one subject caused 
 dreaming, instead of sound sleep. It will also be found 
 that the absolute length of time during which any 
 function may be exercised, depends very much on the 
 continuity of its exertion, or its alternation with that 
 of other functions ; thus the mind may become con- 
 fused and bewildered by continuing one particular 
 study for a length of time, but may be able to return 
 to it with energy and advantage, and prosecute the 
 subject longer on the whole, by varying it with study 
 of a different nature ; moreover, bodily disease, and 
 even insanity, frequently arises from allowing the 
 mind to be occupied inordinately by one particular 
 object or pursuit, whether that may be religion 
 politics, avarice, schemes of ambition, or any other 
 passion, emotion, or object of unvaried contempla- 
 tion. 
 
 In like manner, continued and over-intense mus- 
 cular effort very soon exhausts the power of the 
 muscles so exercised or over-exerted ; and by keeping 
 the eyes steadily and constantly exercised by gazing 
 on a coloured spot, they soon cease to be able to dis- 
 cern the boundaries of the respective colours,* and 
 ultimately seem scarcely to be capable of distinguish- 
 
 * Muller.
 
 CAUSES OF SLEEP. 47 
 
 ing the spot at all. The same might be proved of the 
 other senses. In fine, alternate action and repose is the 
 law of animated nature.* 
 
 * This subject is beautifully illustrated by Miiller, at page 
 1410, Vol. II. (Baly's translation,) which I now quote. " The 
 excitement of the organic processes in the brain which attends 
 an active state of the mind, gradually renders that organ in- 
 capable of maintaining the mental action, and thus induces 
 sleep, which is to the brain what bodily fatigue is to other 
 parts of the nervous system. The cessation or remission of 
 mental activity during sleep, in its turn, however, affords an 
 opportunity for the restoration of integrity to the organic 
 conditions of the cerebrum, by which they regain their excit- 
 ability. The brain, whose action is essential to the manifes- 
 tation of mind, obeys, in fact, the general law which prevails 
 over all organic phenomena, that the phenomena of life 
 being particular states induced in the organic structures, are 
 attended with changes in the constituent matter of these 
 structures. Hence, the longer the action of the mind is con- 
 tinued, the more incapable does the brain become of support- 
 ing that action, and the more imperfectly are the mental 
 processes performed, until at length sensations cease to be 
 perceived, notwithstanding the impressions of external stimuli 
 continue. This is entirely analogous to what frequently 
 occurs during the waking state, in tiie case of individual sen- 
 sations." 
 
 I must beg leave to take one exception to the correctness 
 of these remarks, and that is, moderate exercise, I consider, 
 instead of exhausting, seems rather to act as a salutary 
 stimulus, and thus strengthens both organ and function. He 
 then goes on to state, most lucidly and fairly, " Nor merely 
 the action of the mind, but the long continued exertion of 
 other functions of animal life, such as the senses or muscular 
 actions, induces the same exhaustion of the organic states of
 
 48 CAUSE OF HYPNOTISM. 
 
 It is on this very principle, of over-exerting the 
 attention, by keeping it riveted to one subject or idea 
 
 the brain, and thereby want of sleep and sleep itself ; for 
 these different systems of the body participate in the change 
 which the organic condition of any one of them may undergo. 
 Lastly, impairment of the normal organic state of the brain, 
 by the circulation through it of blood charged with imperfectly 
 assimilated nutriment, as after full meals in which spirituous 
 drinks have been taken, also induces sleep. The narcotic 
 medicaments act still more strongly by the change they pro- 
 duce in the organic composition of the sensorium. Even the 
 increased pressure of the blood upon the brain, produced by 
 the horizontal posture, may become the cause of sleep." 
 
 Here then is the opinion of this author in a few words. 
 The exercise of function is attended with a change, deteriora- 
 tion, or wasting of the organic structure at a more rapid rate 
 than can be repaired by the slow, but regular and persistent 
 organic renovation continually going on in the whole sys- 
 tem. A cessation of sentient, and mental, and muscular func- 
 tions, therefore, as happens in sleep, becomes necessary to 
 afford time for the renovation of the deteriorated organic 
 structures of the respective organs, and of the brain in par- 
 ticular, which, in so eminent a degree, sympathizes and par- 
 ticipates in the organic changes which have been induced in 
 other organs. 
 
 Liebig's views seem confirmatory of this, where he points 
 out the fact, that the chemical principles of those substances 
 which act most energetically on the brain and nerves have 
 a composition analagous to that of the substance of the brain 
 and nerves, as in the case of the vegetable alkaloids. He 
 believes that all the active principles which produce power- 
 fully poisonous or medicinal effects, in minute doses, are com- 
 pounds of nitrogen ; and that those compounds, being resolved 
 into their elements, take a share in the formation, or transfor- 
 mation, of brain and nervous matter.
 
 HYPNOTISM AND REVERIE. 49 
 
 which is not of itself of an exciting nature, and, over- 
 exercising one set of muscles, and the state of the 
 strained eyes, with the suppressed respiration, and 
 general repose, which attend such experiments, which 
 excites in the brain and whole nervous system that 
 peculiar state which I call Hypnotism, or nervous 
 sleep. The most striking proofs that it is different 
 from common sleep, are the extraordinary effects 
 produced by it. In deep abstraction of mind, it is 
 well known, the individual becomes unconscious of 
 surrounding objects?, and in some cases, even of severe 
 bodily inflictions. During hypnotism, or nervous 
 sleep, the functions in action seem to be so intensely 
 active, as must in a great measure rob the others 
 of that degree of nervous energy necessary for excit- 
 ing their sensibility. This alone may account for 
 much of the dulness of common feeling during the 
 abnormal quickness and extended range of action of 
 certain other functions.* 
 
 * It was certainly presuming very much on the ignorance 
 of others for any one to attempt so to pervert the meaning 
 of an author, as to twist what M'Nish has written on the 
 article " Reverie," and represent it as the basis of my theory. 
 How does M'Nish define it 1 " Reverie," he says, " proceeds 
 from an unusual quiescence of the brain, and inability of the 
 mind to direct itself strongly to any one point ; it is often the 
 prelude of sleep. There is a defect in the attention, which, 
 instead of being fixed on one subject, wanders over a thousand, 
 and even on these is feebly and ineffectively directed." Now 
 this, as every one must own, is the very reverse of what is in- 
 duced by my plan, because I rivet the attention to one idea, 
 and the eyes to one point, as the primary and imperative con- 
 ditions. Then, as to another passage, " That kind of reverie 
 in which the mind is nearly divested of all ideas,]and approxi- 
 D
 
 50 MODE OF AROUSING PATIENTS, 
 
 The untoward result referred to in the note 
 below, I have no doubt, was the effect of permit- 
 ting the experiment to be carried too far. No such 
 consequence has ever followed in any of my opera- 
 tions, and for this reason, that I have always 
 watched each case with close attention, and aroused 
 
 mates nearly to the state of sleep, I have sometimes expe- 
 rienced while gazing long and intently upon a river. The 
 thoughts seem to glide away, one by one, upon the surface of 
 the stream, till the mind is emptied of them altogether. In 
 this state we see the glassy volume of the water moving past 
 us, and hear its murmur, but lose all power of fixing our 
 attention definitively upon any subject ; and either fall asleep, 
 or are aroused by some spontaneous reaction of the mind, or 
 by some appeal to the senses sufficiently strong to startle us 
 from our reverie." Now, I should have read this passage a 
 thousand times without discovering any analogy between it 
 and my theoretical views. They appear to me to be " wide 
 as the poles asunder." Instead of ridding the mind of ideas 
 " one by one, till the mind is emptied of them altogether" I 
 endeavour to rid the mind at once of all ideas but one, and to 
 fix that one in the mind eten after pasting into the hypnotic 
 itate. This is very different from what happens in the reverie 
 referred to, in which M'Nish confesses the difficulty " of fix- 
 ing our attention definitively upon any subject." Again, so 
 far from a reaction of the mind being sufficient to rouse 
 patients from the hypnotic state, as in the reverie referred to, 
 I can only state, that T have never seen patients deeply affec- 
 ted come out of it without assistance ; and I heard Lafontaine 
 Bay, he had been unable to restore the Frenchman who was 
 with him for twelve hours on one occasion, when a sur- 
 geon operated on him ; and I have read the report of an- 
 other, who operated on a patient at Stockport, " Charlie," 
 aen.nling to my method, and, from having allowed him to go 
 too far, experienced 110 small difficulty in rousing him, nor
 
 AND PREVENTING DANGER. 51 
 
 the patient the moment I saw the slightest symptom 
 of danger. I shall, therefore, now point out the 
 symptoms of danger, with the mode of arousing 
 patients, and thus preventing mischief which might 
 ensue from want of due caution in the operator. 
 
 could he be restored to speech after much manipulation, and 
 buffetting, and friction, till lie had swallowed nearly half a 
 tumbler glass of neat gin. To prevent misrepresentation, 1 
 shall quote the case as reported in the Stockport Chronicle of 
 4th February, 1842. "To the final instance the lecturer 
 now drew particular attention. It was that of a young man, 
 recognized by many in the room by the familiar name of 
 ' Charlie.' He was just entering upon the state of somno- 
 lence, and the attention of the audience was directed to the 
 fact, that it was so indicated, by the different members be- 
 coming rigid. Presently his eyelids closed, and he became 
 as though apparently under the influence of catalepsy. It 
 was tried to make him sit down, but his whole frame was 
 perfectly rigid, and that object could not therefore be accom- 
 plished. He was then laid on the floor, and the usual means, 
 with cold water added, were employed in order to bring him 
 to a state of consciousness. After a time these partially suc- 
 ceeded, his limbs became once more supple, and he was set 
 in a chair, apparently conscious, though his eyelids were not 
 yet open. He was several times requested to open them, 
 and as often made the most vigorous efforts to do so, but was 
 unable ; at last they were opened, and it was discovered that 
 the operation had so far influenced the entire functions of his 
 body, that he had for a time lost the power of utterance, the 
 muscles of the throat and tongue still remaining in a state of 
 the most perfect rigidity. In this state, and being affected by 
 a tremor which seized every part of his person, the patient 
 was conducted into an ante-room, and placed before a fire, 
 while the operator continued to rub the parts, in order to 
 excite them to renewed action, and to restore animation. All
 
 52 MODE OF AROUSING PATIENTS. 
 
 Whenever I observe the breathing very much 
 oppressed, the face greatly flushed, the rigidity exces- 
 sive, or the action of the heart very quick and tumul- 
 tuous, I instantly arouse the patient, which I have 
 always readily and speedily succeeded in doing by a 
 clap of the hands, an abrupt shock on the arm or leg 
 by striking them sharply with the flat hand, pressure 
 and friction over the eye-lids, and by a current of air 
 wafted against the face. I have never failed by these 
 means to restore my patients very speedily. 
 
 I feel convinced hypnotism is not only a valuable, 
 but also a perfectly safe remedy for many complaints, 
 if judiciously used ; still it ought not to be trifled 
 with by ignorant persons for the mere sake of grati- 
 fying idle curiosity. In all cases of apoplectic ten- 
 
 this, however, had not the desired effect for some time, during 
 which the patient evinced feelings of considerable surprise at 
 his condition ; but nevertheless was exceedingly lively, and 
 made several efforts to speak, but could not. At last half a 
 tumbler glass of neat gin was brought, the greater portion of 
 which he drank off, and this partially restored the power of 
 utterance, for he was afterwards able to articulate a little, 
 and asked, though only in a whisper, for his hat ; and also 
 requested that some water might be mixed with the remain- 
 ing portion of the gin. He complained also of a sense of 
 excessive fulness of the stomach ; and said, in answer to in- 
 quiries, that although not feeling cold, he was yet unable to 
 resist the tremor which had seized him." 
 
 Was not this a beautiful illustration of the facility with 
 which patients might be roused from this condition " by a re- 
 action of the mind ?" Nor was this the only case that even- 
 ing, in which great difficulty had been experienced in rousing 
 patients from the hypnotic state.
 
 CAUTION IN SOME CASES REQUISITE. 53 
 
 dency, or where there is aneurism, or serious organic 
 disease of the heart, it ought not to be resorted to, 
 excepting with the precaution, that it may be in the 
 mode calculated to depress the force and frequency of 
 the heart's action.
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Phenomena of common sleep Of Hypnotism Power of locomotion and 
 accurate balancing of themselves Tendency to dance on hearing 
 appropriate music Grace displayed under its influence Tendency to 
 become cataleptiformly fixed in any position if left quiet Probability 
 of Hypnotism having been practised amongst the ancients, and the cause 
 of their superior excellence in sculpture, painting, and dancing Effects 
 analogous to Nitrous Oxide in some in what it differs from this and 
 intoxication from wine and spirits Analogous to conium Effects of 
 monotonous impressions on any of the senses Opinions of Cullen, 
 M'Nish, Willich (Counting and repeating generally known) A 
 writer in Medical Gazette Power of habit and expectation All the 
 phenomena consecutive Note illustrating this Power of Hypnotism 
 to cure intractable diseases and disorders Miss Collins case and Miss 
 E. Atkinson's Extent to which it may be expected to be useful. 
 
 IN passing into common sleep objects are perceived 
 more and more faintly, the eyelids close, and remain 
 quiescent, and all the other organs of special sense 
 become gradually blunted, and cease to convey their 
 usual impressions to the brain, the limbs become 
 flaccid from cessation of muscular tone mid action, 
 the pulse and respiration become slower, the pupils 
 are turned upwards and inwards, and are contracted. 
 (Miillcr.) 
 
 In the hypnotic state, induced with the view of 
 exhibiting what I call the hypnotic phenomena, 
 vision becomes more and more imperfect, the eyelids
 
 EFFECTS OF HYPNOTISM. 55 
 
 are closed, but have, for a considerable time a vibratory 
 motion, (in some few they are forcibly closed, as by 
 spasm of the orbiculares ;) the organs of special sense, 
 particularly of smell, touch, and hearing, heat and 
 cold, and resistance, are greatly exalted, and afterwards 
 become blunted, in a degree far beyond the torpor of 
 natural sleep ; the pupils are turned upwards and 
 inwards, but, contrary to what happens in natural 
 sleep, they are greatly dilated, and highly insensible 
 to light ; after a length of time the pupils become 
 contracted, whilst the eyes are still insensible to light. 
 The pulse and respiration are, at first, slower than 
 is natural, but immediately on calling muscles into 
 action, a tendency to cataleptiform rigidity is assumed, 
 with rapid pulse, and oppressed and quick breathing. 
 The limbs are thus maintained in a state of tonic 
 rigidity for any length of time I have yet thought it 
 prudent to try, instead of that state of flaccidity in- 
 duced by common sleep ; and the most remarkable 
 circumstance is this, that there seems to be no cor- 
 responding state of muscular exhaustion from such 
 action.* 
 
 * The average of a great number of experiments gives me 
 the following results : The rise in the pulse from mere mus- 
 cular effort, to enable patients to keep their legs and anus 
 extended for five minutes, is about 20 per cent. When in 
 the state of hypnotism it is upwards of 100 per cent. By 
 arousing all the senses, and the head and neck, it will speedily 
 fall to 40 per cent, (that is, twice what it was when so tested 
 in the natural condition,) and by rendering the whole muscles 
 limber, whilst the patient is in the state of hypnotism the 
 pulse very speedily falls to, or even below, the condition it was 
 before the experiment.
 
 56 EFFECTS OF HTPNOTKM. 
 
 In passing into natural sleep, any thing held in 
 the hand is soon allowed to drop from our grasp, but, 
 in the artificial sleep now referred to, it will be 
 held more firmly than before falling asleep. This is 
 a rery remarkable difference. 
 
 The power of balancing themselves is so great that 
 I have never seen one of these hypnotic somnambu- 
 lists fall. The same is noted of natural somnambu- 
 lists. This is a remarkable fact, and would appear to 
 occur in this way, that they acquire the centre of 
 gravity, as if by instinct, in the most natural, and 
 therefore, in the most graceful manner, and if allowed 
 to remain in this position, they speedily become 
 cataleptiformly and immoveably fixed. From ob- 
 serving these two facts, and the general tendency and 
 taste for dancing displayed by most patients on hear- 
 ing lively music during hypnotism, the peculiarly 
 graceful and appropriate movement of many when 
 thus excited, and the varied and elegant postures they 
 may be made to assume by slight currents of air, and 
 the faculty of retaining any position with so much ease, 
 I have hazarded the opinion, that the Greeks may 
 have been indebted to hypnotism for the perfection 
 of their sculpture, and the Fakirs for their wonder- 
 ful feats of suspending their bodies by a leg or an 
 arm.* 
 
 * It has been suggested to me, that it can scarcely be 
 doubted that the Bacchanalians, who had no feeling of wounds, 
 (" non sentit vulnera Mcenas," Otid,) and whose condition 
 was a stupor different from common sleep, (" Exsomnis stupet 
 (Evia*," Horace,) were in the hypnotic condition or nervous 
 sleep, and therein excited to dance by music ; and that, as 
 uneducated maid-servants, when under the fuW influence of tha
 
 DIFFERENT FROM NATURAL SLEEP. 67 
 
 It thus clearly appears that it differs from common 
 sleep in many respects, that there is first a state of 
 excitement as with opium, and wine, and spirits, and 
 afterwards a state of corresponding deep depression 
 or torpor. 
 
 In the case of two patients, symptoms very much the 
 same as those produced in them by the laughing gas, were 
 produced twice on each patient, and the only time I 
 know of their having been hypnotized. One lost the 
 power of speech for two hours, as happened also after 
 the gas. Both these patients had hypnotized them- 
 selves. There is a remarkable difference between the 
 hypnotic condition, and that induced by the nitrous 
 oxide. In the latter there is great, almost irresistible in- 
 clination to general muscular effort, as well as laughter ; 
 in the former there seems to be no inclination to any 
 bodily effort, unless excited by impressions from with- 
 out. When the latter are used, there is a remarkable 
 difference again in the power of locomotion and accu- 
 
 state of nerve, move with the grace and peculiar action of 
 the most accomplished dancers of pantomimic ballet, there is 
 reason to believe, not merely that the perfect grace exhibited 
 in the attitudes represented in ancient sculpture and painting, 
 was derived from studying the Bacchanalian and other mystic 
 dancers, but that the movements used by stage-dancers, in 
 our days, have been transmitted to us by continued imitation, 
 through Italy, from the dancers in the Greek mysteries. No 
 person can see girls of humble education, under the influence 
 of music while in the nervous sleep, without perceiving, that 
 those individuals, if awake, could not move with the elegance 
 they exhibit under that influence. The reason of such grace 
 probably is, that it arises from the simple and pure effects of 
 nature to balance the body perfectly in all its complicated 
 movements wliile the power of sight is suspended.
 
 58 MODES OF MESMERIZING, 
 
 rate balancing of themselves, when contrasted with 
 the condition of intoxication from wine or spirits, 
 where the limbs become partially paralyzed, whilst 
 the judgment remains pretty clear and acute. The 
 state of muscular quiescence, with acute hearing, and 
 dreamy, glowing imagination, approximates it some- 
 what to the condition induced by conium. 
 
 During the course of last spring some lectures were 
 delivered in this town to prove that the mesmeric 
 phenomena might be induced by an " undue continu- 
 ance or repetition of the same sensible impression" 
 on any of the senses. Immediately after the first 
 lecture I instituted experiments according to this 
 plan, but very soon ascertained, that the sleep induced 
 by this mode of operating, unless through the eye, was 
 nothing more than NATURAL or common sleep, except- 
 ing in patients wlo had had the impressibility stamped 
 on them, by having been, previously mesmerized or hypno- 
 tised. The lecturer concluded his course by stating 
 his opinion, that he knew no sleep but natural or 
 common sleep ; and by representing that he considered 
 the effects produced by the different modes to be the 
 same.* I believe most, if not all the patients this 
 
 * This being his belief, there could be no novelty in his 
 views. The following was the language of Cullen, long before 
 he was born, If the mind is attached to a single sensation, it 
 is brought very nearly to the state of the total absence of 
 impressions ; or, in other words, to the state most closely 
 bordering upon sleep ; remove those stimuli which keep it 
 employed, and sleep ensues at any time." 
 
 M'Nish also writes, Attention to a single sensation has 
 the same effect, (of inducing slumber.) This has been 
 exemplified in the case of all kinds of monotony, where there
 
 AND INDUCING NATURAL SLEEP. 59 
 
 gentleman exhibited at his lectures had been previously 
 mesmerized or hypnotized, which, if I am correct in 
 this supposition, from the circumstances already 
 
 is a want of variety to stimulate the ideas, and keep them on 
 the alert." 
 
 And again M'Nish writes, " I have often coaxed myself to 
 sleep by internally repeating half a dozen times any well- 
 known rhyme. Whilst doing so the ideas must be strictly 
 directed to this particular theme, and prevented from wan- 
 dering." He then adds, that the great secret is to compel the 
 mind to depart from its favourite train of thought, into which 
 it has a tendency to run, " and address itself solely to the 
 terbal repetition of what is substituted in its place ;" and 
 farther adds, " the more the mind is brought to turn upon a 
 single impression, the more closely it is made to approach to 
 the state of sleep, which is the total absence of all impres- 
 sions." Willich also, some forty years ago, wrote thus, 
 " Sleep is promoted by tranquillity of mind, * * * by gently 
 and uniformly affecting one of the senses; for instance, by 
 music or reading ; and lastly, a gentle external motion of the 
 whole body, as by rocking or sailing." Counting and repeat- 
 ing a few words have been also long and generally known and 
 resorted to for the purpose of procuring sleep. 
 
 Let any one read attentively the following extract from the 
 Medical Gazette of February 24, 1838, on the power of weak 
 monotonous impressions on the senses having the power of 
 inducing sleep, and many phenomena usually attributed to 
 mesmerism, and say what merit could be due to a person 
 acquainted with the article referred to, for recording a note to 
 the same effects some six or eight months thereafter, and that 
 without having instituted a single experiment to prove the 
 correctness of the hypothesis ? " For the other slight symp- 
 toms" (others enumerated having been attributed to imagina- 
 tion or emotion of mind) " of vapours, drowsiness, and at last
 
 60 MODES OF INDUCING ARTIFICIAL SLEEP. 
 
 referred to, (see page 36, and note, page 61,) would 
 completely nullify the importance of his apparent re- 
 sults. However, I have never heard of his having 
 operated successfully, and exhibited the phenomena on 
 numbers of patients taken indiscriminately from a mixed 
 audience, who had never been operated on before; or 
 produced curative results such as I have so repeatedly 
 done. I therefore consider it a fair inference, that 
 until the same phenomena are produced by his method 
 in cases of persons which have never been hypnotized 
 or mesmerized, nothing is proved beyond the fact 
 which I have so often urged, namely, the power of 
 
 natural sleep, no other cause need be sought than the tedious- 
 ness and ennui of passing the hands for more or less than an 
 hour over the most sensitive parts of the body. This is only 
 an instance of the well known effect of weak, monotonous 
 impressions on the senses inducing sleep ; analogous examples 
 are found in the soothing influence of a body seen slowly 
 vibrating, or of a distant calm scene, or the motions of the 
 waves, or of quivering leaves ; or in impressions on the sense 
 of hearing by the sound of a waterfall, the rippling of billows, 
 the humming of insects, the low howling of the winds, the 
 voice of a dull reader ; or on the nerves of common sensation 
 by gentle friction of the temple or eye-brow, or any tentitive 
 part of the body ; the rocking of a cradle ; any slow and regu- 
 lar motion of the limbs or trunk ; all these instances shew 
 that the effect of monotonous impressions on the senses is to 
 produce, in most persons, tranquillity, or drowsiness, and 
 ultimately sleep." 
 
 Where, then, is the great merit of any one having recorded 
 a note six or eight months after this was published, that these 
 phenomena were induced by " the undue continuance and 
 repetition of the same sensible impression !"
 
 CAUSE OF CERTAIN MISTAKES. 61 
 
 imagination, sympathy, and habit, in producing the 
 expected effects ON THOSE PREVIOUSLY IMPRESSED.* 
 
 From overlooking another important fact which I 
 have repeatedly explained, that all the phenomena 
 are consecutive, that is, first increased sensibility, 
 mobility, and docility, and afterwards a subsidence 
 into insensibility and cataleptiform rigidity, this 
 gentleman, by mistaking and exhibiting the primary 
 phenomena for the secondary, seems to have managed 
 to deceive both himself and some others who are satis- 
 fied to look at such matters loosely. This, hoivever, is 
 confounding things which are in themselves essentially 
 different. I beg especial attention to the note below. f 
 
 * A very decided proof of this was exhibited at one of my 
 lectures, where, as may be seen from the report of it, twenty- 
 two who had been operated on before, laid hold of different 
 parts of each other's persons or dresses, and by concentrating 
 their attention to that act, and anticipating the effect, they all 
 became hypnotized in about a minute. After another lecture, 
 in the ante-room, sixteen who had been hypnotized formerly, 
 stood up in the same manner, and also one who had nexer been 
 hypnotized. In about a minute all were affected excepting the 
 latter. I then operated on him alone in my usual way, and 
 in two or three minutes he was very decidedly affected. 
 Suffice it to say, I have varied my experiments in every pos- 
 sible form, and clearly proved the power of imagination orer 
 those previously impressed, as the patients have become hyp- 
 notized or not by the same appliance, accordingly to the 
 result which they previously expected. This readily accounts 
 for the result of Mr Wakley's experiments with the Okeys. 
 
 f- In illustration of this, I may here state the following 
 remarkable facts, which have been frequently repeated before 
 many most competent witnesses, and of which, therefore, I 
 consider there can be no doubt.
 
 (52 EFFECTS OF HYPNOTISM. 
 
 Of all the circumstances connected with the arti- 
 ficial sleep which I induce, nothing so strongly marks 
 
 The first symptoms after the induction of the hypnotic state, 
 and extending the limbs, are those of extreme excitement of 
 all the organs of sense, sight excepted. I have ascertained 
 by accurate measurement, that the hearing is about twelve 
 times more acute than in the natural condition. Thus a 
 patient who could not hear the tick of a watch beyond 3 
 feet when awake, could do so when hypnotized at the distance 
 of 35 feet, and walk to it in a direct line, without difficulty 
 or hesitation. Smell is in like manner wonderfully exalted ; 
 one patient has been able to trace a rose through the air 
 when held 46 feet from her. May this not account for the 
 fact of Dr Elliotson's patient Okey, discovering the peculiar 
 odour of patients in articulo mortis 1 when she said on passing 
 them, " there is Jack." The tactual sensibility is so great, 
 that the slightest touch is felt, and will call into action cor- 
 responding muscles, which will also be found to exert a most 
 inordinate power. The sense of heat, cold, and resistance, 
 are also exalted to that degree, as to enable the patient to 
 feel any thing without actual contact, in some cases at a con- 
 siderable distance, (18 or 20 inches,) if the temperature is 
 very different from that of the body ; and some will feel a 
 breath of air from the lips, or the blast of a pair of bellows, 
 at the distance of 50, or even 90 feet, and bend from it, and, 
 by making a back current, as by waving the hand or a fan, 
 will move in the opposite direction. The patient has a ten- 
 dency to approach to, or recede from impressions, according as 
 they are agreeable or disagreeable, either in quality or intensity. 
 Thus, they will approach to soft sounds, but they will recede 
 from loud sounds, however harmonious. A discord, such as 
 two semi-tones sounded at same time, hoicerer toft, will cause a 
 sensitive patient to shudder and recede when hypnotized, al- 
 though ignorant of music, and not at all disagreeably affected 
 by such discord when awake. By allowing a little time to
 
 EFFECTS OF HYPNOTISM. 63 
 
 the difference between it and natural sleep as the 
 wonderful power the former evinces in curing many 
 
 elapse, and the patient to be in a state of quietude, he will 
 lapse into the opposite extreme, of rigidity and torpor of all 
 the senses, so that he will not hear the loudest noise, nor 
 smell the most fragrant or pungent odour ; nor feel what is 
 either hot or cold, although not only approximated to, but 
 brought into actual contact with, the skin. He may now be 
 pricked, or pinched, or maimed, without evincing the slightest 
 symptom of pain or sensibility, and the limbs will remain 
 rigidly fixed. At this stage a puff of wind directed against 
 any organ instantaneously rouses it to inordinate sensibility, 
 and the rigid muscles to a state of mobility. Thus, the 
 patient may be unconscious of the loudest noise, but by simply 
 causing a current of air to come against the ear, a very mode- 
 rate noise will instantly be heard so intensely as to make the 
 patient start and shiver violently, although the whole body 
 had immediately before been rigidly cataleptiform. A rose, 
 valerian, or a.^afoetida, or strongest liquor ammonice, may have 
 been held close under the nostrils without being' perceived, 
 but a puff of wind directed against the nostrils will instantly 
 rouse the sense so much, that supposing the rose had been 
 carried 46 feet distant, the patient has instantly set off in 
 pursuit of it ; and even whilst the eyes were bandaged, 
 reached it as certainly as a dog traces out game ; but, as 
 respects valerian or asafoetida, will rush from the unpleasant 
 smell, with the greatest haste. The same with the sense of 
 touch. 
 
 The remarkable fact that the whole senses may have been 
 in the state of profound torpor, and the body in a state of 
 rigidity, and yet by very gentle pressure over the eye-balls, 
 the patient shall be instantly roused to the waking condition, 
 as regards all the senses, and mobility of the head and neck, 
 in short to all parts supplied by nerves originating above the 
 origin of the fifth pair, and those inosculating with them, and
 
 04 EFFECTS OF HYPNOTISM. 
 
 diseases of long standing, and which had resisted natu- 
 ral sleep, and every known agency, for years, e. g. 
 
 will not be affected by simple mechanical appliance to other 
 organs of sense, is a striking proof that there exists some 
 remarkable connection between the state of the eyes, and 
 condition of the brain and spinal cord during the hypnotic 
 state. 
 
 This is also a remarkably good illustration of the propriety 
 of Mr Mayo's designation of the origin of the fifth pair of 
 nerves, which he styles " the dynamic centre of the nervous 
 system."* 
 
 Another remarkable proof to the same effect is this ; sup- 
 posing the same state of torpor of all the senses, and rigidity 
 of the body and limbs to exist, a puff of air, or gentle pressure 
 against ONE eye will restore sight to that eye, and sense and 
 mobility to one half of the body the same side as the eye 
 operated on but will leave the other eye insensible, and the 
 other half of the body rigid and torpid as before. Neither 
 hearing nor smell, however, are restored in this case to either 
 side. Thus, by one mode of acting through the eye, we 
 reduce the patient to a state of hemiplegia, by the other to 
 that of paraplegia,. as regards both sense and motion. In 
 many cases, when the patient has been hypnotized by looking 
 sideways, this gives a tendency to the body to turn round in 
 that direction when asleep. 
 
 It seemed puzzling, that by acting on one eye, both sense 
 and motion could be communicated to the same side of the 
 body, seeing the motor influence is communicated from the 
 appetite hemitphere of the brain. It has occurred to me that 
 the partial decussatiou of the optic nerves may account for 
 this, and that this partial decussation may be for the express 
 purpose of perfecting the union of sensation and motion 
 through the eyes, -"on which we lean as on crutches ;" thus 
 
 * " The Nervous System, and its Functions," p. 27.
 
 PHENOMENA OF HYPNOTISM. 65 
 
 patients who have been born deaf and dumb, of vari- 
 ous ages, up to 32 years, had continued without 
 
 enabling us to balance ourselves so much more perfectly than 
 we could otherwise have done. 
 
 There is another most remarkable circumstance, that whilst 
 the patient is in the state of torpor and rigidity, we may pass 
 powerful shocks of the galvanic battery through the arms, so 
 as to cause violent contortions of them, without his evincing the 
 slightest symptom of pe'rceiving the shocks, either by move- 
 ment of the head or neck, or expression of the countenance. 
 On partially arousing the head and neck, as by gentle pres- 
 sure on the eyes, or passing a current of air against the 
 face, the same shocks will be felt, as evinced by the move- 
 ments of the head and neck, the contortions of the face, and 
 the whine, moan, or scream of the patient. All this may 
 happen, as I have witnessed innumerable times, and the 
 patient be altogether unconscious of it when roused from the 
 hypnotic condition. 
 
 Moreover, whilst the patient is in the -condition to be un- 
 conscious of the shock passed through the arms whilst a rod is 
 placed in each hand, if one of the rods is applied to any part 
 of the head, or neck, or face, in short, to any part which is 
 set at liberty by acting on both eyes, as formerly referred to, 
 he will instantly manifest symptoms of feeling a shock, though 
 it be much less powerful than that which had failed to produce 
 any sensation or consciousness when passed through both arms. 
 This might readily be accounted for on the principle of the 
 circuit being shortened, and also by one of the rods being 
 nearer the centre of the sensorium ; but that it depends on 
 something else is apparent from the following -fact : Without 
 moving the rod placed on the neck, head, or face, carry the 
 other rod from the hand, to any other part of the head, neck, 
 or face, and all evidence of feeling will disappear, unless the 
 power of the galvanic current is increased. 
 
 Analogous to this is another most puzzling phenomenon : 
 E
 
 66 PHENOMENA OF HYPNOTISM. 
 
 the power of hearing sound until the time they were 
 operated on by me, and yet they were enabled to do so 
 
 The brain being in a state of torpor, the limbs rigid, and 
 the skin insensible to pricking, pinching, heat or cold, by 
 gently pressing the point of one or two fingers against the 
 back of the hand, or any other part of the extremity, the 
 rigidity will very speedily give place to mobility, and quiver- 
 ing of the arm, hand, and fingers, and which is greatly in- 
 creased by pressing another finger against the neck, head, or 
 face. Indeed, in the latter case, the commotion of the whole 
 body is as violent in some patients as from shocks of the 
 galvanic battery. By placing BOTH fingers on any part of the 
 head, face, or neck, the commotion almost, or entirely ceases. 
 By pinching the skin of the hand or arm with one finger and 
 thumb, and the skin of the neck or face with the other, no 
 effect is produced. Pressure, made with insulating rods, glass, 
 or sealing wax, is followed by the same phenomena as when 
 done by the points of the fingers. The flat hand applied has 
 very little effect. The pressure being made against both 
 hands, the arms are contorted, and if the head is partially 
 dehypnotized the patient will complain of pins running into the 
 fingers, especially if one point of contact is the hand, and the 
 other the face or head. These phenomena do not occur 
 whilst the skin remains sensible to pricking or pinching. 
 
 Moreover, during the state of cataleptiform rigidity, the 
 circulation becomes greatly accelerated, in many cases it 
 has more than double the natural velocity ; and may be 
 brought down to the natural standard, in most cases in 
 less than a minute, by reducing the cataleptiform condi- 
 tion. It is also found, that it may be kept at any inter- 
 mediate condition between these two extremes, according 
 to the manipulations used ; and that the blood is circulated 
 with leas force (the pulse being always contracted) in the 
 rigid limbs, and sent in correspondingly greater quantity and 
 force into those parts which are not directly subjected to
 
 ITS CURATIVE POWERS. 67 
 
 by being kept in the hypnotic state for eight, ten, or 
 twelve minutes, and have had their hearing still far- 
 ther improved by a repetition of similar operations. 
 Now, supposing these patients to have spent six hours 
 out of twenty-four in sleep, many of them had had 
 four, five, six, or eight years of continuom sleep, but still 
 awoke as they lay down, incapable of hearing sound, 
 and yet they had some degree of it communicated 
 
 the pressure of rigid muscles. It is also important to note, 
 that by acting on both eyes in the manner required to induce 
 the state of paraplegia, as already explained, the force and 
 frequency of the heart's action may be as speedily and per- 
 ceptibly diminished, as the action of a steam engine by turning 
 off the steam. By again fixing the eyes, its former force and 
 velocity will be almost as speedily restored, as can be satisfac- 
 torily proved to any one who keeps his ear applied to the 
 chest during these experiments. The amount of change in 
 the pulse, by acting on the two eyes, and thus liberating the 
 organs of special sense, and the head and neck, is about 60 
 per cent of the actual rise of the pulse when at the maximum 
 above the ordinary velocity of the circulation. We might 
 therefore, I think, a priori, infer, that in this new condition 
 of the nervous system we have acquired an important power 
 to act with. 
 
 N.B. It is to be observed, that owing to the extreme 
 acuteness of hearing during the first stage of hypnotism, it is 
 extremely apt to mislead the operator, or those who do not 
 understand this fact, during operations on the acuteness of the 
 other senses, such as smell, currents of air, and heat and cold. 
 To avoid such mistakes, therefore, it is best to allow the hear- 
 ing to disappear, by which time all the other senses will have 
 gone to rest, with the exception of the susceptibility to be 
 affected by a current of air. I allow all the senses to become 
 dormant, and then rouse only the one I wish to exhibit in the 
 state of exalted function, when operating carefully.
 
 fi8 CURATIVE POWERS 
 
 to them by a few minutes of Hypnotism. Can any 
 stronger proof be wanted, or adduced, than this, that 
 it is very different from common sleep ? A lady, 54 
 years of age, had been suffering for 16 years from 
 incipient amaurosis. According to the same ratio, 
 she must have had four years of sleep, but in- 
 stead of improving she was every month getting 
 worse, and when she called on me, could with diffi- 
 culty read two words of the largest heading of a 
 newspaper. After eight minutes hypnotic sleep, how- 
 ever, she could read the other words, and in three 
 minutes more, the whole of the smaller heading, soon 
 after a smaller sized type, and the same afternoon, 
 witli the aid of her glasses, read the 118th Psalm, 29 
 rcneg, in the small diamond Polyglot Bible, which 
 for years had been a sealed book to her. There has 
 also been a most remarkable improvement in this lady's 
 general health since she was hypnotized. Is there 
 any individual who can fail to see, in this case, some- 
 thing different from common sleep? Another lady, 
 44 years of age, had required glasses 22 years, to en- 
 able her to see to sew, read, or write. She had thus 
 five years and a-half of sleep, but the sight was still 
 getting worse, so that, before being hypnotized, she 
 could not distinguish the capitals in the advertising 
 columns of a newspaper. After being hypnotized, 
 however, she could, in a few minutes, see to read the 
 large and second heading of the newspaper, and next 
 day, to make herself a blond cap, threading her needle 
 WITIIOI-T the aid of glasses. This lady's daughter, 
 who had been compelled to use glasses for two years, 
 was enabled to dispense with them, after being once 
 hypnotized. It is also important to note, that all
 
 OF HYPNOTISM. 69 
 
 these three, as well as many others, were agreeably 
 surprised by improvement of memory after being hyp- 
 notized. The memory of one was so bad that she 
 was often forced to go up stairs several times before 
 she could remember what she went for, and could 
 scarcely carry on a conversation ; but all this remnant 
 of a slight paralytic affection is gone, by the same 
 operations which roused the optic nerves, and re- 
 stored the sight. Now, with such cases as these, 
 who can doubt that there is a real difference in the 
 state of the brain and nervous system generally, dur- 
 ing the hypnotic sleep, from that which occurs in 
 common sleep ? The same might be urged from vari- 
 ous other diseases cured or relieved by this process, 
 but I shall only briefly refer to a few. 
 
 In the second part of this treatise, where the cases 
 are recorded, will be found many examples of the 
 curative power of hypnotism, equally remarkable 
 with those to which I have just referred : such as Tic 
 Doloureux ; Nervous headach ; Spinal irritation ; 
 Neuralgia of the heart ; Palpitation and intermittent 
 action of the heart ; Epilepsy ; Rheumatism ; Para- 
 lysis ; Distortions and tonic spasm, &c. 
 
 I shall here give a few particulars of a case which 
 shews in a most remarkable degree the difference of 
 this and common sleep, or that induced by opium and 
 the whole range of medicines of that class. Miss 
 Collins, of Newark, Nottinghamshire, had a spasmodic 
 seizure during the night, by which her head was 
 bound firmly to her left shoulder. The most ener- 
 getic and well directed means, iinder a most talented 
 physician, and aided by the opinion of Sir Benjamin
 
 70 CURATIVE POWERS 
 
 Brodie, had been tried, as far as known remedies 
 could be carried, (amongst other means, narcotics, 
 in as large doses as were compatible with the safety 
 of the patient ;) and although she was carefully 
 watched by night and by day, there had never 
 been the slightest relaxation of the spasm, which 
 had continued nearly six months. When I first 
 examined her, no force I was capable of exerting 
 could succeed in separating the head and shoulder in 
 the slightest degree. Experience led me to hope, how- 
 ever, that I might be able to do so after she was hyp- 
 notized. Having requested all present, excepting the 
 patient, her father, and her physician, to retire, I 
 hypnotized her, and in three minutes from commencing 
 the operation, with the most perfect ease to myself, and 
 without the slightest pain to the patient, her head was 
 inclined in the opposite direction, and in two minutes 
 more she was roused, and was quite straight. I visited 
 this patient only three times, after which she returned 
 home. Shortly afterwards, she had a nervous twitch- 
 ing of the head, and on one occasion it was again 
 drawn down to her shoulder. Dr Chawner, however, 
 hypnotized her as he had seen me do, and put it 
 right immediately ; and she is now (about twelve 
 months after she was hypnotized) in perfect health, 
 " her head quite straight, and she has perfect control 
 over the muscles of the neck." (See cases.) 
 
 Miss E. Atkinson had been unable to speak above 
 a whisper for four years and a half, notwithstanding 
 every known remedy had been perseveringly adopted, 
 under able practitioners. After the ninth hypnotic 
 operation she could speak aloud without effort, and
 
 OF HYPNOTISM. 
 
 has continued quite well ever since now about nine 
 months. (See case at length, Part II.) 
 
 The extraordinary effects of a few minutes hypno- 
 tism, manifested in such cases (so very different from 
 what we realize by the application of ordinary means) 
 may appear startling to those unacquainted with 
 the remarkable powers of this process. I have been 
 recommended, on this account, to conceal the fact of 
 the rapidity and extent of the changes induced, as 
 many may consider the thing impossible, and thus be 
 led to reject the less startling, although not more 
 true, reports of its beneficial action in other cases. In 
 recording the cases, however, I have considered it my 
 duty to record facts as I found them, and to make no 
 compromise for the sake of accommodating them to 
 the preconceived notions or prejudices of others. 
 
 It ma}- be proper to add, however, that I have 
 afforded opportunities to many eminent professional 
 and scientific gentlemen to see the patients, and in- 
 vestigate for themselves the real state of these respec- 
 tive cases ; and to them I can confidently appeal as 
 to the accuracy and fidelity of the reports of most of 
 the cases recorded in this treatise. 
 
 After such evidence as this, no one can reasonably 
 doubt that there is a remarkable difference between 
 hypnotism and natural sleep, and that it is a valuable 
 addition to our therapeutic means. 
 
 How these extraordinary effects are produced, it 
 may be impossible absolutely to decide. One thing, 
 however, I am certain of, that, in this condition, 
 besides the peculiar impression directly made on 
 the nervous centres, by which the mind is for the 
 time " thrown out of gear," and which enables us,
 
 72 PECULIAR PHENOMENA 
 
 in a remarkable manner, to localize or concentrate 
 the nervous energy, or sensorial power, to any par- 
 ticular point or function, instead of the more equal 
 distribution which exists in the ordinary condition, 
 we have also an extraordinary power of acting on the 
 capillaries, and of increasing and diminishing the 
 force and frequency of the circulation, locally and 
 generally.* This can be done in a most remarkable 
 degree, both as regards the extent and rapidity of 
 these changes, f And, moreover, changes from abso- 
 
 * By this I mean that any one examining the pulse by the 
 radial artery, whilst the patient has his arms in the catalep- 
 tiform condition, and held at right angles with his body, (and 
 when, of course, the circulation can only be influenced by the 
 state of rigidity or flaccidity of the muscles,) it will be found 
 fwble or contracted, but the moment the rigidity of the 
 muscles is reduced, by blowing on or fanning them, the pulse 
 will become much more developed. This, of course, which 
 may be done without the patient being conscious of the ex- 
 l>oriment, is totally different from what may be displayed as 
 a trick, by a person voluntarily compressing the axillary and 
 lirachial arteries, by drawing his arm firmly against his side. 
 The former is independent of volition, the latter is entirely 
 voluntary, and a mere trick. 
 
 + The first time I ever had an opportunity of examining a 
 patient minutely, or of feeling the pulse of one, under the 
 mesmeric influence, was on the 19th November, 1841. I was 
 much struck with the state of the pulse at the wrist so 
 Miiall and rapid as, combined with the state of tremor, or 
 slight subsultus in the arm, rendered it impossible to count 
 it accurately at the wrist This circumstance induced me to 
 reckon the velocity of the pulse by the carotid artery, as will 
 !>< found recorded in the " Manchester Guardian" of the 24th 
 <>f that month. I adduced this as the cause of the discrepancy
 
 DURING HYPNOTISM. 73 
 
 lute insensibility to the most exalted sensibility, may 
 be effected at a certain stage, almost with the rapidity 
 of thought, as exemplified at page 63. On the whole, 
 I consider it is of great importance to have acquired a 
 knowledge of how these effects can be produced and 
 generally applied, and turned to advantage in the cure 
 of disease, although we should never ascertain the 
 real proximate cause, or principle through which we 
 produce our effects. Who can tell how, or why, qui- 
 nine and arsenic cure intermittent fever? They are, 
 nevertheless, well known to do so, and are prescribed 
 accordingly. 
 
 Whilst I feel assured from personal experience, and 
 the testimony of professional friends, on whose judg- 
 ment and candour I can implicitly rely, that in this 
 we have acquired an important curative agency for a 
 certain class of diseases, I desire it to be distinctly un- 
 derstood, as already stated, that I by no means wish 
 
 between the numeration of the pulse by others and myself, 
 that I had counted it by the carotid artery, and considered it 
 impossible for any one to reckon it correctly by the radial 
 artery in such a case. The injected state of the conjunctival 
 membrane of the eye, and the whole capillary system in the 
 neck, head, and face, was so apparent, as Dr Radford very 
 correctly stated, that no one near the patient could fail to 
 observe it : this, together with the cold hands and contracted 
 pulse at the wrist, led me to infer, that the rigid state of the 
 cataleptiform muscles, opposed the free transmission of the 
 blood through the extremities, and would thus cause increased 
 action in the heart and determination to the brain and spinal 
 cord, as resulted from the ingenious experiments of my late 
 friend Dr Kellie, for speedily terminating the cold stage of 
 ague, by putting a tourniquet round one of the extremities.
 
 74 NOT A UNIVERSAL REMEDY. 
 
 to hold it up as a universal remedy. I believe it is 
 capable of doing great good, if judiciously applied. 
 Diseases evince totally different pathological condi- 
 tions, and the treatment ought to be varied accor- 
 dingly. We have, therefore, no right to expect to 
 find a universal remedy either in this, or any other > 
 method of treatment.
 
 75 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 Reasons for delivering Public Lectures on Hypnotism Mode of procuring 
 refreshing sleep, with low pulse and general flaccidity of muscle Effi- 
 cacy of this plan. 
 
 WHEN I had ascertained that Hypnotism was im- 
 portant as a curative power, and that the prejudices 
 existing against it in the public mind, as to its 
 having an immoral tendency, were erroneous ; and 
 the idea, that it was calculated to sap the foundation 
 of the Christian creed, by suggesting that the Gospel 
 miracles might have been wrought by this agency, 
 was quite unfounded and absurd, I felt it to be a 
 duty I owed to the cause of humanity, and my pro- 
 fession, to use my best endeavours to remove those 
 fallacies, so that the profession generally might be at 
 liberty to prosecute the inquiry, and apply it practi- 
 cally, without hazarding their personal and profes- 
 sional interest, by prosecuting it in opposition to 
 popular prejudice. It appeared to me there was no 
 mode so likely to insure this happy consummation as 
 delivering lectures on the subject to mixed audiences. 
 The public could thus have demonstrative proof of its 
 practical utility ; and, when it was proved to proceed 
 from a law of the animal economy, and that the
 
 70 MODE OF PRODUCING 
 
 patient could only be affected in accordance with his 
 own free mil and consent, and not, as the animal mag- 
 netizers contend, through the irresistible power of 
 volitions and passes of the mesmerizers, which might 
 be done in secret and at a distance, the ground of 
 charge as to my agency having an immoral tendency, 
 must at once fall to the ground. I have reason to 
 believe my labours have not been altogether unsuccess- 
 ful, in removing the popular prejudices ; and I hope 
 that the more liberal of my professional brethren, 
 now that they know my true motives of action, in 
 giving lectures to mixed audiences, instead of confin- 
 ing them to the profession only, and especially as I 
 made no secret of my modes of operating, will be inclined 
 to approve rather than blame me, for the course I 
 have taken in this respect. 
 
 From some peculiar views, I was led to make ex- 
 periments, by which I hoped to obtain natural or 
 refreshing sleep, and the results were quite satisfac- 
 tory. I have thus succeeded in making a patient, 
 who, when operated upon in the usual way, was highly 
 susceptible, and disposed to become strongly cataleptic, 
 with rapid pulse and oppressed breathing, remain in 
 a sound sleep for upwards of three hours, with all the 
 muscles flaccid, and the pulse and respiration slower 
 than natural, when operated on in this manner. All 
 this difference arises from the simple circumstance of 
 the position in which the eyes are placed during the 
 operation, namely, closing the eyelids, and bringing 
 the eyes loosely upwards, as if looking at an object at 
 a great distance, the eye-balls being turned up only 
 gently, so as to cause dilatation of the pupil, as already 
 explained ; and the limbs placed so as to relax the
 
 SLEEP AT WILL. 77 
 
 muscles as much as possible, and thus prevent accelera- 
 tion of the pulse. 
 
 I was led to the adoption of this method from the 
 following train of reasoning. If, as I inferred was 
 the case, the spasmodic tendency was reflected to the 
 muscular system generally, from the semiparalyzed 
 state of the branches of the third pair of nerves (which 
 supply the levatores palpebrarum and irides,) during 
 the continued fixed stare and straining of the eyes, I 
 thought, were I to insure all the other concomitant 
 requirements for procuring hypnotism, minus the 
 strain on the leoators and irides, I ought to procure 
 refreshing sleep, without rigidity of muscle or quick- 
 ened circulation. By closing the eyelids, the first 
 could be obtained, and by turning the eyes up 
 loosely, which dilates the pupils, the other would 
 also be attained ; I therefore tried the experiment, 
 which, as already noted, proved most successful. 
 
 I think the plan I have just pointed out is quite as 
 simple, and I feel assured it will prove as efficacious 
 in procuring " sleep at will" as that of Gardener, 
 lately published by Dr Binns. I may add, that I 
 publicly stated my plan at my lectures in London, 
 on the 1st and 2d March, 1842, which was at least 
 five or six months prior to the publication of Dr 
 Binns's work. I had also done the same at m y lectures 
 in Liverpool, about six weeks before tliat last period. 
 
 Mr Barrallier, an intelligent surgeon, of Milford, 
 who investigated the subject of Hypnotism with much 
 /eal and success, and published some interesting ex- 
 periments on the subject in the Medical Times, also 
 referred to the case of a gentleman in that town, whom 
 he had heard of as having been in the habit of pro-
 
 78 CAUSES OF PECULIAR PHENOMENA. 
 
 curing sleep immediately by keeping his eyes fixed 
 for a few minutes in one direction. Until he adopted 
 this method he scarcely slept at all. For various 
 modes of procuring sleep see pages 58-60 of this 
 treatise. 
 
 In reference to my original theory, Dr Binns, at 
 page 372, calls in question the justice of my allega- 
 tion, that during Hypnotism, natural or artificial, 
 there should be any imperfect arterialization of the 
 blood, notwithstanding the suppressed or modified 
 respiration and circulation. He has adduced no argu- 
 ments, however, to convince me to the contrary ; and 
 I again repeat my conviction, that such condition of 
 the blood does exist, and is a cause of ordinary sleep ; 
 and that the still more intense state of torpor, in a 
 certain state of Neuro-Hypnotism, results from a still 
 less perfectly purified blood ; and, on the other hand, 
 that the dreamy and exalted states arise from diffe- 
 rent degrees of stimulating properties of the blood, 
 from being more highly arterialized at various stages, 
 together with the velocity of circulation, and pressure 
 or tension on the brain during the cataleptiform state.
 
 79 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 Introductory remarks Relation between mind and matter illustrated to 
 disprove materialism Armstrong, Colton, Brown, Abercromby, 
 Stewart, Plato General conclusion, that mind or life is the cause of 
 organism Power of conscience The passions, how excited Dr 
 Elliotson's opinion as to the efficacy or non-efficacy of volition and sym- 
 pathy with operator's brain Modes of dividing the brain Causes of 
 Phrenology being imperfect Objections to Phreno-Hypnotism Mode 
 of connection between the brain and body First attempts at Phreno- 
 logizing during Hypnotism were failures Succeeded by operating dif- 
 ferently Cases illustrative A child operates successfully Details of 
 the case Other successful cases Proper time for operating Case of 
 an officer in 1758 Inferences as to its curative powers Opinions of 
 Le Roy Sunderland, and Mr Hall Presumed cause of phenomena 
 called Cross Magnetism Return stolen property to proper owners and 
 proper place by smell and touch Power of hearing faint sounds 
 Additional cases Opposite faculties can be excited at same time by 
 acting on the opposite hemispheres Mode of operating Concluding 
 remarks on the value of testimony. 
 
 I HAVE no doubt that some of the views already 
 advanced, and the facts on which they are grounded, 
 have appeared startling to many of my readers, and 
 I feel assured the subject to be discussed in the fol- 
 lowing chapter must be still more so ; namely, that 
 during hypnotism, we acquire the power, through 
 the nerves of common sensation, of rousing any sen- 
 timent, feeling, passion, or emotion, and any mental
 
 80 PHRENOLOGY DOES NOT INVOLVE 
 
 manifestation, according to our mode of manipulat- 
 ing the patient. This is what has been designated 
 phreno-magnetism by the discoverers of these curious 
 phenomena, but which, in accordance with my no- 
 menclature, I shall designate phrcno-hypnotism. It 
 appears with this, as with many other discoveries, 
 that similar investigations were going forward at 
 the same time in England and America, while the 
 discoverers were without the knowledge of each other's 
 views or proceedings, and that the results of their 
 experiments led all parties to form analogous con- 
 clusions. 
 
 It must be evident to every one who reflects deeply 
 and dispassionately on the subject, that if we really 
 can thus acquire such power as to rouse into great 
 activity any faculty or propensity, whilst we diminish 
 the activity of antagonist faculties, we must thereby 
 acquire an important power for meliorating the moral, 
 intellectual, and physical condition of man. I shall 
 have no difficulty in adducing sufficient proof, that 
 the human mind can be so developed and acted on 
 through the bodily organs ; but, before entering into 
 a detail of the modes of doing so, I shall endeavour 
 to remove a prejudice against the discussion of this 
 subject, which has arisen from the unhappy circum- 
 stance that some of those who promulgated this doc- 
 trine have professed a belief in materialism. Such an 
 avowal was indeed calculated to excite, not the pre- 
 judices, but the sound principles, of Christian society 
 in general against the reception or dispassionate con- 
 sideration of the facts on which it rested. For my 
 own part, I can see nothing in the subject to warrant 
 .such conclusions as the materialists have avowed ; and
 
 BELIEF IN MATERIALISM. 81 
 
 truth is not to be rejected, because misguided men 
 attempt to build upon it a hollow and unseemly 
 superstructure. 
 
 The following are my views of the relation which 
 subsists betwixt mind and matter : I look upon the 
 brain simply as the organ of the mind, and the bodily 
 organs as the instruments for upholding the integrity 
 of the bodily frame, and for acquiring and extending 
 its communion with external nature in our present 
 state of existence. That the mind acts on matter, 
 and is acted on by matter, according to the quality 
 and quantity, and relative disposition of cerebral 
 development. This, however, does not imply, that 
 mind is a mere attribute of matter.* My thinking, 
 
 * " A few sounds acting on the tympanum of the ear, or a 
 few black and small figures scribbled on a piece of white 
 paper (see Mr Rennell's pamphlet) have been known to knock 
 a man down as effectually as a sledge hammer, and to deprive 
 him not only of vision, but even of life. Here, then, we have 
 instances of mind acting upon matter, and I by no means 
 affirm that matter does not also act upon mind ; for to 
 those who advocate the intimate connection between body 
 and mind, these reciprocities of action are easily reconcile- 
 able ; but this will be an insuperable difficulty to those who 
 affirm the identity of mind and body." Again, " This inti- 
 mate union between body and mind is, in fact, analogous 
 to all that we see, and feel, and comprehend. Thus, we ob- 
 serve that the material stimuli of alcohol, or of opium, act 
 upon the mind through the body, and that the moral stimuli 
 of love, or of anger, act upon the body through the mind : 
 these are reciprocities of action that establish the principle of 
 connection between the two, but are fatal to that of an iden- 
 tity." " Does not every passion of the mind act directly, 
 F
 
 82 REFUTATION OF MATERIALISM. 
 
 and willing, and acting, so as to influence the mental 
 and bodily condition of another, surely does not 
 destroy our separate individuality? As well might 
 we say, that the refined compositions of a Mozart or 
 Beethoven, which were conveyed to the ears of their 
 delighted auditors through different instruments, 
 were created by the thought and will of the instru- 
 ments. 
 
 It appears to me quite clear, that the musician 
 might conceive, and compose, and record every idea, 
 whilst others could have no conception of their nature 
 or merits, unless communicated through an appropriate 
 instrument or instruments. The musician and instru- 
 ment, therefore, are distinct in their nature, as the 
 soul and the bodily organs are essentially distinct 
 from each other. 
 
 I shall endeavour to illustrate my views by the 
 
 primarily, and, as it were, per se upon the body, with greater 
 or with lesser influence in proportion to their force ? Does 
 not the activity belong on this occasion to the mind, and the 
 mere passiveness to the body ? Does not the quickened cir- 
 culation follow the anger, the start the surprise, and the swoon 
 the sorrow ! Do not these instances, and a thousand others, 
 clearly convince us that priority of action here belongs to the 
 mind, and not to the body? and those who deny this, are 
 reduced to the ridiculous absurdity of attempting to prove 
 that a man is frightened because he runs away, not that he 
 runs away because he is frightened, and that the motion pro- 
 duces the terror, not the terror the motion." Colton's Lucon. 
 The same author also urges the argument effectively by an 
 appeal to the fact of mania being so frequently produced by 
 moral causes, and the success which lias attended the treat- 
 ment of the insane by strict attention to moral management.
 
 REFUTATION OF MATERIALISM. 83 
 
 following simile. Suppose the instrument is good, 
 and well fitted for expressing musical composition, it 
 is evident, that it will better convey the beauties of 
 the composition, than if represented by a bad or in- 
 different instrument ; and will also afford more delight, 
 and satisfaction, and encouragement to the farther 
 exertions of the composer, than if performed on a 
 bad instrument. Just so the mind furnished with a 
 well developed brain. Supposing the musical instru- 
 ment is very perfect in some parts, but very imperfect 
 in others, it is evident, that the musician can afford 
 more pleasure to others, as well as more satisfaction to 
 himself, by playing on the more perfect parts. Then> 
 supposing the parts played on capable of becoming 
 improved, by being so exercised, (which is the case 
 with several instruments, as the violin,) it is clear, 
 that there will be greater and greater inducement for 
 the musician to confine himself to the better parts of 
 the instrument, and thus, by concentrating his whole 
 energies to these points, he will more and more 
 enamour himself, as well as his auditors, by the per- 
 fection of his performances. 
 
 This is exactly what I conceive takes place in refe- 
 rence to the brain, supposing different parts to be 
 appropriated as the instruments for the manifestation 
 of different mental functions. Every part of the 
 human frame is continually undergoing the process 
 of waste and repair that is to say, the molecular 
 particles of the various organs are continually chang- 
 ing, and moderate exercise tends to increased develop- 
 ment and power, whilst inaction has the opposite 
 tendency. This no one will deny. The analogy, 
 therefore, is complete. The soul or mind, by being
 
 84 REFUTATION OF MATERIALISM. 
 
 exercised judiciously in a particular direction, streng- 
 thens some peculiar organ, and acquires precision from 
 habit, which gives a tendency to perseverance in the 
 same course of action ; and, by refraining from certain 
 practices, the corresponding organs become feeble, and 
 thus exercise a less powerful influence on the mind. 
 Thus we can account for the power of habit, both 
 physical and mental, each tending to strengthen the 
 other by correct training ; and it is on this prin- 
 ciple that we can hope to meliorate the condition of 
 the vicious members of society, by separating them 
 from bad companions and practices, and encouraging 
 them in the exercise of virtuous habits. 
 
 Moreover, the mind of the musician may conceive 
 and excite into activity the corresponding organs of 
 the brain ; these may react on his corporeal organs, 
 and excite into activity the silent lyre ; all these links 
 of intercommunication may be perfected, without 
 conveying any corresponding feeling or emotion to 
 the minds of others, unless they are provided with 
 appropriate recipient organs (musical ears) for con- 
 veying to their brains certain vibrations, and thus 
 inducing in corresponding parts of their brains such 
 a condition as may awaken in their minds certain 
 associations of ideas, and manifest the peculiar emo- 
 tions which arise from them. It is not enough that 
 we have part of this concatenation complete; the 
 whole must be complete, or the results cannot be 
 perfect.* 
 
 * Some time after I had written the above, I had the satis- 
 faction to meet with a somewhat analogous illustration from 
 the pen of the late celebrated Dr John* Armstrong, which I 
 uow quote from his work on Fever, p. 478 ;
 
 DH ARMSTRONG'S OPINION. 85 
 
 The same arguments might be enforced in respect 
 to the painter, and sculptor, and orator, but it appears 
 
 " It will have been perceived, that I consider insanity as 
 the effect of some disorder in the circulation, whether pro- 
 duced by agencies of a corporeal or mental nature. It might 
 be shewn by familiar facts, that the brain is the principal 
 organ through which the operations of the mind are per- 
 formed ; and it does not, as many have supposed, necessarily 
 involve the doctrine of materialism to affirm, that certain 
 disorders of that organ are capable of disturbing those opera- 
 tions. If the most skilful musician in the world were placed 
 before an unstrung or broken instrument, he could not pro- 
 duce the harmony which he was accustomed to do when that 
 instrument was perfect, nay, on the contrary, the sounds 
 would be discordant ; and yet it would be manifestly most 
 illogical to conclude, from such an effect, that the powers of 
 the musician were impaired, since they merely appeared to 
 be so from the imperfection of the instrument. Now, what 
 the instrument is to the musician, the brain may be to the 
 mind, for ought we know to the contrary ; and to pursue the 
 figure, as the musician has an existence distinct from that of 
 the instrument, so the mind may have an existence distinct 
 from that of the brain ; for in truth we have no proof what- 
 ever of mind being a property dependent upon any arrange- 
 ment of matter. We perceive, indeed, the properties of 
 matter wonderfully modified in the various things of the 
 universe, which strike our senses with the force of their 
 sublimity or beauty ; but in all these we recognize certain 
 radical and common properties, that bear no conceivable 
 relation to those mysterious capacities of thought and of 
 feeling, referable to that something which, to designate and 
 distinguish from matter, we term mind. In this way, I con- 
 ceive, the common sense of mankind has made the distinction 
 which every where obtains between mind and matter, for it 
 is natural to conclude, that the essence of mind may be dis-
 
 86 MR H. MAYO S OPINION. 
 
 to my mind so evident by what has already been 
 advanced, that I forbear extending my illustrations, 
 
 tinct from the essence of matter, as the operations of the one 
 are so distinct from the properties of the other. But when 
 we say that mind is immaterial, we only mean, that it has 
 not the properties of matter ; for the consciousness which 
 informs us of the operations, does not reveal the abstract 
 nature of mind, neither do the properties reveal the essence 
 of matter. When any one, therefore, asserts the materiality 
 of mind, he presupposes, that the phenomena of matter 
 clearly shew the real cause of mind, which, as they do not, 
 he unphilosophically places his argument on an assumption. 
 And his ground of reasoning is equally gratuitous, when he 
 contends that mind is an attribute of matter, because it is 
 never known to operate but in conjunction with matter, for 
 though this connection is continually displayed, yet we have 
 no direct proof of its being necessary." 
 
 In like manner, Mr Herbert Mayo, in the introduction to 
 his late work on the Nervous System and its Functions, writes 
 thus : " Life is a force so contrived and used, as to qualify 
 the materials of the inert world for a temporary union with 
 consciousness, a means how mind may enter into such 
 relations with matter, that it may have its being and part in 
 physical nature, and its faculties developed, and its capabili- 
 ties and tendencies drawn out and proved (for whatever ulte- 
 rior purpose) in subjection to, and in harmony with, her 
 laws. 
 
 " As we imagine the Supreme Mind to be ubiquitous, 
 infinite, controlling, but uncontrolled by matter, so in con- 
 trast with these attributes we conceive the finite mind to be 
 bound down to place, and to be dependent on a certain 
 arrangement of matter for its manifestation, each power dis- 
 played as the property of a tissue, each agency as the function 
 of an organ. 
 
 " These views do not lead to materialism. For one cannot
 
 ARGUMENT DRAWN FROM MEMORY. 87 
 
 conceiving them to be unnecessary. I therefore con- 
 clude that the soul and the brain are essentially quite 
 distinct, and stand much in the same relation to each 
 other as the musician and musical instrument. 
 
 Another powerful argument of the mind being an 
 independent essence, is the fact, that amidst the con- 
 tinued changes which we know are going on in the 
 physical frame, we still recognize personal identity ; 
 and the remembrance of occurrences, even of early 
 life, after every particle of the body has been changed 
 several times, is reconcileable with the idea of the 
 original mind merely having exchanged and reno- 
 vated the substance of its dwelling-place ; but how 
 can we suppose that each particle had, in retiring, 
 transferred its quantum of knowledge to the particle 
 of matter which was to supply its place ? 
 
 Colton's remark seems very just when he says, 
 " Many causes are now conspiring to increase the 
 trunk of infidelity, but materialism is the main root 
 of them all." I have therefore endeavoured, and I 
 hope, by what has already been said, with some suc- 
 cess, to prove, that the belief in the brain being the 
 organ of the mind, leads only to the admission of the 
 
 disjoin the physiology of the nervous system from mental 
 philosophy, nor investigate the play of its organs without 
 attending to the mind itself. And if equal consideration is 
 given to the two classes of phenomena, it is impossible (so at 
 least it appears to myself) to avoid the conviction, that they 
 are essentially independent the one of the other, and belong 
 to distinct essences ; and that ipseity, the consciousness of 
 personal being, is not a mode of material existence, nor 
 physical impenetrability an attribute of that which feels and 
 thinks."
 
 88 PHRENOLOGY CONFIRMS 
 
 necessity of certain conditions of matter, in order to 
 make the varied conditions of mind manifest to 
 ourselves and other beings with which we are sur- 
 rounded during the present state of our existence. 
 The charge against the doctrine of phrenology, there- 
 fore, as leading to a belief in materialism, is altogether 
 unfounded ; for phrenology merely professes to appro- 
 priate to separate portions of the brain the execution 
 of special functions or manifestations, which are gene- 
 rally admitted, without hesitation, to result from its 
 functions as a single organ. I might therefore at 
 once dismiss the subject, leaving the doctrines of the 
 existence of a God, and the immortality of the soul, 
 to the defence of many able writers on that depart- 
 ment of mental philosophy. However, as it appears 
 to me that an argument of considerable strength, in 
 support of both these doctrines, may be drawn from 
 the doctrines of phrenology, or the allocation of special 
 functions to particular portions of the brain, I think 
 it may not be out of place for me very briefly to 
 advert to these topics. 
 
 The concurrent notions and practices of all nations, 
 savage as well as civilized, clearly indicate their in- 
 ward belief in a superintendent power who rules th'e 
 destinies of man and of nations, as verified by their 
 varied forms of worship. Phrenology, as illustrated 
 by Hypnotism, does more it proves that there is a 
 particular portion of the brain which the mind may 
 use as an organ destined for the especial purpose of 
 adoration ; and, as nothing has been made in vain, 
 <>r without a final cause, we may safely infer that such 
 an organ would never have been made had it not been 
 intended to be exercised ; and how could it have been
 
 THE CHRISTIAN CREED. 89 
 
 exercised worthily had there been no suitable object of 
 adoration ? The very fact, therefore, of the existence of 
 such a special organ having been ascertained, stamps 
 the folly of the Atheist ; and, as we have proved that 
 mind is not necessarily a mere attribute of organized 
 matter, but a distinct essence, we cannot suppose it 
 to be more perishable than matter ; and as it is an 
 acknowledged fact, that matter, so far as we can 
 apprehend, is essentially indestructible, analogy would 
 lead us to infer, that the mind, the more important 
 part of man, will not be less imperishable ; and, con- 
 sequently, the most rational conclusion to which we 
 can arrive is, that the soul is immortal. 
 
 " There is mind, then, as well as matter, or rather, 
 if there be a difference of the degrees of evidence, 
 there is mind, more surely than there is matter ; and 
 if at death not a single atom of the body perishes, but 
 that which we term dissolution, decay, putrefaction, 
 is only a change of the relative positions of those 
 atoms, which in themselves continue to exist with all 
 the qualities which they before possessed, there, is 
 surely no reason, from this mere change of place of 
 the atoms that formed the body, to infer, with respect 
 to'the independent mind, any other change than that 
 of its mere relation to those separate atoms. The 
 continued subsistence of every thing corporeal cannot, 
 at least, be regarded as indicative of the annihilation 
 of the other substance, but must, on the contrary, as 
 far as the mere analogy of the body is of any weight, 
 be regarded as a presumption in favour of the con- 
 tinued subsistence of the mind, when there is nothing 
 around it which has perished, and nothing even 
 which has perished, in the whole material universe,
 
 90 OPINIONS OF VARIOUS AUTHORS. 
 
 since the universe itself was called into being." Dr 
 Thomas Brown. 
 
 " The mind remembers, conceives, combines, and 
 reasons; it loves, it fears, and hopes in the total 
 absence of any impression from without, that can 
 influence, in the smallest degree, these emotions ; and 
 we have Ihe fullest conviction that it would continue 
 to exercise the same functions in undiminished 
 activity, though all material things were at ouce 
 annihilated." Abercrombie. 
 
 Mr Stewart also says, " Of all the truths we know, 
 the existence of mind is the most certain. Even the 
 system of Berkeley concerning the non-existence of 
 matter, is far more conceivable, than that nothing but 
 matter exists in the universe." 
 
 Plato also wrote thus : "The body being com- 
 pounded, is dissolved by death ; the soul, being simple, 
 passetli into another life, incapable of corruption." 
 
 That accomplished physician and metaphysician, 
 Dr Abercrombie, after relating the effects on memory 
 of diseases and disorders of the brain, with, in many 
 instances, serious organic lesion, concludes thus : "One 
 thing, however, is certain, that they give no counte- 
 nance to the doctrine of materialism, which some 
 have presumptuously deduced from a very partial view 
 of the influence of cerebral disease upon the manifes- 
 tations of mind. They shew us, indeed, in a very 
 striking manner, the mind holding intercourse with 
 the external world through the medium of the brain 
 and nervous system ; and, by certain diseases of these 
 organs, they shew this intercourse impaired or sus- 
 pended ; but they shew nothing more. In particular, 
 they warrant nothing in any degree analogous to those
 
 MIXD THE CAUSE OF ORGANISM. 91' 
 
 partial deductions which form the basis of materialism. 
 Ou the contrary, they shew us the brain injured and 
 diseased to an extraordinary extent, without the men- 
 tal functions being affected in any sensible degree." 
 (This power no doubt arises from each hemisphere 
 having corresponding organs, and consequently when 
 only one is diseased, the other may be adequate to the 
 manifestation of the mental phenomena.) " They 
 shew us farther, the manifestations of mind obscured 
 for a time, and yet reviving in all their original vigour 
 almost in the very moment of dissolution. Finally, 
 they exhibit to us the mind, cut off from all inter- 
 course with the external world, recalling its old im- 
 pressions, even of things long forgotten, and exercis- 
 ing its powers on those which had long ceased to 
 exist, in a manner totally irreconcilable with any 
 idea we can form of a material function." On the 
 Intellectual Powers, pp. 154, 155. 
 
 In addition to what I have already advanced in re- 
 futation of the doctrine of materialism, I beg to b\ib- 
 mit what appears to me much more probable than 
 that mental manifestations are the result of mere 
 organism, namely, that organism is the result of 
 mind, or the principle of life influencing or directing 
 organism in accordance with what may be its especial 
 wants and desires. We know that every seed of a 
 plant has a principle of life imparted to it by the great 
 first cause of all, by which, when sown in congenial 
 soil, it will exert its powers, and appropriate to itself 
 materials from the soil, to form an organism in accor- 
 dance with its peculiar wants and nature ; and that, 
 having passed through certain conditions, and formed 
 other kindred seed or germs to propagate its kind
 
 92 MIND AND LIFE 
 
 under a return of favouring circumstances, the plant 
 dies, and is resolved into its original elements. Man 
 and animals also possess similar faculties for propa- 
 gating and multiplying their species ; and to me it 
 appears far more probable, that the peculiar organism 
 of each variety results from the vivifying or intelligent 
 principle we call life or mind (and no one denies the 
 existence of the former, although we know nothing 
 of its essence or mode of operation,) directing and de- 
 termining appropriate formation, than that the mere 
 accidental union of particles of matter, in definite 
 quantity and form, should be the cause of mental phe- 
 nomena.* Itis truewecan here only speak of analogies, 
 but the analogy in favour of this proposition seems far 
 more natural and probable than the other. Is it not, 
 for example, a priori, as probable, on viewing a well 
 planned factory, fitted up with what is called self-acting 
 machinery, for us to suppose that the whole should 
 have been planned, and the machinery constructed, 
 in accordance with the intelligent designs of a skilful 
 artist, as that the brute matter, of which the whole is 
 constructed, came into its particular forms and arrange- 
 ments of its own accord, or by accident, and thus pro- 
 duced the intelligence of the superintending possessor? 
 The higher and more perfect the original force, or life, 
 
 * The original identity of structure of the germ of the most 
 various organic beings, constituted, as it always is, of a cell, 
 with a nucleus, seems to prove, that the cause of the variety 
 of classes, families, genera, and species of animals and plants 
 developed from the germ, resides not in the structure or 
 chemical property of the germ, but in the idea or spirit 
 implanted in it at its creation." (Miiller, p. 1339.)
 
 THE CAUSE OF ORGANISM. 93 
 
 or spirit, originally imparted into each species, the 
 more complex and extensive should we expect to find 
 the corresponding organism, to adapt it for the suitable 
 performance of its more varied functions ; and it there- 
 fore was necessary for man to have that superiority, 
 even in the form and functions of his hands, in which 
 he so much surpasses that of all other animals, to fit 
 him for the execution of the more extended range of 
 operations, which his superior endowments and cere- 
 bral organism fitted him to devise. 
 
 In this view of the subject, (and it appears to me, 
 after consulting the various opinions of our ablest 
 authorities on life and organization, to be the most 
 satisfactory conclusion I could arrive at,) every plant 
 or animal, however minute, may have a particular 
 vital or directing principle originally imparted to it, 
 and still sustained in its power by the great Creator, 
 without the necessity of according to each an immor- 
 tal existence and responsibility. Nor is there any 
 thing irreconcilable in the supposition that man, with 
 higher original powers, and more perfect organism, 
 fitting him to use these appropriately, and who is the 
 highest link in the chain, in this world, between 
 inorganic matter and the Supreme Being, should be 
 constituted a responsible agent, and exist hereafter, 
 whilst those creatures with less expansive faculties, 
 both of life and organization, may be exempted from 
 such ultimate responsibility, and may not be immortal. 
 
 This is only analogous to what we see in respect to 
 a commanding officer and his men, the former only 
 being responsible for imprudent enterprises, the 
 latter being considered merely as instruments in his 
 hands.
 
 94 POWER OF CONSCIENCE. 
 
 I shall close these remarks on the immortality of 
 the soul by a quotation from that excellent work, 
 " Abercrombie on the Intellectual Powers." " This 
 momentous truth rests on a species of evidence alto- 
 gether different, which addresses itself to the moral 
 constitution of man. It is found in those principles 
 of his nature by which he feels upon his spirit the 
 awe of a God, and looks forward to the future with 
 anxiety or with hope, by which he knows to dis- 
 tinguish truth from falsehood, and evil from good, and 
 has forced upon him the conviction that he is a moral 
 and responsible being. This is the power of con- 
 science, that monitor within, which raises its voice in 
 the breast of every man, a witness for his Creator. 
 He who resigns himself to its guidance, and he who 
 repels its warnings, are both compelled to acknow- 
 ledge its power ; and whether the good man rejoices 
 in the prospect of immortality, or the victim of re- 
 morse withers beneath an influence unseen by human 
 eye, and shrinks from the anticipation of a reckoning 
 to come, each has forced upon him a conviction, such 
 as argument never gave, that the being which is 
 essentially himself is distinct from any function of the 
 bo.Iy, and will survive in undiminished vigour when 
 the body shall have fallen into decay. 
 
 " There is thus, in the consciousness of every man, 
 a deep impression of continued existence. The casuist 
 may reason against it till he bewilder himself in his 
 own sophistries ; but a voice within gives the lie to 
 his vain speculations, and pleads with authority for a 
 life which is to come. The sincere and humble 
 inquirer cherishes the impression, while he seeks for 
 farther light on a subject so momentous, and ho
 
 PASSIONS EXCITED BY MUSIC. 95 
 
 thus receives, with absolute conviction, the truth 
 which beams upon him from the revelation of God, that 
 the mysterious part of his being, which thinks, and 
 wills, and reasons, shall indeed survive the wreck of 
 its mortal tenement, and is destined for immor- 
 tality."* 
 
 It must be obvious to all, that every variety of 
 passion and emotion can be excited in the mind by 
 music ; but how does this arise ? Simply by the 
 different effects produced by the varied degrees of 
 velocity, force, quality, and combinations of the 
 oscillations of the air acting on the auditory nerves, 
 these again communicated to the brain, and this acting 
 on the mind and body, creating corresponding mental 
 and bodily manifestations. Every one must have 
 observed the remarkable effects evinced by these 
 means on the physiognomy, and the more critically 
 observant must have noticed, that in susceptible 
 individuals there is also a very marked change in the 
 state of the respiration and general posture of the 
 body. They must also have experienced, in them- 
 selves and others, how prone we are to assume a 
 
 * To those who wish to pursue the subject farther, I beg 
 to refer to Dr Samuel Clarke on the Being and Attributes of 
 God, pp. 70 75 ; Jackson on Matter and Mind, pp. 41 47, 
 51 ; Warburton's Divine Legation, vol. T. book 3d ; Drew's 
 Essay on the Immortality of the Soul ; and Ramsay's Prin- 
 ciples, pp. 233 5 ; also Brougham and Bakewell, where 
 they will find it ably argued as far as Natural Theology can 
 avail ; but the sacred volume contains a lucidity and sanc- 
 tion beyond all we can adduce from mere human ingenuity, 
 and I therefore conclude by referring to it, as " life and im- 
 mortality are clearly brought to light through the Gospel."
 
 96 CAUSES OF THE PHENOMENA. 
 
 sympathetic condition, both of mind and body, from 
 those with whom we associate, or during a temporary 
 interview. These physical changes seem to result 
 from a mental influence imparted through the eyes 
 and ears, and then reflected from within, through the 
 respiratory, facial, and spinal nerves, on the external 
 form and features. Now, such being the case, is there 
 any great improbability, that by calling the muscles 
 of expression into action during the hypnotic state, 
 by titillating certain nerves, that the impression of 
 the feeling with which such external manifestation is 
 generally associated should be reflected on the brain, 
 and excite in the mind the particular passion or 
 emotion ? I think it is highly probable this is the 
 true cause of the phrenological manifestations during 
 the hypnotic condition ; and as it is the peculiar 
 feature of this condition, that the whole energies of 
 the soul should be concentrated on the emotion 
 excited, the manifestation, of course, becomes very 
 decided. I presume the different points pressed on, 
 through the stimulus given to various fasciculi of 
 nerves, call into action certain combinations of 
 muscles of expression in the face and general frame, 
 and also influence the organs of respiration, and thus 
 the mind is influenced, indirectly, through the organs 
 of common sensation and the sympathetic, as sneezing 
 is excited in some by too strong a light irritating the 
 optic nerves. Two patients who are highly intelli- 
 gent, and remain partially conscious, and who 
 acknowledge they did all in their power to resist the 
 influence excited by manipulating the head, state, that 
 the first feeling was a drawing of the muscles of the 
 face, and affection of the breathing, which was fol-
 
 SITUATION OF SYMPATHETIC POINTS. 97 
 
 lowed by an irresistible impulse to act as they did, 
 but why they could not tell. 
 
 In this view of the subject it would resolve itself 
 into the laws of sympathy, and the question then is, 
 where are the external or superficial points of the 
 sympathies located? Experience must decide this, 
 and in the peculiar condition induced by hypnotism, 
 according to my own experience, this can be more 
 readily and certainly determined than in the normal 
 state. These points having been ascertained, we can 
 then determine how and where to act according to 
 our particular object ; and it can be of no real impor- 
 tance where the cerebral points or special organs may 
 be posited. 
 
 As to the real locations of the sympathetic points, 
 by stimulating which we produce peculiar manifesta- 
 tions, they appear to me not to be quite accurately 
 the same in all heads, but, on the whole, pretty near 
 the centres of the organs as mapped out on heads 
 generally approved by phrenologists, and I have had 
 decided proof that there is some relation subsists 
 betwixt the size and function, as in general there is 
 more energy displayed when there is large develop- 
 ment, and the negative when it is defective. Thus, 
 a patient with large combativeness or destructiveness, 
 when excited during hypnotism, will display great 
 violence and disposition to attack others, whereas, 
 where they are defective, they will shrink and express 
 a fear that some one is quarrelling, or angry with 
 them. 
 
 If the solution of the cause of these remarkable 
 phenomena now given should not be deemed correct, 
 the only other which occurs to my mind as at all 
 G
 
 98 DR EILIOTSON'S OPINIONS 
 
 satisfactory, is this, that the different fasciculi of sen- 
 tient nerves excite directly the corresponding points 
 of the brain, and these again the physical manifesta- 
 tions. We know by what musical combinations and 
 movements we can excite the different passions ; we 
 know also that this arises from some peculiar im- 
 pression communicated to the brain through the 
 portio mollis of the seventh pair of nerves; and 
 whether this is conveyed to it as a single organ only, 
 or as a combination of organs, it is clear that, as the 
 origin of the seventh is more remote from the brain 
 than the origin of theyz/M, there must, consequently, 
 be at least as great difficulty in accounting for such 
 results being excited through the different branches 
 of the seventh as through those of the fifth pair. 
 
 The animal magnetizers do not now contend 
 for their volitions being necessary. Dr Elliotson 
 distinctly states, in a published letter, dated llth 
 September, 1842, that he had " never produced any 
 effect by mere willing ;" and adds, " I have never seen 
 reason to believe, (and I have made innumerable 
 comparative experiments upon the point,) that I have 
 heightened the effect of my processes by exerting the 
 strongest will, or lessened them by thinking inten- 
 tionally of other things, and endeavouring to bestow 
 no more attention upon what I was about than was 
 just necessary to carry on the process. So far from 
 willing, I have at first had no idea of what would be 
 the effect of my processes ; in exciting the cerebral 
 organs, the effect ensues as well in my female paiii-nt 
 though the manipulator be a sceptic, and may there- 
 fore be presumed not to wish the proper result to 
 ensue, and though I stand aside, and do not know
 
 AS TO VOLITION AND SYMPATHY. 99 
 
 what organ he has in view. I have never excited 
 them by the mere will ; I have excited them with my 
 fingers just as well when thinking of other matters 
 with my friends, and momentarily forgetting what I 
 was about," &c. The Doctor also denies his belief in 
 the phrenological results arising from sympathy with 
 the state of the operator's brain. I feel convinced that 
 he is right in these sentiments, and believe that the 
 same degree of mechanical pressure or stimulus to the 
 integuments of the cranium, from an inanimate sub- 
 stance, when the patient is in the proper stage of the 
 mesmeric condition, will produce the same manifesta- 
 tion as the personal touch of either sceptic or believer 
 in animal magnetism. Thus, touching them with a 
 knobbed gla.ss rod, three feet long, has produced the 
 phenomena with my patients as certainly as personal 
 contact, so th<it if there is any thing of vital magnetism 
 in it, it is subject to different laws from that of ordi- 
 nary magnetism or electricity. 
 
 Mere pointing I have myself found sufficient to 
 excite the manifestations in several patients, after 
 previous excitement of the organs, but this arises 
 from feeling, as I know the sensibility of the skin 
 in those cases enables them to feel without actual 
 contact. 
 
 The following experiment seems to me to prove 
 clearly that the manifestations were entirely attri- 
 butable to the mechanical pressure operating on an 
 excited state of the nervous system. I placed a cork 
 endways over the organ of veneration, and bound it 
 in that position by a bandage passing under the chin. 
 I now hypnotized the patient, and observed the 
 effect, which was precisely the same, for some time,
 
 100 EFFECTS OF SIMPLE PRESSURE. 
 
 as when no such appliance was used ; after a minute 
 and a half had elapsed, an altered expression of 
 countenance took place, and a movement of the arms 
 and hands, which latter became clasped as in adora- 
 tion, and the patient now arose from the seat and 
 knelt down as if engaged in prayer. On moving the 
 cork forwards, active benevolence was manifested, 
 and on being pushed back, veneration again mani- 
 fested itself. I have repeatedly tried similar experi- 
 ments with this, and other patients, with the like 
 results, including other organs. It is clear there was 
 no mechanical pressure to direct the movement down- 
 wards^ because there was pressure upwards also ; and 
 had there been any preconceived notion in the patient's 
 mind, to excite to such action, it ought to have been 
 manifested immediately on passing into the sleep. None 
 of the patients had the slightest notion of what was 
 my object in making such experiments, and none of 
 them saw the others operated on. At page 141, it 
 will be observed, pressure by their own fingers pro- 
 duced similar manifestations, even whilst their minds 
 were expecting some other restilts. 
 
 Whilst it is generally agreed that the brain 
 admits of being divided into regions for the animal 
 propensities, moral sentiments, and intellectual facul- 
 ties, it has not been at all possible to prove satisfac- 
 torily the exact position and size of each organ, as 
 noted by the phrenologists. Granting that there is a 
 distinct organ or point in the brain for each faculty, 
 which I think is highly probable, still there must 
 ever be insuperable difficulty in thus accurately deter- 
 mining character, even supposing we knew the exact 
 position and size of each organ, because much must
 
 PHRENOLOGY WHY IMPERFECT. 101 
 
 depend upon the state of perfection of structure, and 
 activity of the point or organ, as well as its absolute 
 size. Thus, a person with a large eye may have defec- 
 tive sight, whilst a person with a small eye may see 
 clearly and distinctly, the greater perfection of struc- 
 ture, and activity of the optic nerves, more than 
 compensating for mere deficiency of size. So it is 
 with the brain, a part may be abnormally large, and 
 the faculty dull, from want of power or activity, or 
 perfection of organic structure ; and the reverse may 
 obtain, a small development, with high activity, may 
 render its function predominant. It is from a want 
 of such knowledge as this that phrenology must ever 
 prove imperfect, even granting the localities to be 
 correctly ascertained and established. However, 
 when we have ascertained the points where, by acting 
 in any peculiar manner, we can excite into activity 
 particular sympathetic physical and mental associations, 
 whilst the other faculties are put into a state of 
 quiescence, it appears to me to be a matter of far 
 greater importance, and a subject still more curious, 
 than any thing ever brought forward by phrenolo- 
 gists. It is far more available for practical purposes too. 
 Phrenologists could at best only pretend to tell the 
 natural tendencies of an individual, and direct that he 
 should be educated in accordance with a specific plan, 
 as has hitherto been done independently of phrenology, 
 from watching the natural dispositions and habits of 
 different individuals, by encouraging and directing 
 their studies in such and such a direction ; but here, 
 in addition to this, we have the power of giving a 
 decided impulse in any particular direction. It ought 
 not to be overlooked, that this does not deprive us of
 
 102 IMPORTANCE OF INQUIRY. 
 
 any of our former available modes of instruction in 
 science and morality, but it promises to prove a 
 powerful auxiliary for expediting and ensuring the 
 success of those means. It therefore follows, that it 
 becomes the duty of every well-wisher to his species 
 to investigate this matter, and determine how far it is 
 generally applicable. It is still more the duty of the 
 medical faculty to do so, because, should farther 
 experience determine this question in the affirmative, 
 it is reasonable to expect it may be turned to the best 
 account in the cure of disease, by applying our 
 remedies locally, to the cutaneous points which have 
 been ascertained to be the centres of the morbid con- 
 catenation. Thus, leeching and sedatives, &c. might 
 be applied to such points when there was excitement 
 of the corresponding functions, and vice versa, with 
 the reasonable hope of success ; and if this method 
 cannot be effective, we can be pretty certuin of success 
 through hypnotism, by exciting the morbidly low 
 faculty where there is depression, and the antagonist 
 organ where there* has been excitement. In this 
 manner I have no doubt but hypnotism may prove of 
 incalculable advantage in the treatment of many cases 
 of insanity, and nervous affections tending to induce 
 that disease. 
 
 I am quite aware some will be ready to start an 
 objection to my views, by stating that the scalp, 
 where many or most of these demonstrations have 
 been manifested, is not highly sensitive, that it is not 
 extensively supplied with sensient nerves, and that 
 they all arise from the fifth pair, and do not pass 
 directly through the skull to the subjacent points of 
 the brain. This, however, does not prove that the
 
 HOW DIFFERENT PARTS ARE CONNECTED. 103 
 
 terminal branches may not ultimately have a special 
 influence on such points, notwithstanding their cir- 
 cuitous course to arrive there. I beg to remind 
 such individuals that we are by no means sufficiently 
 acquainted with the laws and distribution of the 
 nervous system, to be able to prescribe rules as to 
 how it ought and must act. Who does not know, that 
 until the discoveries of our illustrious countryman, 
 Sir Charles Bell, the same nerve was considered to 
 give both sense and motion ? And when he pro- 
 pounded that the true cause of its double functions 
 was because of its having double roots, was not this 
 announcement scouted for some time, and then, when 
 proved to be true, were not attempts made to rob Sir 
 Charles Bell of the honour of the discovery? 
 
 There seems to be great reason to conclude that the 
 distribution of the nerves of the scalp will ultimately 
 be found far more intricate and beautifully arranged 
 than at present we have any conception of. 
 
 I shall now proceed to state my views as to the 
 mode in which different parts of the brain are asso- 
 ciated with different parts of the body. I have long 
 quite agreed with those physiologists who consider 
 that the vis nervosa is something circulated in tubes, 
 that the primitive nerve-tubes do not anastomose, 
 but only run parallel with others, remaining dis- 
 tinct and isolated throughout their course, and that 
 consequently the " cerebral extremity of each fibre is 
 connected with the peripheral extremity of a single 
 nervous fibre only, and that this peripheral extremity 
 is in relation with only one point of the brain or 
 spinal cord : so that, corresponding to the many 
 millions of primitive fibres which are given off to
 
 104 HOW PASSIONS ARE EXCITED. 
 
 peripheral parts of the body, there are the same num- 
 ber of peripheral points of the body represented in the 
 brain. The sensation of a single point evidently 
 depends on the impression being conveyed by means 
 of a single fibre to a single point of the sensorium." 
 (Miiller.) It is from the same cause that we can 
 regulate simple or associated movements of distinct 
 members. 
 
 From all these considerations it appears quite rea- 
 sonable to suppose, and analogy, as respects distinct 
 organs being appropriated for other special functions, 
 warrants the inference, that different parts of the 
 brain may have special functions to perform, both as 
 regards mind and matter ; and that, when such 
 points are excited into inordinate activity, the mani- 
 festations will become correspondently more con- 
 spicuous, and vice versa. 
 
 We know from experience that the various passions 
 and emotions can be excited through the organ of 
 hearing either by music or oratory, th rough the eyes 
 by painting and sculpture, and likewise, though less 
 extensively and efficiently, through common sensa- 
 tion, and there seems to me to be nothing, a priori, to 
 militate against the probability, that this may be 
 effected to a much greater extent than has yet been 
 done, provided we can only discover the peculiar 
 mode of exciting certain portions of the brain. If 
 the views already advanced, that every point of the 
 body supplied by primitive nervous fibres has a distinct 
 corresponding point in the brain, it is clear, that by 
 titillating each peripheral point, we shall excite its 
 corresponding central point ; and from what shall be 
 found detailed in the experiments recorded, it appears
 
 SMELLIE'S PREDICATION. 105 
 
 highly probable that the respective parts of the brain 
 corresponding to every part of the body, may be 
 excited into activity through certain sympathetic 
 points in the integuments of the head and neck, and 
 if so, we may also excite into activity* the whole of 
 those actions, mental and muscular, which are asso- 
 ciated with each portion of the cerebrum. In this 
 case Smellie's supposition would be completely realized 
 in man. He expresses himself thus : "I can con- 
 ceive a superior being so thoroughly acquainted with 
 the human frame, so perfectly skilled in the connec- 
 tion and mutual dependence which subsist between 
 our intellect and our sensitive organs, as to be able, 
 by titillating in various modes and directions, particular 
 combinations of nerves, or particular branches of any 
 single nerve, to excite in the mind what ideas he may 
 think proper. I can likewise conceive the possibility 
 of suggesting any particular idea, or species of ideas, 
 by affecting the nerves in the same manner as these 
 ideas affect them when excited by any other cause." 
 This confident aspiration seems to be now in a great 
 measure realized, by certain modes of manipulating 
 patients during the hypnotic condition, of which I 
 shall now adduce a few illustrations. 
 
 My first attempt to excite the phreno-hypnotic 
 phenomena was in the month of April, 1842, in the 
 lecture-room at Liverpool, but it did not succeed. I 
 then tried the experiment repeatedly in private, 
 putting the patients to sleep by contact as well as in 
 my usual way, but still could not succeed. I was 
 anxious to try it fairly, and therefore applied to Mr 
 Brookes, through the kindness of Dr Birt Davies of 
 Birmingham, for information as to the mode Mr
 
 IOC PHRENO- HYPNOTIC EXPERIMENTS 
 
 Brookes had practised so successfully, and which was 
 most politely communicated to me by both these 
 gentlemen. I tried this mode with several patients, 
 both in my usual plan and that of the animal 
 magnetisers, but was still unsuccessful. I now 
 abandoned it as a hopeless task, presuming the 
 cases which had proved successful with others must 
 have been hisus naturae, or that the operators had 
 deceived themselves, the patients having been led to 
 answer, and give the manifestations they did, from 
 the nature of the leading questions proposed, and 
 might afterwards remember what passed at previous 
 operations, and answer accordingly ; whilst, like 
 natur.il somnambulists, they might not remember, 
 when awake, what had passed during their sleep. 
 
 Last December I was induced to make another 
 attempt, from reading a report of Mr Spencer T. Hall's 
 two first lectures on the subject, at Sheffield : and it 
 was remarkable, that the very first patient I tried in 
 that way exhibited several of the manifestations. 
 However, I was led to refer the result to a totally 
 different cause from what he and the other animal 
 magnetisers did. I concluded it arose from the 
 different degrees of sensibility of different parts of the 
 integuments, conveying correspondingly varied im- 
 pressions when similarly impressed, and exciting diffe- 
 rent ideas in the mind, and thus calling up old associ- 
 ations ; and that when similarly impressed the same 
 ideas might again present themselves to the mind. I 
 considered this far more probable than that the brain 
 was affected by any transmission from the operator to 
 the brain directly through the skull ; and to prove this, 
 tried the effect of pressure over parts which had no
 
 HOW EXCITED. 107 
 
 cerebral substance directly subjacent, and the results 
 confirmed my expectations. Thus, pressure on the apex 
 of the mastoid process, and the ossa nasi, and the chin, 
 were as certainly followed by particular manifestations, 
 as pressure on different parts of the cranium were 
 followed by others. I also very soon ascertained that 
 the same points of the cranium, when thus excited, 
 did not excite the same ideas or emotions to the minds 
 of different patients, which I considered ought to have 
 been the case, according to the views of the stanch 
 phrenologists. I have since discovered the cause of 
 this, namely, not having operated at the proper stage 
 of the hypnotic condition. 
 
 I shall now adduce a few r examples. On one sub- 
 ject, after being in the hypnotic condition for a few 
 minutes, by applying gentle pressure over the ossa 
 nasi, immoderate laughter was immediately excited, 
 and ceased as abruptly on removing the contact. The 
 abruptness of these transitions, especially from immo- 
 derate laughter to the extreme gravity and vacancy of 
 expression peculiar to the hypnotic state, was quite 
 ludicrous, and almost beyond belief. Supposing she 
 were singing the most grave tune and solemn words, the 
 moment the nose was touched in this manner, by any 
 one, she was irresistibly thrown into this merry mood, 
 but would join in the tune again with the utmost 
 gravity the moment the contact ceased. Rubbing the 
 same part, or pinching up the skin over it, seemed to 
 produce no effect whatever. On applying pressure 
 to this patient's chin there was an immediate catch in 
 the breathing, with sighing and sobbing, which would 
 subside on removing the point of contact. By touch- 
 ing both nose and chin at same time there was the
 
 108 PHRENO-HYPNOTIC EXPERIMENTS. 
 
 most ludicrous combination of laughing and crying, 
 each struggling for the mastery, as we sometimes see 
 in hysteric attacks. Both would cease immediately 
 on removing the contact. Friction or pinching the 
 skin on the chin had no effect of producing such 
 phenomena. In short, no part of this patient which 
 I tested seemed capable of being excited by friction 
 or pinching the integuments, excepting around the 
 .orbits, which produced spectra, although less perfectly 
 so than by simple pressure against the bone. This 
 patient, being pressed over the phrenologists' organ of 
 time, always expressed a desire " to write" a letter 
 to her mother or her brother ; over their organ of 
 tune, "to sing ;" between this and wit, " to be judici- 
 ous ;" the boundary between wit and causality, " to 
 be clever ;" causality, " to have knowledge ;" in the 
 centre of the forehead, to have " a certain perception 
 of learning;" below this the phrenologists' eventu- 
 ality, " to be skilful ;" the points of the head occupied 
 by veneration and benevolence were sometimes in- 
 dicated by the desire " to be virtuous," or " to be 
 honourable ;" most frequently, when the point touched 
 was over benevolence, the answer was, " to be honour- 
 able," and when over the other point, " to be virtu- 
 ous," when both points were touched at same time, it 
 was, " to be honourable and virtuous," and the same 
 answer was always given when these points were 
 touched combined with No. 1, or amativeness. When 
 the latter was touched alone, the answer always was 
 " to be commended ;" when approximating the 
 mastoid process, or over that process, a remarkable 
 placidity, or expression of delight, came over the 
 countenance, and the desire was for " complacency,"
 
 PHRENO-HYPNOTIC EXPERIMENTS. 109 
 
 which, when hypnotized, she defined, "to be civil," 
 but when awake she seemed at a loss to know what 
 the word meant. On touching " combativeness" the 
 placidity of countenance was speedily exchanged for 
 the opposite expression ; but on pressure being made 
 immediately above the ears, the most ferocious aspect 
 of countenance was assumed, the breath being sup- 
 pressed almost to suffocation, the face becoming flushed, 
 with grinding of the teeth ; and when the arms 
 were not rigid, the most vigorous efforts at inflicting 
 violence on all who were within her reach, as several 
 gentlemen can attest to their personal knowledge and 
 sorrow. On pressure being applied to the root of the 
 nose, the idea of seeing different forms, and figures, 
 and colours, seemed to be excited in the mind, more 
 vividly when certain points were thus excited, but it 
 could be excited by pressing the integuments against 
 the under, as well as upper edge of the orbit, with 
 this difference, that the objects seen, or rather spectra 
 excited, were then generally of a painful and dis- 
 tressing character, whereas they were generally of 
 a bright, and glowing, or cheerful description when 
 excited by acting on the upper margin of the orbit. 
 I should observe, that care was taken, in all these 
 experiments, not to press against the globe of the eye. 
 Thus far the phenomena were pretty uniform in this 
 patient, the answers having been generally very 
 much the same when impressed exactly in the same 
 toay, on the same points, and under similar circumstances 
 in all other respects. Thus, the last day I had an 
 opportunity of testing this patient, I went over the 
 different points four times with scarcely the slightest 
 variation in the answers, as can be testified by several
 
 110 PH RENO-HYPNOTIC EXPERIMENTS. 
 
 gentlemen who were present ; and they were again 
 repeated two or three times the same evening with 
 like results. This patient was operated on the previous 
 day in presence of several professional and scientific 
 gentlemen, when several answers were given diffe- 
 rent. More than one being operating on that occasion, 
 and the manner and degree of touching the parts 
 being different, might be the cause of the varied 
 results. I am satisfied this patient knew nothing of 
 phrenology ; and that she remembered nothing of 
 what she said, or was done to her during these 
 operations. 
 
 Case II. In this yatient friction would excite, whilst 
 pressure had no effect in calling forth manifestations. 
 In this case, friction over the ossa nasi excited the 
 desire for " something to smell," generally aromatic 
 vinegar or Eau de Cologne ; over the chin, for some- 
 thing to eat ; over the tendon of the orbicularis, a 
 slight tendency to laugh ; close upon the root of the 
 nose, friction excited spectra, and round the orbit, in 
 like manner, the same or similar spectra, differing in 
 form, and hue, and combination, according to the 
 degree of pressure and friction applied ; over the organ 
 of tune, " to sing ;" over the back part of the base of 
 the head, expressed herself " very happy and com- 
 fortable ;" over combativeness and destructiveness, a 
 quarrelsome disposition, as manifested in word, look, 
 and action. The other parts tried were less certain or 
 decided in this patient. 
 
 Case III. In this patient, friction excited the desire 
 " to waltz," when applied over the organ of tune, 
 and the desire " to walk," when applied to the organ 
 of wit, as mapped by the phrenologists, and in like
 
 SUPPOSED CAUSE OF PHENOMENA. Ill 
 
 manner, " to sing," when veneration was the point 
 affected. Spectra, also, when the integuments were 
 rubbed against the margin of the orbits. Although 
 not corresponding with the phrenological charts, nor 
 with what occurred in the others, similar answers 
 were given when the same points were similarly 
 excited. 
 
 Case IV. When asked what she would like, when 
 manipulated as the others referred to, always an- 
 swered, " nothing at all," excepting over the most 
 sensitive parts of the cranium, when her answer was, 
 " leeches to my head." 
 
 Case V. Very much the same as the last. 
 
 I think the cases referred to support my position, 
 that the different results arise from the circumstance 
 of different parts of the integuments having different 
 degrees of sensibility, and thus exciting different 
 ideas in the mind when the same quality and inten- 
 sity of stimulus is applied to each part in succession. 
 There can be no doubt but the point under which 
 the phrenologists have posited " combativeness and 
 destructiveness," is the most highly sensitive of any 
 part of the cranium, and is always accompanied with 
 symptoms of the patients feeling pain, and, as a 
 matter of course, they will offer resistance, and at- 
 tempt to free themselves from the offending cause ; 
 and so of the rest, according to their respective im- 
 pressibilities. 
 
 After the above remarks had been written, and my 
 work sent to press, I met with the following most 
 interesting case : I was informed that a child, five 
 years and a half old, who had been present when I 
 exhibited the experiments on No. I. the same even-
 
 112 CHILD HYPNOTIZES HER NURSE. 
 
 ing had proposed to operate on her nurse. The nurse 
 had no objection to indulge the girl, never supposing 
 any effect could take place. However, it appeared 
 she speedily closed her eyes, when the child, imitat- 
 ing what she saw me do, placed a finger on her fore- 
 head, and asked what she would like, when the 
 patient answered, " to dance ;" on trying another 
 point, the answer was, " to sing," and the two then 
 had a song together, after which the juvenile experi- 
 menter roused the patient in the same manner she 
 had seen me do. 
 
 The above circumstance being related to me the 
 following day, I felt curious to ascertain whether 
 there might not be some mistake, as there had been 
 no third party present, and it depended entirely on 
 the statement of the child, which induced me, when 
 visiting the family the day after, to request permis- 
 sion to test the patient. This was readily granted } 
 and, to my astonishment, she manifested the pheno- 
 mena in a degree far beyond any case I had tried ; 
 indeed, she did so, with a degree of perfection which 
 baffles description. 
 
 However frequently she was tried, the same ex- 
 pression of countenance, the same condition of the 
 respiration, and similar postures of the body have 
 been evinced, when the same points were pressed. 
 Indeed, so highly susceptible was she, that, after a few 
 trials, when I pointed a finger or glass rod over the 
 part, without contact, similar manifestations resulted, 
 only in a less rapid and more modified degree. I 
 also found by trying No. II. at an earlier stage, that 
 her susceptibility was almost equal to the present 
 case. The following are a few of the more striking
 
 REMARKABLE EXPERIMENTS. 113 
 
 manifestations : pressure on the chin was followed 
 by movement of the jaws, lips, and tongue, with the 
 desire to eat ; on the lower part of the nose, " to 
 smell ;" insertion of tendon of the orbicularis, immode- 
 rate laughter, which, on being asked why she laughed, 
 the answer indicated, it was from a sense of the ludi- 
 crous being excited ; over time, " to dance ;" tune, 
 " to sing," with pressure on the eye at same time, 
 she did sing part of a song ; over the back of the 
 head, No. I. she shuddered and retreated, under the 
 impression that some one was about to take liberties 
 with her, the same feeling of delicacy was also mani- 
 fested when any other part of the body was touched 
 excepting the head and face ; over apex of mastoid 
 process, the desire to shake hands and be friendly ; the 
 former, with No. 4, or adhesiveness, she would lean to, 
 or clasp any one near her ; combativeness, the reverse ; 
 destructiveness, (it is very small,) she was distressed 
 from the notion that some one was quarrelling with 
 her; philoprogenitiveness, she always said, " hark, the 
 poor child is crying !" secretiveness and caution, she 
 would tell nothing ; benevolence, " to travel ;" vene- 
 ration, she knelt down in the most solemn manner 
 and prayed ; combined with hope an expression of 
 ecstasy united with devotion ; over the eyebrows, 
 spectra of all forms and colours, gay and glowing, 
 and when below the eye, the notion of the sea, a 
 ship, and people about to be drowned ; at a farther 
 trial, other manifestations came out equally, or even 
 more strikingly, according to the accuracy with which 
 the corresponding points were touched. In parti- 
 cular, I must note what happened the first time I 
 touched imitation, which was entirely accidental, 
 
 H
 
 114 EXPERIMENTS. 
 
 and whilst, besides a relation of my own, there 
 was present a gentleman whose literary and scien- 
 tific attainments, and philosophic turn of mind, 
 as well as high standing in society, render him an 
 ornament to our country. Besides imitating every 
 thing done or said in English, she imitated correctly 
 French, Italian, Spanish, German, Latin, and Greek ; 
 every word was spoken with the utmost precision, 
 and has been done several times since before many 
 professional and scientific gentlemen, and ladies, who 
 can bear testimony to the extraordinary fidelity of 
 pronunciation and emphasis. I need scarcely add, she 
 could not do so when tested after being awakened. 
 Many other patients I have since made do the same, 
 one a girl of only twelve years of age. 
 
 On Mr Hall's arrival in Manchester, previous to 
 his first lecture, I had the pleasure of seeing him at 
 my house, when I exhibited my experiments on this 
 and another patient, with which he seemed much 
 gratified. I also afforded him an opportunity of 
 seeing them again next day. After I had them in 
 the hypnotic condition, I requested him to mani- 
 pulate their heads, which he did more minutely than 
 I had done, and consequently brought out additional 
 manifestations. I was on the alert to all he did and 
 said, for I was determined he should not have an 
 opportunity of prompting in any way, and most 
 assuredly, by exciting acquisitiveness, he very soon 
 led the patient to steal a silver snuff-box from a gen- 
 tleman present, and it was most striking the anxiety 
 with which she returned it, on Mr Hall removing the 
 point of contact to conscientiousness, the movement 
 of the arm was changed instantly, as if automatically.
 
 OBSERVATIONS OF TWO PATIENTS. 115 
 
 I had never tried to excite either of these two points. 
 The other manifestations, which I had previously 
 seen developed, were precisely the same under his 
 manipulations as my own. I made several attempts 
 to excite the organ of benevolence, but without effect, 
 until one day I accidentally placed my finger so low 
 as 1 should have considered to be the middle of com- 
 parison, as marked on the busts, when she instantly 
 evinced the emotion in the most active manner, 
 saying, " poor creature, poor creature," and not con- 
 tent, as many are, with mere words of compassion, 
 she anxiously presented us with all the money in 
 her pocket. I should not omit to add, that this 
 patient is quite wwconscious of all she or others do 
 or say whilst in this state, and did not know the 
 location of a single organ. 
 
 It would only be an unnecessary waste of time to 
 detail at length all the cases I have had since of 
 similar manifestations, varying in degree according 
 to the original constitution and habit of mind of 
 each patient. This variety is the most striking proof 
 of the reality of the phenomena. There are some 
 patients who have a sort of indistinct recollection of 
 what had passed, as if it had been a dream ; two in 
 particular, who observed they had an indistinct notion 
 of what they were doing, but felt irresistibly im- 
 pelled, as it were, to do certain things, even whilst 
 they thought complying with the predominant in- 
 clination would make them very ridiculous. This, I 
 presume, referred to imitation and comicality, and 
 such like humorous faculties, which they displayed in 
 a very remarkable degree. These patients are highly 
 respectable and intelligent, and manifested the phe-
 
 116 EXPERIMENTS. 
 
 nomena quite as prominently" as the patient last 
 named, that of veneration and hope, also filial affec- 
 tion, in a manner baffling description. Each knew 
 only one phrenological organ. 
 
 That I might be the better certified that all was 
 reality, I also got a relation of my own to submit to 
 the operation, and it was quite conclusive. She has 
 a slight recollection of some things which were said 
 and done, but of others seems quite oblivious. 
 
 I had also the opportunity of verifying the truth- 
 fulness of these various and interesting phenomena 
 through the kindness of Mrs Col. , who sub- 
 mitted to be operated on by me in presence of her 
 husband, as also the Major ; the Captain and Surgeon 
 of the regiment ; a high dignitary of the church, and 
 who is also an eminently scientific gentleman ; Mr 
 Gardom, surgeon, and other professional gentlemen ; 
 Mr Aspinal Turner, and a number of others, both 
 ladies and gentlemen. In about three minutes after 
 she was asleep, I placed two fingers over the point 
 named veneration, instantly the aspect of her coun- 
 tenance changed ; in a little she slowly, and solemnly, 
 and majestically arose from her chair, advanced to- 
 wards the table in the middle of the room, and softly 
 sank on her knees, and exhibited such a picture of 
 devout adoration as can never be forgotten by any 
 who had the gratification to witness it. She was 
 tested with a number of other faculties, when the 
 corresponding manifestations were equally striking 
 and characteristic. When awakened, this lady was 
 quite unconscious of all which had happened. 
 
 Here, then, we have the testimony of a lady of the 
 highest respectability and intelligence, and energy of
 
 EXPERIMENTS. 117 
 
 mind, corroborating, both in word and action, and 
 look, the reality of the phenomena as exhibited by 
 others, and that in the presence of most respectable 
 and intelligent witnesses, who can bear testimony 
 that there was nothing said or done to direct her in 
 the important manifestations. This lady had been 
 hypnotized by me once before, for a few minutes, at 
 a private conversazione the week before, when she 
 sat down fully convinced she could NOT be affected, 
 but was soon made to acknowledge the power of 
 hypnotism, and now she was a valuable evidence to 
 the more novel investigation as to how far phreno- 
 logical manifestations could be developed during hyp- 
 notism.* I have now realized these phenomena very 
 prominently in forty-five patients, most of whom, 
 I am quite certain, knew nothing of phrenology, 
 some of them not even what the word meant ; and 
 the smallness of the points to which the contact 
 must be made to elicit the manifestations correctly, 
 especially the subdivisions by Mr Hall, is such as to 
 
 * A report having been circulated, no doubt with the view 
 of neutralizing the interest attaching to the case, that this 
 lady was a phrenologist, I called to inquire whether there 
 was any ground for such a report. Mrs S. herself assured 
 me it was quite erroneous, for it was a subject she had never 
 paid any attention to, and one she was quite ignorant of. 
 Wishing to be very circumstantially correct in the statement, 
 she added, " I have understood the organ of music is some- 
 where about the forehead ;" when requested to place her 
 finger on the organ, she was quite wrong, so that she did not 
 know a single organ. I mentioned this circumstance, in her 
 presence, at another conversazione, when she most distinctly 
 declared the facts here recorded, to be strictly correct.
 
 118 MR HALL'S LECTURES. 
 
 render collusion most improbable^ I was also care- 
 ful to avoid prompting, by putting leading questions. 
 I have also succeeded partially with others ; and 
 several of my friends have also been successful with 
 a few other cases. 
 
 I attended Mr Hall's public lectures, and the 
 very first experiment he tried, February 24, 1843, 
 convinced me, that the reason why I had not 
 sooner obtained the manifestations more generally 
 was, because I had allowed my patients to pass into 
 the supersentient state before testing them. I was 
 aware of the difference in the state of the circulation 
 through the brain in the state in which my patients 
 were, and what it must be in the state in which his 
 were during his operations, and conjectured, that by 
 trying my patients in that condition, I might get mani- 
 festations which I had failed to do at former trials ; 
 and the very first cases I tried proved this conjecture 
 to be correct. For example, No. II. already referred 
 to, exhibited a number of additional phenomena 
 beautifully ; and Cases IV. and V. in like manner, 
 came out beautifulh r . From this single observation 
 on Mr Hall's mode, or rather time, of operating, I 
 have been enabled to arrive at a mode of operating 
 which, I believe, by putting patients into the hypno- 
 tic condition my own way, there will be no great 
 difficulty in manifesting some of the phenomena in 
 most cases. There are some patients, however, who 
 will evince them much more prominently than 
 others, and the power of habit seems evident in 
 most, being more readily operated on after a few 
 trials. Some, however, seem as perfect as possible at 
 the first trial.
 
 ILLUSTRATIVE CASE FROM ABERCROMBIE. 119 
 
 I have tried several private friends, on whose in- 
 telligence, honour, and integrity, I could rely, and 
 also children, and have found the evidence so satis- 
 factory, that I am quite certain as to the reality of 
 the phenomena ; but as to my theoretical views, I 
 wish them to be considered as mere conjectures, 
 thrown out for the purpose of exciting others to 
 think, and investigate this curious and most inte- 
 resting and important subject. 
 
 I shall conclude this article by calling the attention 
 of my readers to the coincidence which appears to 
 subsist betwixt the phenomena now referred to, and 
 the mode of exciting dreaming, in some patients, by 
 whispering in their ears. I shall illustrate that by 
 reference to a case recorded in one of Dr Aber- 
 crombie's valuable works, on the authority of the 
 late Dr Gregory. It is that of the case of an 
 officer in the expedition to Louisburgh in 1758. His 
 brother officers were in the habit of amusing them- 
 selves at his expense. They could produce any kind 
 of dream they chose, especially if done by one with 
 whose voice he was familiar. Thus, at one time, 
 they conducted him through the whole process of a 
 quarrel, ending in a duel ; and when it was supposed 
 the parties met, a pistol was put in his hand, which 
 he fired, and was awakened by its report. On another 
 occasion, being asleep on the locker of the cabin, he 
 was made to believe that he had fallen overboard, 
 and was told to save himself by swimming. He 
 imitated the art of swimming, when they told him 
 to dive for his life, as a shark was pursuing him, 
 which he attempted so energetically, that he threw 
 himself from the locker, by which he bruised himself
 
 120 BENEFIT OF LOCAL TREATMENT 
 
 severely. Again, after the landing of the army, he 
 was found one day asleep in his tent, and apparently 
 much annoyed with the noise of the cannonading 
 then going on briskly. He was made to believe he 
 was engaged with the enemy, when he expressed 
 much fear, and betrayed a wish to run away. They 
 remonstrated against this act of cowardice, whilst 
 they increased his alarm by imitating the groans of 
 the wounded ; and when he inquired who was killed, 
 which he often did, they named his particular friends. 
 At last he was told that the man next him in the 
 line had fallen, when he instantly sprang from his 
 bed, rushed out of the tent, and was aroused from his 
 sleep, and relieved from his fears, by falling over the 
 teut ropes. It is added, that after these experiments, 
 he had no distinct recollection of his dreams, but 
 only a confused feeling of oppression or fatigue ; and 
 used to say to his friends, that he was sure they had 
 been playing him some tricks. 
 
 I shall add one illustration as to the probability of 
 benefit accruing to society from this subject being 
 prosecuted with zeal and due consideration. A highly 
 scientific friend, who had honoured me with his pre- 
 sence at a private conversazione, called two days 
 thereafter, and stated, that from reflecting on what 1 
 had said and exhibited the day before as to the mode 
 of exciting certain points or functions of the brain 
 through acting on certain points of the scalp and 
 face, it appeared to him most reasonable to expect, 
 that by applying treatment to such points, we might 
 most readily afford relief to disorder of the correspond- 
 ing internal organs. I told him I was so thoroughly 
 convinced of that, as to have been induced to act
 
 IN A CASE OF INSANITY. 121 
 
 accordingly ; and that the daybefore I had been visiting 
 an insane patient, who entertained the horrible idea, 
 that she imist murder every body she knew, and then 
 murder herself also ; that on placing my hand upon 
 the organs of combati veil ess and destructiveness, in a 
 few seconds, she gave a violent shudder, and seemed 
 greatly excited, and becoming perfectly furious. On 
 examining these parts, I found the integuments quite 
 red. I ordered leeches, and cold lotion afterwards, 
 but next day she remained equally violent, and the 
 pulse between 140 and 150, which it had been for 
 some time, notwithstanding medicines had been 
 given to depress it. I now made an incision an inch 
 and a half long through the integuments, and down 
 to the bone, and in twelve hours after found her 
 much calmer, and the pulse down to 100, and it 
 remained there for several days. There was no such 
 loss of blood as could have acted constitutionally on 
 the heart directly by the quantity effused. On again 
 rising, Belladonna plasters were applied these not 
 having the desired effect, recourse was again had to 
 scarification behind both ears, and with great success, 
 as in a few days she was so calm as not to require the 
 strait jacket, and for two months has been sullen but 
 harmless. 
 
 At another conversazione, the same gentleman 
 requested me to excite philoprogenitiveness, which 
 I did, and he then asked me to combine destruc- 
 tiveness along with it. I told him the faculty 
 would not be developed, because the organ was 
 so small in this patient as to make her always 
 imagine some one was quarrelling with her. Still he 
 wished me to try, which 1 did, and the result was
 
 122 OPINIONS OF SUNDERLAND AND HALL. 
 
 that she immediately seemed distressed about some 
 one being angry with the children. Two days after I 
 was informed that the object of the request was to 
 prove that such would be the case, as he had whispered 
 to a professional gentleman present, before the answer 
 was elicited, and no one else in the room knew this 
 remark. Two days after, on a slip of paper handed 
 to me by the same gentleman, he had noted, that if 
 I would excite the same organs in another patient, 
 whose destrncti ven ess was more prominent, I would 
 find she would be angry with the children, and wish 
 to punish or send them away, and assuredly it proved 
 so. He also added, that this is the combination of 
 morbid excitement which he conjectured, and I think 
 with great justice, is the cause of parents murdering 
 their own children during a fit of insanity. An 
 example of more acute, beautiful, and successful 
 induction than this could scarcely be conceived pos- 
 sible ; and it is highly gratifying to know that the 
 opinions of a gentleman of such talents and attain- 
 ments coincides so much with my general views on 
 this subject. 
 
 The doctrine propounded by the Rev. La Roy Sun- 
 derland, and Mr Spencer T. Hall, and others, seems 
 to be this, that there is a separate organ in the brain 
 for every mental faculty, emotion, propensity, desire, 
 and action, mental or corporeal ; that every positive 
 organ has also its negative organ proximate ; and that 
 by certain manipulations during the mesmeric state, 
 these organs may be stimulated into activity singly or 
 combined, and thus caused to manifest the correspon- 
 ding faculty by thought, word, and action. They do not 
 deny the correctness of the outlines as given by former
 
 DIFFERENT ARRANGEMENT ADVOCATED. 123 
 
 phrenologists ; on the contrary, they bear positive tes- 
 timony to their general correctness. However, they 
 subdivide each of the former faculties, which we may 
 designate the pure faculties, into groups of distinct 
 organs, for the specific manifestation of special faculties, 
 the tendencies to which were naturally included in 
 the simple or primitive general organ ; and they 
 allege they can thus give such a special or character- 
 istic direction to the feeling as to entitle it to be con- 
 sidered as the manifestation of a distinct organ or 
 faculty. 
 
 It occurs to me, that this might be much simplified, 
 by considering, that on the central point of the general 
 organ, we stimulate fasciculi of nerves connected with 
 a general manifestation, for example, benevolence ; 
 but that, as we approach the surrounding organs, we 
 partially excite proximate faculties, from some of their 
 corresponding peripheral sentient nerves co-mingling 
 with those of the other faculty, and thus engender 
 a mixed manifestation ; just as we find the intercourse 
 between neighbouring countries modifies the national 
 character which peculiarly belongs to each nation. 
 Thus, in one direction, benevolence (by which I illus- 
 trate my position) will be blended with comparison, 
 or excited through the influence of association respect- 
 ing some one we have known, or from supposing 
 what might be our feelings were we placed in such 
 and such circumstances ; in another direction, it will 
 be influenced more or less by the tendency to imitate 
 the benevolent acts of others, and, as we approach 
 veneration, it will partake more of a religious and 
 moral obligation in reference to the Deity. If I am 
 right in this conjecture, of course there will be every
 
 124 SUPPOSED CAUSE OF " CROSS-MAGNETIZING." 
 
 possible shade of manifestation as we approach nearer 
 to the adjoining organ. I am not acquainted with 
 the mapping of the head either by La Roy Sunderland 
 or Mr Hall ; but, if the original compartments are to 
 be so divided and subdivided, according to the mere 
 varieties of manifestation during the hypnotic state, 
 I feel assured, that each of their subdivisions may 
 be again divided, as a shade of difference will be 
 manifested by every possible change in the point of 
 contact. 
 
 I had much pleasure in witnessing Mr Hall's ex- 
 periments, and bore public testimony to the reality of 
 the general phenomena. This I could have done 
 from the mere circumstance of carefully watching the 
 peculiar expression of countenance, and state of the 
 respiration, induced by every move' of the point of 
 contact. The shades of difference were so minute that 
 collusion was all but impossible. Moreover, I had per- 
 sonal experience of the reality of the leading pheno- 
 mena in a number of my own patients, with parties 
 who knew nothing of phrenology, and whose respec- 
 tability and known character placed them above the 
 possibility of being suspected as acting a part, either 
 for the purpose of gratifying or deceiving others. 
 Whilst I readily bear testimony to the reality of the 
 phenomena, and that I saw nothing in Mr Hall to 
 lead me to suppose he wished to deceive any one, it is 
 due to the cause of truth for me to state, that the 
 varieties which I observed in his phenomena and 
 those occurring in my own patients, I consider were 
 the mere results of the different manipulations used, 
 and not of any such special influence as he and other 
 .uiiinal magnetizers allege.
 
 PATIENTS RESTORED BY SMELL AND TOUCH. 125 
 
 In reference to the phenomena which were desig- 
 nated " cross-magneti/ing," and which appeared most 
 distressing to the patients, as well as to the operator, 
 (fortunately no such effects have ever occurred in my 
 patients,) I think they may be explained thus : it 
 seems probable, part may be the result of imagina- 
 tion, or an accidental circumstance exciting the 
 opposing classes of muscles into action at the same 
 time. This may also be caused by exciting two 
 antagonist emotions, such as one requiring the ener- 
 getic action of the muscles of inspiration, and the 
 other the muscles of expiration, the consequence of 
 which is, very speedily to throw the patient into a 
 state of partial asphyxia ; and the result must be, a 
 great difficulty in restoring the patient from the 
 deleterious influence of insufficiently decarbonised 
 blood circulating through the brain. Such I consider 
 was the case with the patient I saw create so much 
 trouble to Mr Hall on the evening of the 24th 
 February, 1843, in the lecture-room of the Athenaeum, 
 Manchester. 
 
 Having heard Mr Hall state, that patients who had 
 stolen any thing would always seek out the persons 
 from whom it had been taken, and restore it to them 
 after conscientiousness was excited, and that they 
 would find out the rightful owner whatever part of 
 the room he had removed to, I was curious to prove 
 this. My first object was to ascertain whether it 
 was a fact, which I very soon did with my own 
 patients, and my next object was to ascertain by what 
 means they accomplished this, and I readily determined 
 it was by smell and touch. The first thing they did, on 
 rousing conscientiousness, was to look thoughtful,
 
 126 POWER OF HEARING FAINT SOUNDS. 
 
 then they began sniffing, ami traced out the parties 
 robbed, and restored it to them. When asked, what 
 are you doing? the answer was, " I am giving back 
 something which I hail stolen." On being asked, how 
 do you know the person ? (having gone to the opposite 
 side of the room,) the answer was, " I smell them, 
 or him." Every time the experiment was tried, the 
 result was the same, and the answer the same, as 
 was obvious to every one in the room. Another 
 patient did the same when the sense of smell was acute, 
 but when I tried the experiment with the sense of 
 smell dulled, the stolen article was merely laid down, 
 without giving it to the proper person. There was 
 thus both positive and negative proof of exalted 
 smell being the cause of them restoring to the proper 
 part}' ; and feeling directs as to place. I have found 
 this done with the same promptitude and certainty 
 when six, eight, or twelve faculties had been roused 
 and manifested before conscientiousness was excited. 
 I have found this the same in all I have tried, only 
 some will throw the articles down as if horror- 
 struck. 
 
 The movement of the jaws also, and various other 
 movements in imitation of the operator, I have 
 ascertained arise from their remarkable power of 
 hearing extremely faint sounds, and the most curious 
 point is this, that they seem to have the power of 
 discerning such faint sounds, when they seem not to 
 be affected by very loud sounds. It is also the same 
 with feeling. They will in some states be insensible 
 to pricking, pinching, or maiming, but so highly 
 sensible to a breath of air, or the tickling of a feather, 
 that they may be instantly roused by the latter
 
 PRECAUTIONS ADOPTED. 127 
 
 means, when the former would have no such influ- 
 ence. Probably this is the cause of the remarkable 
 effects of a current of air, its rousing cutaneous sensi- 
 bility, directing the nervous influence to the skin, 
 and withdrawing it from rigid muscles, thus reducing 
 the cataleptiform state, and permitting the blood 
 and vis nervosa to flow in their usual manner. The 
 latter change being induced gradually, may probably 
 be the cause of the feeling which is described as that 
 of needles and pins running into the extremities, and 
 producing twitching, when gently pressing on the 
 extremity with the finger, &c. as already noticed. 
 
 In concluding this chapter, I am well aware the 
 statements it contains must appear startling, and 
 almost beyond belief, to many of my readers. Some 
 may be disposed to think I have been deceived ; and 
 because many of the manifestations might be simu- 
 lated, I know it has been alleged, that the patients of 
 those who have been exhibited publicly, were either 
 deceiving the operator, or that both patients and 
 operators were engaged in a shameful system of 
 collusion. In respect to my own patients, I have 
 endeavoured to take every possible precaution that 
 they should not deceive me, and with this view have 
 invited the most sceptical persons I know, both in 
 the profession and out of it, to have it rigorously 
 tested, and the result has been my entire conviction 
 as to the reality of the phenomena in my own 
 patients, and I am ready to believe others to be as 
 candid as myself. Because much might be simulated, 
 and parties have been avowedly trained and exhibited 
 to prove the dexterity of teachers and pupils in a 
 system of avowed collusion, that it might thereby be
 
 128 LEGITIMATE INFERENCES AND INQtyRY. 
 
 inferred the patients exhibited by other lecturers 
 were impostors, is a most illogical mode of deciding 
 such a question. There ought to be positive proof of 
 the justice of such imputation, before so assailing 
 any one, when there is so much proof to the con- 
 trary, as has been furnished by the concurrent 
 testimony of so many experimenters who have met 
 with such susceptible subjects. Surely it would not 
 be fair to infer, that because some are trained as 
 dexterous thieves, there can, therefore, be no such 
 thing as an honest man in the world ? 
 
 The question to be decided here is not what 
 patients can be trained to do in violation to nature's 
 laws ; that is, by giving them some stronger motive 
 of action, by artificial means, than the impulse arising 
 from natural feeling. What might be achieved in this 
 way I know not, as I have not tried such experiments 
 connected with this branch of the subject. It is well 
 known, however, that so long ago as December, 1841, 
 I particularly pointed out the remarkable docility of 
 patients during Hypnotism, which made them most 
 anxious to comply with every proper request or sup- 
 posed wish of others. I have, therefore, no more 
 doubt that they might be trained to manifest, during 
 Hypnotism, opposite tendencies, in accordance with 
 conventional arrangements, than that during their 
 waking moments they could be taught to do so, and 
 thus call black white and white black, night day and 
 day night, and such like, in respect to every custom, 
 word, or action. The proper question to be deter- 
 mined seems to me to be this, Can the passions, 
 and emotions, and intellectual faculties, be excited 
 during Hypnotism simply by contact or friction over
 
 EXPERIMENTS. 129 
 
 certain sympathetic points of the head and face, with- 
 out previous knowledge of phrenology, training, or 
 whispering, or such leading questions as must natu- 
 rally excite in the mind such passions, emotions, or 
 mental and bodily manifestations? My own expe- 
 rience warrants me to answer in the affirmative, and 
 I shall give a few additional cases in illustration of 
 the data from which I have come to this conclusion. 
 
 Two patients, healthy, strong servant girls, en- 
 tirely ignorant of phrenology, neither of whom had 
 ever seen an experiment, and one was so sceptical, 
 as to wish to try and convince me she could not be 
 hypnotized at all, were operated on separately. At 
 first trial, I succeeded in hypnotizing both, and in de- 
 veloping a great number of the leading organs, such 
 as the desire to eat, benevolence, friendship, pity, at- 
 tachment, self-esteem, love of approbation, imitation, 
 (when they readily spoke five languages correctly,) 
 stealing under acquisitiveness, and under conscien- 
 tiousness restored to the proper person and place what 
 was stolen ; eventuality most remarkable ; this was 
 tried twice or thrice in each, when they could tell 
 correctly the events of the previous day while the 
 organ was excited, whereas they could not tell a single 
 circumstance before it was stimulated ; and a number 
 of others, such as forms, figures, and colours, by excit- 
 ing the corresponding points. These experiments 
 were tried before several friends, who were astonished 
 with the result, several of the most remarkable mani- 
 festations being evinced without a single word being 
 spoken by any one. They were not tried at the same 
 time, and neither saw nor knew of the other. 
 i
 
 ] 30 EXPERIMENTS. 
 
 Mr T., a gentleman of 45 years of age, who was 
 ignorant of phrenology, and had never seen a phreno- 
 hypnotic experiment, was hypnotized without expec- 
 ting any experiment of the kind to be tried. On 
 touching " benevolence" the manifestation was so 
 powerful as to compel me quickly to desist ; " self- 
 esteem," very decided ; " ideality," very decided, com- 
 1'ined with "tune and language," he sang when the 
 hitter were pressed on, but instantly stopped when 
 the pressure was removed, and resumed as readily on 
 renewing the contact, exactly at the same note and 
 v:ord where he left off. Also the usual spectra when 
 t he region of the orbit was pressed on. When aroused, 
 he was quite unconscious of all which had happened. 
 He has been tried three times, with the same results, 
 only that additional manifestations came out. His 
 friends, who were present, can testify he had no signal 
 given to lead him to do so. His wife, also, who had 
 never seen any thing of the kind before, was operated 
 on, when a great many manifestations came out most 
 decidedly. Their daughter, who had seen nothing of 
 tliis, was now called into the room, and operated on, 
 and exhibited a great many manifestations, and all 
 this by the mere effect of pressure and gentle friction 
 on the integuments. None of the three remembered 
 any thing of what had happened. 
 
 W. T. a boy, had been magnetized, and exhibited a 
 t \v manifestations. He was again tried in public, 
 bat without success. I was requested to try him, 
 wluMi a number of manifestations came out at once 
 l-eautifully under benevolence, he took off his coat 
 to give to some distressed person, and after a number 
 of other manifestations had been educed, on being
 
 EXPERIMENTS. 131 
 
 awakened he seemed very much surprised to find his 
 coat off. 
 
 John W., 22 years of age, had been magnetized 
 publicly, with the hope of eliciting the phreno- 
 logical manifestations, but he became so stolid that 
 it was quite a failure. I was afterwards requested 
 to try him, in my way, in the presence of a number 
 of gentlemen, when I at once succeeded in exciting 
 several ; pity was so characteristic, that there could 
 be no difficulty or doubt on the subject, as it was not 
 only exhibited by his features and sobbing, but by 
 the tears which ran over his face in torrents. On 
 trying to excite imitation, on the right side, no effect 
 was produced, which I suspected to be the result of 
 an injury he had sustained, which had destroyed the 
 integuments, and also caused exfoliation of the outer 
 table of the skull. I therefore tried in the opposite 
 side of the cranium, when the faculty was manifested 
 beautifully. This seems a good corroboration of my 
 theory, that it arises from the peculiar condition of 
 the nerves of the scalp. On farther trials many more 
 came out without any cause beyond the simple 
 excitation of the integuments by pressure and friction. 
 Not only may such general manifestations be thus 
 excited, but, what is far more curious, by exciting 
 antagonist points in the opposite hemispheres of the 
 brain, the patients may be made to exhibit corres- 
 pondingly opposite feelings in the different sides of 
 the body. If the antagonist faculties are excited on 
 the same side, there will be exhibited only the stronger 
 of the two. These " opposite influences on the two 
 sides," as Dr Elliotson has well remarked, " are the 
 most astonishing and beautiful experiments that all
 
 132 EXPERIMENTS. 
 
 physiology affords ;" and are also the most beautiful 
 examples of the correctness of Mr Mayo's fifteenth 
 aphorism, at page 28 of his Nervous System and its 
 Functions, where he says, " Each lateral half of a 
 vertebral animal is separately vitalized. Or the pre- 
 servation of consciousness in one half is independent 
 of its preservation in the other." It is true that 
 vivisections have proved this, but neither so beauti- 
 fully nor humanely as in the experiments I now 
 refer to, and those already recorded at page 63 of this 
 treatise. Miss S., a lady who had never seen a 
 phreno-hypnotic experiment, and knew nothing of 
 phrenology, exhibited at first trial a great number of 
 the leading manifestations, and at a second and third, 
 'these opposite ones in a remarkable manner. Under 
 friendship and adhesiveness, she embraced a female 
 friend in the most affectionate manner, and on 
 destructiveness being excited on the opposite side of the 
 head, she rushed forward with great impetuosity to 
 repel some imaginary adversary, whilst, with her 
 other arm and hand, she contrived to shield her 
 friend. Had I not laid hold of her, she would most 
 certainly have rushed through the window. On 
 being roused she was quite oblivious of all she had 
 done. Mrs C. another equally ignorant of the sub- 
 ject, displayed the same phenomena. The effect of 
 music in exciting to ecstasy, elegance of movement, 
 and graceful dancing, was most remarkable. Reniem- 
 
 licred nothing. Miss , entirely ignorant of the 
 
 subject, and had never seen an experiment of the 
 kind, and expected only to be attempted to be hypno- 
 tized, but whilst she wished to be tried, she had 
 expressed to the friend who introduced her, that she
 
 EXPERIMENTS. 133 
 
 could not be made to sleep. She exhibited veneration 
 solemnly, with hope, glowing devotion, and with 
 ideality and language, overwhelming ecstasy, expres- 
 sing her happiness and prospect of entering into 
 heaven ; " self-esteem," the most conceited prude ; 
 " firmness" most decided ; " adhesiveness and friend- 
 ship," and this in one side, and " combativeness and 
 destructiveness" on the other at pleasure ; " imitation" 
 in perfection, speaking correctly every language tried, 
 " benevolence" extremely marked, to the effusion of 
 tears; "acquisitiveness, conscientiousness, eventuality, 
 the desire to eat, to smell, spectra," &c. &c. She was 
 quite unconscious of all that had happened, and the 
 friend who brought her to me knows she had no 
 prompting. She has been tried once since with the 
 same results. 
 
 Some parties, who were excellent critics, after 
 seeing the latter and two others operated on, and 
 expressing their utter astonishment with the accurate 
 and natural manner in which every passion and 
 emotion was manifested, expressed a strong desire to 
 see some one operated on for the first time. I offered 
 to operate on any of three young ladies whom they 
 had introduced to me that afternoon, and whom I had 
 not known previously ; indeed, one was a stranger in 
 town, from the south of England, who knew nothing 
 of hypnotism or phrenology, and had no faith in 
 either, notwithstanding what she had just seen. She, 
 Miss S., sat down an entire sceptic, but in a few 
 minutes she was not only most decidedly hypnotized, 
 but also one of the most beautiful and decided 
 examples which could possibly have been met with of 
 the phrenological sway during hypnotism, simply by
 
 134 EXPERIMENTS. 
 
 stimulating the nerves of the scalp and face. The 
 moment " veneration" was touched, her features 
 assumed the peculiar expression of that feeling, the 
 hands were clasped, she sank on her knees in the 
 attitude of the most devout adoration ; combined with 
 " hope," the features were illuminated, and beamed 
 with a feeling of ecstasy, the hands being unclasped 
 and moved about in the utmost delight ; and when 
 " ideality" was added, the ecstasy was so extreme as 
 scarcely to be supportable. On changing the point of 
 contact to " firmness," she instantly arose, and stood 
 with an attitude of defiance ; "self-esteem," flounced 
 about with the utmost self-importance ; the " love of 
 approbation" was painted to the greatest perfection ; 
 " imitation" imitated accurately every thing done or 
 spoken in any language ; " friendship and adhesive- 
 ness," clasped hold of me ; and by stimulating " com- 
 bativeness" on the opposite side of the head, along 
 with the other, she struck out with the arm of the 
 side on which combativeness had been touched, but 
 held me fast, as if to protect me, with the other. 
 1'nder "benevolence," she seemed much affected, and 
 <li>tributed her property to the imaginary distressed 
 objects her fancy had painted ; under " acquisitive- 
 nos" she stole, and under "conscientiousness" she 
 restored ; " tune," the desire for music, and sang 
 beautifully, a waltz being played, she danced with a 
 grace and elegance surpassing all which any of us ever 
 witnessed. Eventuality was also most remarkable; 
 the desire to eat, to smell, was also excited ; also 
 form, figures, colours, &c. ; philoprogenitiveness admi- 
 rable. All this was done at first trial, with an entire 
 >t ranger, and the lady's immediate friends, as well as
 
 EXPERIMENTS. 13.5 
 
 others present, can bear testimony that there was not 
 the slightest prompting either by one or other, and 
 when awakened she was quite unconscious of all 
 which had happened. This lady has been twice 
 operated on since, when all these manifestations, and 
 many others, were exhibited in the most perfect 
 manner, as can be certified by Sir Thomas Arbuthnot, 
 Major Wilbraham, Colonel Weniyss, the Rev. Mr 
 P., and another high dignitary of the church, and 
 the patient's family and friends ; and that when 
 under " number" she wrote down a sum, and under 
 " constructiveness and ideality," she drew a very 
 good sketch of a cottage, putting in doors and win- 
 dows correctly. The uncle of the latter subject 
 was so much astonished and gratified with what he 
 had seen, that he begged I would try one of his 
 daughters. I hypnotized the eldest, and all the 
 manifestations came out quite as decidedly as in her 
 cousin. Under "adhesiveness and friendship," she 
 clasped me, and on stimulating the organ of " com- 
 bativeness" on the opposite side of the head, with the 
 arm of that side she struck two gentlemen (whom she 
 imagined were about to attack me,) in such a manner 
 as nearly laid one on the floor, whilst with the other 
 arm she held me in the most friendly manner. 
 Under " benevolence," she seemed quite overwhelmed 
 with compassion ; " acquisitiveness," stole greedily all 
 she could lay her hands on, which was retained whilst 
 I excited many other manifestations, but the moment 
 my fingers touched " conscientiousness," she threw all 
 she hud stolen on the floor, as if horror-stricken, and 
 burst into a flood of tears ; on being asked, Why do 
 you cry, she said, with the utmost agony, " I have
 
 136 EXPERIMENTS. 
 
 done what was wrong, I have done what was wrong." 
 I now excited " imitation and ideality," and had her 
 laughing and dancing in an instant. On exciting 
 form and ideality, she seemed alarmed, and when 
 asked what she saw, she answered, "The D 1." 
 What colour is he ? " Black." On pressing the eye- 
 brow, and repeating the question, the answer was, 
 *' red," and the whole body instantly became rigid, 
 and the face the most complete picture of horror 
 which could be imagined. " Destructiveness," which 
 is largely developed, being touched, she struck her 
 father such a blow on the chest as nearly laid him on 
 the floor. Had I not endeavoured to restrain her, he 
 must have sustained serious injury. Having now 
 excited veneration, hope, ideality, and language, we 
 had the most striking example inic'igiuable of extreme 
 ecstasy, and on being aroused, she was quite uncon- 
 scious of all that had happened, excepting that she 
 had heard music, and had been dancing. Her philo- 
 progenitiveness was admirable.* 
 
 * There were a dozen present on this occasion, of whom 
 .Mr Vandenhoff was one. Being well known as an accom- 
 plished artist, I requested him to watch all he saw with the 
 most critical attention, and to tell me whether the passions 
 were painted naturally or the contrary. After witnessing the 
 first case with evident delight and surprise, he made the fol- 
 lowing observation," If this is acting, it is the most perfect 
 actimj I hare erer teen. In acting, we aim at being natural, 
 but there is generally some point in which we fail ; but here I 
 ce nature's language in every point." Similar expressions 
 followed, in what was seen in the next two cases, and when 
 In- witnessed the effects on the two ladies, whose cases have 
 just been recorded, he confessed himself so overpowered, as to
 
 EXPERIMENTS. 137 
 
 At a conversazione a few days after, in the pre- 
 sence of Lady S., Sir Thomas Arbutlmot, Colonel 
 Arbuthnot, Major Wilbraham, John Frederick Foster, 
 Esq. Chairman of the Quarter Sessions, D. Maude, 
 Esq. stipendiary magistrate, and many others, both 
 gentlemen and ladies, after exhibiting the phenomena 
 on those who had been previously tested, there was a 
 wish expressed to see some one operated on for the 
 first time. I offered to try any one present, and a lady 
 at length consented, whom I never saw before that 
 day, nor since. She exhibited all the usual pheno- 
 mena very decidedly. Under " acquisitiveness," she 
 stole two handkerchiefs from ladies, and a ring from 
 Mr Foster's finger. After several manifestations had 
 
 be scarcely capable of expressing his feelings of delight and 
 astonishment, but said he should write me on the subject. 
 The following is part of a letter I received from him two days 
 after, " I thank you for your kind invitation to witness a 
 repetition of those experiments which so much delighted me 
 on Saturday last, and with the result of which I was no less 
 gratified than astonished. Never have I seen nature mani- 
 festing herself more distinctly never so beautifully, as in 
 the course of the exhibition on that evening. I believe you 
 know I was a decided sceptic in the mesmeric influence and 
 I was something more in relation to its phrenological sway 
 of which the manifestations while under its mysterious influ- 
 ence, by the two young ladies of my own immediate acquain- 
 tance, who had not, who could not have had, any knowledge of 
 the subject prior to their experience on that evening, have 
 perfectly convinced me by their truthfulness. I may take a 
 farther opportunity to dilate more fully upon this interesting 
 and wonderful discovery, the beneficial results of which can- 
 not yet be appreciated, because we know not to what extent 
 they may be carried out."
 
 138 EXPERIMENTS. 
 
 been exhibited, the moment I touched "conscien- 
 tiousness," she seemed distressed, and set off and 
 searched out the proper parties to whom to restore the 
 respective articles. They had changed places, but she 
 found them out, and gave back the handkerchiefs to 
 their owners, and also put the ring on the very finger 
 of Mr Foster from which she had taken it. She was 
 a strict methodist, who had never danced in her life, 
 and who, if awake, would have considered it a sin to 
 dance. However, under the excitement of suitable 
 music, she cut a very good figure at waltzing. When 
 awakened, she remembered nothing of all which had 
 happened. 
 
 Miss L., a lady of twenty-one years of age, very ac- 
 complished, and with great energy of mind, braved me 
 to try to hypnotize her. She felt assured I could not 
 do so. However, she was very soon under the influ- 
 ence, and gave twenty manifestations in the most 
 decided manner. Under friendship and adhesiveness, 
 and destructiveness on the opposite side, she protected 
 me, and struck her own mother. She knew only one 
 organ, and was inclined to scoff at Hypnotism, and 
 still more so at phreno-hypnotism. Under form and 
 ideality she wrote very nicely, without the use of 
 her eyes, but by no means equal to what she does 
 when awake. When awakened she seemed surprised 
 when told what had happened. She remembered me 
 touching her head, wondered what I was doing it 
 for, said she felt different impulses arise when I was 
 manipulating different parts, but did not know why, 
 nor could she remember what she had done. 
 
 A married lady, Mrs E., and the mother of a 
 family, would not believe any one could be so af-
 
 EXPERIMENTS. 139 
 
 fected. After seeing one patient done, she still felt 
 assured she, at least, could not be so operated on. I 
 desired her to try, and she at once exhibited upwards 
 of twenty manifestations in the most distinct manner, 
 some of them very strikingly. Under benevolence 
 she shed tears, drew out her purse, and gave half-a- 
 crown " to the poor creatures." She also exhibited 
 the opposite tendencies at the same time, as already 
 described. 
 
 Miss R., a young lady of 22 years of age, very 
 well educated, and intelligent, wished to be tried, 
 because she was decidedly sceptical. It so happened 
 that every manifestation tried came out beautifully and 
 prominently, although, when aroused, she admitted she 
 remembered every thing she had done, and added, that 
 she had resisted to the utmost of her power doing any 
 thing, but felt irresistible impulses come over her to act 
 in the way she did, as I touched certain points, but 
 why it was she could not tell. Declared it was not 
 from any association with what ought to be the case, 
 as she was ignorant of the organs, but added, that 
 she first felt a drawing in the muscles of the face, and 
 then the breathing became affected, and with this the 
 peculiar impulse followed. On another occasion, with 
 the eyes bandaged, she had a pencil put in her right 
 hand, when a number of organs were excited, but she 
 showed no evidence of any desire to use the pencil 
 till " constructive!] ess and ideality" were excited. 
 The moment this was done, however, she scrambled 
 till she got some paper, and began drawing, and made 
 a very tolerable profile. When " acquisitiveness" was 
 excited, she stole a ring off Mr Foster's finger, who, 
 while I was exciting various manifestations, left the
 
 ]40 EXPERIMENTS. 
 
 room. The moment I touched " conscientiousness," 
 she set off in search of Mr Foster, walked round the 
 room the very way he went, then left that room, 
 crossed the lobby into the front parlour, and hav- 
 ing made a gyration in this room, she came out 
 and went into a back parlour, where she found Mi- 
 Foster, and put the ring on the very finger from 
 whence she took it. She evidently traced him through 
 the air by smell, as she followed the exact track he 
 had taken, for he had first gone into the front parlour. 
 Had it been by clairvoyance, she of course ought to 
 have gone to him direct, and by the shortest way. 
 Such facts are almost past belief, but here they are as 
 they happened, and there could not have been more 
 competent individuals, than those present, to detect 
 any mistake or deception, namely, Mr Foster, Mr 
 Brandt, and Mr Lloyd, barristers ; Mr Langton, Mr 
 Bagshaw, Mr Schwabe, and many others, both gen- 
 tlemen and ladies. 
 
 Miss W., a very intelligent lady, who knew nothing 
 of phrenology, and had never seen a phreno-hypnotic 
 experiment, was operated on. On " benevolence" being 
 excited, she seemed very distressed, and when asked 
 what she was thinking of, said it was of a poor man 
 who had lost his saw and hammer, that he had no 
 money to purchase others with, and his children were 
 starving. Under " veneration and ideality," wished 
 to die, to go to heaven ; under combativeness, first 
 looked very angry, then jumped up and gave a blow, 
 which upset the candlestick. On " destructiveness" 
 being excited, (after she had exhibited several other 
 organs,) she shook her fist, then started on her feet, 
 looked furious, and sprang across the room, her arm
 
 MOST INTERESTING EXPERIMENT. 141 
 
 at full length, similar to a person fencing, and seized 
 hold of a young lady's hand, and nearly transfixed it 
 with her nails. 
 
 Mr Walker, twenty-two years of age, after passing 
 into the hypnotic state, shewed no symptoms of suscep- 
 tibility for some time, but at length he did so in the 
 most perfect manner ; namely, benevolence, venera- 
 tion, firmness, self-esteem, combativeness, destruc- 
 tiveness, acquisitiveness, caution, conscientiousness, 
 imitation in perfection, pity, benevolence with the 
 one side, and destructiveness on the other, eventuality, 
 smell, form, colours, number, ideality, &c. This 
 gentleman has seen busts and phreno-hypnotic 
 experiments also, but, excepting two or three, would 
 be puzzled to point out any of the organs correctly 
 when awake. He remembered nothing of what had 
 passed. 
 
 Being desirous of ascertaining whether he might 
 not, during hypnotism, remember the organs better 
 than whilst awake, and thus be led to give the mani- 
 festations in the manner he did, I tried the follow- 
 ing experiment. I explained my intentions to the 
 friends who were to be present, but he was entirely 
 ignorant of them. He had never seen or heard of 
 such experiment having been tried. When I con- 
 sidered him in the proper condition, I requested him 
 to place the point of a finger on different organs, but 
 it was remarkable that he was wrong in every instance, 
 even with respect to the few he knew when awake. 
 Another most interesting fact was discovered, that 
 whilst his mind was directed to the organ I had 
 named, the true manifestation of the point touched, 
 came out in every instance. Thus, when requested
 
 142 INTERESTING EXPERIMENTS. 
 
 to point out ideality, he placed the finger over 
 " veneration," and immediately indicated that feel- 
 ing. When asked what he was thinking about? 
 "I did not go to church yesterday." What of 
 that ? " It was wrong." When he accidentally 
 pressed on benevolence, the feeling was manifested ; 
 hrmness in like manner ; self-esteem in a powerful 
 degree. On evincing symptoms of uneasiness, I 
 asked what he was thinking of? he replied, " some- 
 thing hurts my head." The fact was, his arm had 
 become cataleptiform, and the points of the fingers 
 were pressed so strongly against the scalp as to be the 
 cause of complaint, but he had no idea of that. 
 His hand having rested on philoprogenitiveness, he 
 began to hush and rock on his chair as if nursing 
 a baby, his motion became more and more violent 
 till I judged it necessary to put a stop to it, by 
 removing his hand. However, I found his arm and 
 neck had both become so rigid, that they were too 
 firmly fixed to permit of being separated by mechani- 
 cal force, but so soon as this was reduced, by blowing 
 on them, the peculiar manifestation ceased. Everv 
 point pressed on by him shewed the same tendency 
 to excite its peculiar manifestation. I am quite cer- 
 tain this gentleman acted a candid part, and could 
 not be induced to do otherwise by any one. 
 
 Another most interesting fact connected with the 
 latter case, was the circumstance of his having hyp- 
 notized himself, excited the different manifestations 
 as stated ; and on being requested to rub his eyes, he 
 lid so, and thus roused himself from the hypnotic 
 condition. I have tried similar experiments with 
 many other patients, and, with the exception of
 
 INTERESTING EXPERIMENTS. 143 
 
 two, each of whom hit upon one organ, have found 
 none of them could point accurately to the organ 
 named, but in every instance the usual indication of 
 the peculiar organ touched came out. None of these 
 subjects remembered any thing of what had happened. 
 Here, then, we have decided proof, that all the phe- 
 nomena of hypnotizing, exciting the phrenological 
 manifestations, and rousing to the waking condition, 
 may be accomplished by the personal acts of the 
 patient on himself, as the only influence required to 
 excite him to the necessary movement might be con- 
 veyed by an automaton. 
 
 A few days ago, one of these patients, who knows 
 no foreign language, when imitation and tune were 
 excited, followed correctly both the music and words 
 of Italian, French, and German songs, which she 
 never heard till they were played and sung by the 
 wife of a learned barrister, who was also present 
 himself, and who, with the Rev. Mr F. and his lady, 
 can bear testimony to the great accuracy of her per- 
 formance. Such is the power of Hypnotism. 
 
 Besides the twenty-five cases here briefly recorded, 
 I have had many more exhibiting the phenomena 
 in the same decided manner, simply by exciting the 
 sympathetic points by contact. ' If I am to believe the 
 evidence of my senses, therefore, in any thing, I cannot 
 see how I can doubt the relation which subsists be- 
 tween certain points of the cranium, and the mental 
 manifestations, which are excited by acting on them 
 during Hypnotism. I believe there are very few 
 physiological phenomena which can be more clearly 
 demonstrated, especially at such an early stage of 
 their investigation. Were it not that I consider it
 
 144 MR EBBAGE'S SUCCESS. 
 
 would only be an unnecessary waste of time to pro- 
 secute the investigation farther, after the number of 
 most unequivocal cases which have been met. with by 
 myself, as well as by other experimentalists here and 
 elsewhere, I feel convinced I might soon increase the 
 number of my own cases to any extent I chose. 
 
 With all intelligent and honest experimentalists I 
 anticipate similar results to what happened with Mr 
 Ebbage, an intelligent surgeon at Leamington. He 
 had been a determined sceptic, and had much annoyed 
 several of our mutual friends by his strong expres- 
 sions to that effect. However, whilst on a visit at 
 Manchester lately, at our first interview, I made a 
 convert of him by offering to exhibit the phenomena 
 in his own wife, who had never been so operated on, 
 or even tried the experiment. She soon became 
 decidedly hypnotized, and also exhibited several phre- 
 nological manifestations most distinctly. A servant 
 of the family was now called into the room, who had 
 seen no operation of the kind, and did not know what 
 was to be done. She also became decidedly hypno- 
 tized, and exhibited several phrenological manifesta- 
 tions most distinctly. Mr E. now admitted that 
 rational scepticism could not resist such conclusive 
 evidence ; and having seen another case or two at my 
 house, of remarkably susceptible subjects, with in- 
 structions from me how to operate, he promised to 
 prosecute the inquiry on his return home. 
 
 In a letter to me, dated 1st May, 1843, he writes 
 that he had tried the experiments with several ; that 
 in some ho was unsuccessful, while " in others a per- 
 fect state of sleep and unconsciousness was produced 
 at different periods, varying from two to ten minutes.
 
 MODE OF OPERATING. 145 
 
 In the case of one lady, who had never seen any thing 
 of the kind before, and, I may add, had not even 
 heard it spoken of as connected with any phrenolo- 
 gical developments, the most marked effects were soon 
 produced, resembling very strongly the case you 
 shewed me when I was at your house." He farther 
 adds the following judicious remarks: "I must 
 say the peculiar development shewn by the influence 
 of this sleep, if closely and scrutinizingly watched, 
 must open to the mind of any thinking man a wide 
 expanse for speculation as to the truly mysterious 
 means by which the effects of sensation and emotion 
 can be produced." 
 
 The above is a good illustration of what may be 
 done, even by a determined but honest sceptic. Mr 
 E. had only two interviews with me ; and if any oce 
 should be less successful in his attempts, it behoves 
 him to inquire whether his failures are not to be 
 attributed to his unskilful or uncandid performance 
 of the experiments, rather than to inefficiency of the 
 method recommended. 
 
 As to those who will not believe the testimony of 
 others without seeing the experiments tried before 
 themselves, on fresh patients, I beg to remark, thut 
 the best plan is for them to try patients fairly them- 
 selves, and they must soon be convinced ; only they 
 must be careful to take them at the proper time, other- 
 wise they may fail as I did myself at first. 
 
 The following is the mode of operating : Put the- 
 patient into the hypnotic condition in the usual way, 
 extend his arms for a minute or two, then replace- 
 them gently on his lap, and allow him to remain per- 
 fectly quiet for a few minutes. Let the points of one
 
 146 MODE OF OPERATING. 
 
 or two fingers be now placed on the central point of 
 any of his best developed organs, and press it very 
 gently ; if no change of countenance or bodily move- 
 ment is 'evinced, use gentle friction, and then in a soft 
 voice ask what he is thinking of, what he would like, 
 or wish to do, or what he sees, as the function of the 
 organ may indicate ; and repeat the questions and the 
 pressure, or contact, or friction, over the organ till an 
 answer is elicited. If very stolid, gentle pressure on 
 the eyeballs may be necessary to induce him to speak. 
 If the skin is too sensitive, he may awake, in which 
 case try again, waiting a little longer ; if too stolid, try 
 again, beginning the manipulations sooner. 
 
 The operations should be tried again and again 
 with the same patient, varying the time of beginning 
 the manipulations, as it is impossible to tell, d priori, 
 the exact moment they should be commenced ; and 
 many of the best cases have only succeeded partially, 
 or not at all, at a first or second trial. When this 
 point has been hit upon, however, there will be little 
 difficulty in getting out additional manifestations, 
 and this will be still more evident at each succeed- 
 ing trial. 
 
 Whispering or talking should be carefully avoided 
 by all present, so as to leave nature to manifest her- 
 self in her own way, influenced only by the stimulus 
 conveyed through the nerves of touch exciting to 
 automatic muscular action. We all know that during 
 common sleep a person unconsciously changes from 
 an uncomfortable position to one which is agreeable. 
 This is a sort of instinctive action, and, as already 
 explained, I think it highly probable, that by thus 
 calling into action muscles which are naturally so
 
 PRESUMED CAUSE OF PHENOMENA. ]47 
 
 exerted in manifesting any given emotion or propen- 
 sity, they may, by reflection, thereby rouse that 
 portion of the brain, the activity of which usually 
 excites the motion. In this case there would be a 
 sort of inversion of the ordinary sequence, what is 
 naturally the consequence becoming the cause of 
 cerebral and mental excitation. The following hypo- 
 thesis will illustrate my meaning. It is easy to ima- 
 gine, that putting a pen or pencil into the hand might 
 excite in the mind the idea of writing or drawing ; 
 or that stimulating the gastrochnemius, which raises 
 us on our toes, might naturally enough suggest to the 
 mind the idea of dancing, without any other sug- 
 gestion to that effect than what arises from the 
 attitude and activity of the muscles naturally and 
 necessarily brought into play whilst exercising such 
 functions. However, I would very much doubt the 
 probability of stimulating the muscles of the leg 
 exciting the idea of writing, or that placing a pen or 
 pencil in the hand would excite the idea of dancing, 
 without previous concert and arrangement to that 
 effect. It is upon the same principle, as I imagine, 
 that, during the dreamy state of hypnotism, by sti- 
 mulating the sterno-mastoid muscle, which causes 
 an inclination of the head, the idea of friendship 
 and shaking of hands is excited in the mind, and 
 when the trapizus is excited at same time, the 
 greater lateral inclination of the head manifests still 
 greater attachment, or " adhesiveness." Philoproge- 
 nitiveness, by calling into action the recti and occipito 
 frontalis muscles, gives the rocking motion, and hence 
 the idea of nursing, &c. ; pressure on the vertex, by 
 calling into action all the muscles requisite to sustain
 
 148 WEBER'S EXPERIMENTS. 
 
 the body in the erect position, excites the idea of 
 unyielding firmness ; veneration and benevolence, 
 from giving the tendency to stoop and suppress the 
 breathing, thus create the corresponding feelings. By 
 exciting the muscles of mastication into action, the 
 idea of eating and drinking is roused, and the s;mii> 
 may arise from pressing between the chin and under 
 lip, which first excites a flow of saliva, and this again 
 the motion of the tongue and jaws, with an inclina- 
 tion to swallow. In like manner, gently pressing the 
 tip of the nose, by exciting inspiration, creates the 
 desire for something to smell at ; if the point of con- 
 tact is the cheek, under the orbits, over the exit of 
 the tn/;-a-orbital branch of the fifth pair, the breathing 
 l>ecomes suppressed, and depressing emotions are 
 excited ; whereas, above the orbit, so as to stimulate 
 the sw/>ra-orbital branch of the fifth pair, generally 
 the reverse manifestations are evinced. 
 
 Those familiar with Professor Weber's experiments, 
 know that each of those points differs from the other 
 in its degree of sensibility. It is remarkable that 
 the point marked " eventuality," (and which I have 
 strong grounds for believing is the chief seat of 
 memory,) is in the centre of the forehead, which i> 
 one of the most sensitive parts of the scalp, and where 
 pressure applied necessarily excites the corresponding 
 points in both hemispheres of the brain at same time. 
 
 There seems, in fact, to be less matter of wonder in 
 this discovery than some lately brought forward in 
 other departments of physical science ; for example, 
 who would have believed, till it was proved, that by 
 looking into a camera-obscura for a few minute?, or 
 <; veil seconds, he might have his likeness accurately
 
 VALUE OF TESTIMONY. 149 
 
 and indelibly transferred to a plate of metal ? or the 
 still more recent discovery of Professor Moser, that 
 such impressions as he referred to could be effected in 
 the dark ? 
 
 I shall conclude this article by a quotation, from 
 Dr Abercrombie, on the value of testimony. He 
 observes, "A very small portion of our knowledge 
 of external things is obtained through our own senses ; 
 by far the greater part is procured through other 
 men, and this is received by us on the evidence of 
 testimony. While an unbounded credulity is the 
 part of a weak mind, which never thinks nor reasons 
 at all, an unlimited scepticism is the part of a con- 
 tracted mind, which reasons upon imperfect data, or 
 makes its own knowledge and extent of observation 
 the standard and test of probability." On the Intel- 
 lectual Powers, pp. 71, 72.
 
 150 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 General resume Many phenomena admit of physical and chemical proof 
 Difficulties of comprehending many phenomena Effects of prejudice 
 in preventing the reception of truth Critique on debate at Medico- 
 Chirurgical Society on Mr Ward's operation State of the circulation 
 Conjectures as to the cause of the cataleptiform condition. 
 
 BEFORE concluding the first part of this treatise, I 
 shall make a short resume of what I consider the points 
 made out by what has been advanced. 1st, That the 
 effect of a continued fixation of the mental and visual 
 eye in the manner, and with the concomitant circum- 
 stances pointed out, is to throw the nervous system 
 into a new condition, accompanied with a state of 
 somnolence, and a tendency, according to the mode of 
 management, of exciting a variety of phenomena, 
 very different from those we obtain either in ordinary 
 sleep, or during the waking condition. 2d, That there 
 is at first a state of high excitement of all the organs 
 of special sense, sight excepted, and a great increase of 
 muscular power ; and that the senses afterwards be- 
 come torpid in a much greater degree than what 
 occurs in natural sleep. 3d, That in this condition 
 we have the power of directing or concentrating
 
 GENERAL RESUME. 151 
 
 nervous energy, raising or depressing it in a remark- 
 able degree, at will, locally or generally. 4th, That 
 in this state, we have the power of exciting or depress- 
 ing the force and frequency of the heart's action, and 
 the state of the circulation, locally or generally, in a 
 surprising degree. 5th, That whilst in this peculiar 
 condition, we have the power of regulating and con- 
 trolling muscular tone and energy in a remarkable 
 manner and degree. 6th, That we also thus acquire 
 a power of producing rapid and important changes in 
 the state of the capillary circulation, and of the whole 
 of the secretions and excretions of the body, as proved 
 by the application of chemical tests. 7th, That this 
 power can be beneficially directed to the cure of a 
 variety of diseases which were most intractable, or 
 altogether incurable, by ordinary treatment. 8th, That 
 this agency may be rendered available in moderating 
 or entirely preventing, the pain incident to patients 
 whilst undergoing surgical operations. 9th, That 
 during hypnotism, by manipulating the cranium and 
 face, we can excite certain mental and bodily mani- 
 festations, according to the parts touched. 
 
 I have obtained analogous results with so many 
 patients, as to make me quite certain of the reality of 
 the phenomena referred to, and to warrant me, as I 
 think, to draw these inferences. Many of the pheno- 
 mena are of such a nature as to admit of physical and 
 chemical proof, in respect to which, the patients can- 
 not possibly deceive us ; and as regards those pheno- 
 mena where they might do so, I have had the assurance 
 of so many patients, on whose veracity I can implicitly 
 rely, proving the same facts, that there remains not
 
 l.2 DIFFICULTIES ATTENDING 
 
 the slightest room for me to doubt the correctness of 
 these statements. I have been equally anxious to 
 avoid being myself misled, as I should be not to mis- 
 load others ; and I would recommend those who have 
 not had an opportunity of watching such phenomena, 
 in the most critical manner, or who have not entered on 
 the investigation with candid minds, to suspend their 
 opinions until they have had such opportunity. I 
 liave no hesitation in saying it is most improbable 
 that any man should form a just estimate in this mat- 
 ter from mere reading or hearsay evidence, and equally 
 -o if he does not approach it with a mind open to 
 honest and fair investigation. The subject itself is so 
 very subtle in its manifestations, so very different 
 from all we are accustomed to meet with in the ordi- 
 nary condition, that, with the utmost candour and 
 openness for receiving the truth, and the whole truth, 
 it will be found extremely perplexing to follow it out 
 in many of its bearings. How then can it be expected 
 anyone should prosecute the inquiry successfully who 
 enters on it with his mind blinded by indomitable 
 prejudice ? * 
 
 * It would perhaps be difficult to adduce a stronger proof 
 of the extent to which prejudice may overcloud the brightest 
 intellects, and render them incompetent to do justice to the 
 Hiibject they would investigate, than that which was presented 
 at a late meeting of the Medico-Chirurgical Society of London, . 
 when a debate took place after the reading of Mr Ward's 
 case of amputation of the leg during mesmeric sleep. As I 
 am not an animal magnetiser, nor personally acquainted with 
 any of the parties referred to, any remarks I am about to 
 make are of course uninfluenced either by pique or prejudice.
 
 THE INQUIRY. 153 
 
 As to the proximate cause of the phenomena, I 
 believe the best plan in the present state of our knoAv- 
 ledge, is to go on accumulating facts, and their appli- 
 
 The operation referred to was said to have taken place in a 
 public hospital ; in the presence of medical, and also non- 
 medical witnesses. The patient is alleged to have exhibited 
 no manifestation of feeling pain, as far as his countenance 
 could be taken as a correct index, and there was no move- 
 ment of the limbs or body ; and after the operation he is said to 
 have declared that he did not feel any pain, but had heard " a 
 grunching," which it has been inferred was the noise of the 
 sawing of the bone ; and it was also admitted he had groaned 
 during the time he was under the operation. 
 
 How was this announcement met ? First, it was questioned 
 whether the man was not a person of little or no feeling at any 
 time, because other patients had been known, whilst wide 
 awake, who were very insensible to pain. But had not the 
 patient, in this case, been declared to have been suffering so 
 much pain from his knee, that he had been unable to sleep, 
 and that his health was so much impaired by his suffering as 
 to render amputation of the leg indispensable ? Nay, had 
 it not been set forth, that the pain of his leg had been greatly 
 diminished, and his sleep restored, and his health greatly 
 improved, after he was mesmerized, preparatory to the opera- 
 tion, which he had consented to undergo whilst in that state ; 
 and yet, that after he had been asleep, and considered in a fit 
 state for being operated on, the mere movement of the joint, 
 whilst drawing him to the edge of the bed, was followed by so 
 much pain as to awake him. Was this any proof of his being 
 a person devoid of feeling ? 
 
 Then it is held, that as he heard, as it is presumed he did, 
 the sawing of the bone, he must have felt the cutting of the ski 
 and soft parts. It is thus assumed that it is impossible for a 
 person to hear, and be in the state not to feel inflictions on the
 
 154 CRITIQUE OX 
 
 cation in the cure of disease, and to theorize at some 
 future period, when we have more ample stores of facts 
 to draw inferences from. From the first I was of 
 
 limb at tame time. It is well known, however, that disease 
 of the trunks of the sentient nerves, or of the spinal cord, may 
 induce such a state, independently of any lesion of the brain. 
 But then, say others, had he not felt when the }>rincifi! n< rr<- 
 vas irritated, the other leg must have been convulsed. This 
 is assuming, that the speakers fully knew etery law which has 
 been known, or ever shall be known of the nervous system, in 
 erery pottible condition, which is rather a bold position to 
 assume, and what few who have studied the subject will be 
 disposed to accord even to the gifted individuals referred to. 
 Others assume the non-expression of feeling was a mere 
 matter of stoicism, and the general inference to be deduced 
 from the whole harangues of these parties is, that the whole 
 was a piece of collusion and deception. Had the parties 
 intended collusion and deception, would they have admitted 
 that the patient heard the sawing of the bone, or groaned or 
 moaned during the operation ? One gentleman, the learned 
 editor of a medical journal, I think, admitted he was bound 
 to believe the testimony of those who had brought the case 
 forward, but frankly avowed, that for his own .part, " he 
 would not have belieted it, although he had seen it himself." 
 When a man has attained to this state of prejudice and incre- 
 dulity, of course it would be idle to adduce to him either 
 experiment or argument. 
 
 I would beg respectfully to ask, Had the mind of any 
 of these gentlemen never entertained the possibility of a 
 patient, long accustomed to severe pain, moaning from 
 habit, whilst free from pain at the moment ; or even 
 feeling pain, and manifesting the same by sensible signs 
 during sleep, and yet being quite unconscious of it when 
 he awoke ! Do we never meet with similar results in conse-
 
 A DEBATE. 155 
 
 opinion, that much of the excitement and many of the 
 phenomena developed, were attributable to the altered 
 state of the circulation in the brain and spinal cord, 
 
 quence of accidents, in the course of disease, or as the effects 
 of over doses of narcotics ? That such is the case during the 
 artificial sleep induced by the methods I have pointed out in 
 this treatise, I am quite certain. I am equally certain that 
 the sensibility to pricking, and pinching, and maiming the 
 rigid limbs, is gone, some time before hearing disappears- 
 Even a piece of paper may be inserted, and retained under 
 the eyelids, without the slightest inconvenience, not even 
 inducing nictitation. In short, I am quite certain that a 
 patient may be sufficiently sensible to hearing to enable him 
 to answer questions, whilst unconscious of pricking, pinching, 
 or strong shocks of galvanism passed through the arms, and 
 that even when roused sufficiently to give expression to 
 feeling such inflictions, if allowed to remain quiet a little 
 afterwards, so as to fall into the profound state again, that he 
 may have lost all recollection of such inflictions when roused 
 and fully awake. 
 
 From the circumstance of the patient having heard, as it 
 is alleged he did, the sawing of the bone, 1 am of opinion the 
 operation was commenced sooner than it should have been ; 
 and I think it very probable that the moaning referred to 
 might have arisen from a slight feeling of pain, but not suffi- 
 cient to arouse the patient, or to impress him sufficiently to 
 enable him to remember it when awake. 
 
 In conclusion, from the numerous opportunities I have 
 enjoyed of witnessing analogous results, in the course of my 
 operations in Neuro-hypnotism, if I may venture to give an 
 opinion in this matter, I have no hesitation in expressing my 
 thorough conviction that Mr Topham, Mr Ward, and the 
 patient, have all spoken and represented the case with the 
 utmost good faith and candour.
 
 156 CONJECTURES AS TO THE CAUSE 
 
 and especially to the greater determination of blood 
 to them, and all other parts not compressed by rigid 
 muscles, arising from the difficulty, during the catalep- 
 tifonn state, of the blood being propelled in due pro- 
 
 To those who wish to stifle investigation, and hold we ought 
 to rest satisfied with the decision of the French Commission, 
 I beg to remark, that a commission of the same learned body 
 was appointed to investigate and to report on Harvey's dis- 
 covery of the circulation of the blood, and that this most 
 important discovery was rejected by them as a fallacy. Did 
 their decision alter the laws of nature, or prevent the ultimate 
 triumph of our immortal countryman ? And when so much 
 in error while investigating the more apparent and demon- 
 strable one of the circulation of the blood, is it not quite as 
 likely that they may have been mistaken in their decision ou 
 the still more abstruse and subtle subject of the laws and 
 distribution of the nervous influence ? 
 
 It is matter of history, in respect to the profession in our 
 own country, that there was not a medical man in England, 
 who had attained forty years of age, who would believe in the 
 truth of Harvey's discovery. Is it to be wondered at, then, 
 that Hypnotism should meet with opposition at the present 
 time? 
 
 To conclude these remarks in respect to this operation: 
 the fact that patients have been known, in some few in- 
 stances, from natural causes which were not understood, to 
 have undergone severe surgical operations without any sense 
 of pain, instead of militating against the truth of the insen- 
 sibility of the patient whose liinb was amputated during the 
 nervous sleep, tends directly to confirm it ; for if such a 
 remarkable state can exist from some accidental circum- 
 stances not understood, there is no reason why a similar con- 
 dition may not be induced by artificial means.
 
 OF CERTAIN PHENOMENA. 157 
 
 portion through the rigid extremities. I have not yet 
 seen occasion to alter this opinion ; but rather to con- 
 clude, that the ganglionic, or organic system of nerves, 
 is also inordinately stimulated from the same cause, 
 and thus having acquired an undue preponderance 
 induces many of the remarkable phenomena which 
 have been referred to. Whoever examines carefully 
 the injected state of the conjunctiva! membrane, and 
 of the capillary circulation in the head, face, and 
 neck, the distended state of the jugular veins, the 
 hard bounding throb of the carotid arteries, and the 
 greatly increased frequency of the pulse, during the 
 rigid condition of the limbs, cannot fail to perceive 
 that there is great determination to the head. Again, 
 when all these symptoms are so speedily changed on 
 reducing the cataleptiform condition of the limbs, 
 how can it be doubted that the rigidity of the limbs, 
 and consequent obstruction to free circulation through 
 them, is the chief cause of the determination to the 
 head and other parts not directly pressed on by rigid 
 muscles ? * 
 
 * In reference to the cataleptiform condition, I beg leave 
 to offer the following remarks merely by icay of conjecture, and 
 with the hope that they may excite others to direct their 
 attention to the investigation. 
 
 Muscular contraction or motion is voluntary or involuntary. 
 The voluntary arises from a mandate of the mind, proceeding 
 from the brain, and effecting contraction or shortening of the 
 muscular fibres ; the involuntary, or reflex, from irritation 
 conveyed to the spinal cord, producing a like result, and may 
 be excited by tickling, pricking, or pinching the skin of the 
 extremities of a decapitated or pithed animal. It appears to
 
 1 58 GENERAL REMARKS. 
 
 In conclusion, I beg leave to remark, that the 
 varieties which are met with as regards suscepti- 
 bility to the hypnotic impression, and the mode and 
 degrees of its action, are only analogous to what we 
 experience in respect to the effects of wine, spirits, 
 opium, the nitrous oxide, and many other agents. 
 
 me, however, that much of the efficiency and tendency to 
 muscular contraction is dependent on another cause, namely, 
 the state of (one or tension of the muscles when considered to 
 be in a state of quiescence ; and this state of tone I consider 
 depends on the ganglionic or organic system of nerves. Sup- 
 posing, from deficiency of this, the muscular system is relaxed, 
 a morbid tendency to reflex action will be induced, as a musi- 
 cal string will be more easily excited to vibrate if moderately 
 tight, than if drawn very tense. It will also render muscular 
 effort less efficient and certain, because part of the muscular 
 contraction, which would have been efficient as available force 
 or motion, will be expended in bringing up the muscular 
 structure to that state which ought to have been its normal 
 fundltion of tension or tone. 
 
 On the other hand, supposing the organic system has been 
 extremely active, and rendered the muscular tone abnormally 
 /;-.<</, it will produce the very reverse effect of that just 
 referred to. It will not only offer resistance to reflex motion, 
 but also to roluntary motion ; and, if carried to a certain ex- 
 tent, may render the parts fixed and rigid, from the ganglionic 
 system overpowering the cerebro-spinal system. 
 
 That this is not mere hypothesis seems to me to be in some 
 degree proved, by the result of operations referred to in my 
 paper in the Edinburgh Medical and Surgical Journal for 
 October, 1841, where muscles which had been rigidly con- 
 tracted, and had lost all power of motion, had motion restored
 
 GENERAL REMARKS. 159 
 
 They are all well known to act differently on diffe- 
 rent individuals, and even on the same individuals at 
 different times, according to the condition of the 
 
 by dividing the tendons, and allowing a new portion to grow 
 between the divided ends, thus elongating the muscles ; and, 
 in other cases, where there was paralysis from relaxation, 
 power.was regained by cutting out a portion of tendon, bringing 
 the divided ends together, and ensuring their adhesion, and 
 thereby shortening the muscles, and giving them artificially 
 that tone or tension, the want of which I considered was the 
 great cause of the continuance of the paralysis. It therefore 
 appears to me, that during the hypnotic state there is a com- 
 plete inversion of the ordinary condition, and that the force 
 of the ganglionic system becomes predominant, instead of 
 being, as in the ordinary condition, only subordinate. 
 
 Another argument in favour of this view is the well known 
 fact, that all voluntary motion, or reflex muscular action, 
 speedily exhausts the powers, and renders the subject unable 
 to continue such efforts, and fatigued in consequence of them. 
 Voluntary effort also is strongest at first, and gradually be- 
 comes weaker. The functions of the organic system of 
 nerves, on the contrary, are more equable and persistent in 
 their nature ; and, although they may be influenced in some 
 degree as to the activity of their functions, by directing atten- 
 tion in a particular manner, as the secretion of saliva by 
 thinking of food, the secretion of milk by the nurse thinking 
 of her child, &c. &c., still they cannot be said to be under 
 voluntary control in the same direct manner and degree as 
 muscular motion. The cataleptifonn state induced by Hyp- 
 notism conies on gradually. For some time voluntary power 
 predominates ; but at length the involuntary rigidity, or 
 organic tonicity gains the ascendency ; and, although per- 
 sisted in for a great length of time, is followed by no exhaus-
 
 160 GENERAL REMARKS. 
 
 system ; but who calls in question the reality of their 
 effects merely because of that want of uniformity of 
 action ? 
 
 tion or fatigue. On the contrary, so far as I have carried 
 the experiments, the whole functions seem to be invigorated 
 by the continuance of this condition.
 
 161 
 
 PART II. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 Modes of operating Objects of operations Cases of sight improved 
 Hearing Deaf and dumb Mr Curtis's remarks James Shelmerdine's 
 case Mr Bingham's testimony S. Taylor Sense of smell Touch and 
 resistance Tic, paralysis of sense and motion, cured Miss E. Atkin- 
 son's case, voice recovered Rheumatism, ten cases Irregular muscular 
 action Headache Spinal Irritation Epilepsy Spinal curvature 
 Neuralgia, and palpitation of the heart Surgical operations without 
 pain Diseases of the skin Locked jaw Tonic spasm Miss Collins 
 Concluding remarks. 
 
 HAVING in the former part so far explained the 
 mode of inducing the phenomena, I now proceed 
 to detail the cases in which I have successfully 
 applied this process in the cure of disease. I shall 
 endeavour to explain my modes of operating in 
 different affections, so as to enable others to apply 
 with advantage in their practice, what I have found 
 so eminently useful in'my own. 
 L
 
 162 MODES OF OPERATING, 
 
 When the artificial state of somnolence has been 
 induced in the manner already pointed out, pp. 27 
 29, the manipulations must be varied according to the 
 peculiar object we have in view. If the force of the 
 circulation in a limb is wished to be diminished, and 
 the sensibility also to be reduced, call the muscles of 
 that member into activity, leaving the other extre- 
 mities limber. On the other hand, if the force of the 
 circulation and sensibility are wished to be increased 
 in a limb, keep it limber, and call the others into 
 activity, by elevating and extending them, and the 
 desired result will follow. If general depression is 
 wan ted, after one or two limbs have been extended for a 
 short time, cautiously reduce them, and leave the whole 
 body limber and quiet. If general excitement of the 
 system is wanted, extend the whole limbs, causing the 
 patient to call the muscles into strong action, and very 
 speedily they will become rigidly fixed, and the force 
 and frequency of the heart's action, and determination 
 to the brain, as evinced by the action of the carotids, 
 distended jugulars, flushed face, and injected eyes, 
 will speedily become apparent. By applying the ear 
 over the region of the heart, it will be apparent that 
 the force and frequency of the heart's action becomes 
 prodigiously increased in a very short time after ex- 
 tending the limbs. It will also be found, they may be 
 very speedily altered and brought down by reducing 
 the rigidity of the limbs. The difference of rise in the 
 pulse when extending the limbs during hypnotism, from 
 what happens in the natural state, is one of the 
 strongest proofs of the patient being in the hypnotic 
 condition. 
 
 It has appeared to me, that we have thus the power
 
 WITH OBJECTS OF OPERATIONS. 163 
 
 of subjecting the brain and spinal cord, and whole 
 ganglionic system, to a high state of excitement, as 
 the pulse may speedily be raised to double its natural 
 velocity, in most cases, and still'more speedily reduced 
 to the natural standard again. Its volume and ten- 
 sion may also be equally rapidly increased or 
 diminished. It is therefore naturally to be expected, 
 that the functions must be greatly influenced by such 
 transitions. Every medical man knows that chronic 
 nervous disorders of the most painful nature may 
 have resisted every known remedy for weeks, or 
 months, or years, but have speedily vanished on the 
 accession of some acute attack. Now, my views were, 
 in such cases, to induce an intense state of excitement 
 for a short time, to be terminated abruptly, with the 
 hope of changing the former action, and thus termi- 
 nating the disorder ; and assuredly, in many instances 
 the most obstinate chronic functional disorder is gone, 
 or greatly meliorated, by a few such operations. 
 
 Then, again, by keeping any particular organ 
 awake or active, whilst the others were asleep, I con- 
 sidered there would be a great increase of activity 
 induced, by the whole nervous energy, or sensorial 
 power, being directed to that point ; or by keeping all 
 the other organs active, whilst one which had been 
 too active was allowed to remain in the torpid state, 
 that inordinate activity would be reduced in intensity, 
 and that probably permanently, that the inordinate 
 stimulus, in one case, would remove the susceptibility 
 to lower impressions, which Avere frequently exciting, 
 or habitually keeping up morbid feeling or action ; 
 and in the other cases, that by suspending the morbid 
 sensibility of a part for a time, and rousing antagonist
 
 164 SUCCESS OF OPERATIONS. 
 
 functions, such condition might be permanently 
 improved. 
 
 Whether I have been right or wrong in my 
 theoretical views, there can be no doubt of the fact 
 that in many instances I have been successful in the 
 application of Hypnotism as a curative agent ; and 
 the beneficial results of the operations have been so 
 immediate and decided, as to leave no doubt that 
 they stand in the relation of cause and effect. 
 However, that much of the success depends on the 
 impression arising from the altered condition of 
 circulation, seems to me to be proved by the fact, 
 that in cases where the sleep was induced without the 
 rise in the force and frequency in the heart's action, 
 by insuring this condition, the beneficial result has 
 instantly followed, where there has been no previous 
 improvement -with the low pulse. The following is 
 a remarkable instance of this : Nodan, deaf mute, 
 twenty-four years of age, was considered never to 
 have heard sound excepting the report of a gun or 
 thunder, when there was succussion of the air suffi- 
 cient to induce feeling rather than hearing, properly 
 so called. The mother told me Mr Vaughan, head 
 master of the Deaf and Dumb Institution when Nodan 
 was at school, considered any indication of hearing 
 referred to was feeling, and not hearing, properly so 
 called. At the first operation there was very little rise 
 of pulse, and afterwards I could not discern he had any 
 sense of hearing whatever. At next trial the pulse 
 was excited, and so remarkable was the effect, that in 
 going home he was so much annoyed with the noise 
 of the carts and carriages, that he would not allow 
 himself to be operated on again for some time. He
 
 CASES OF SIGHT. 165 
 
 has only been operated on a few times, and the result 
 is, that although he lives in a back street, he can now 
 hear a band of music coming along the front street, 
 and will run out to meet it. 
 
 I shall first illustrate the efficacy of hypnotism on 
 the various senses, and also on the mental condition. 
 And first, of sight. The mode of operating in chronic 
 cases, is first to induce the sleep, then extend the 
 extremities, and keep the eyes from getting into the 
 torpid state, by fanning them, or passing a current of 
 air over them occasionally. The length of time 
 required to keep such patient in this condition may 
 vary from six to twelve minutes, according to the 
 state of the circulation. The following cases will 
 illustrate the affections of the eyes in which I have 
 applied this mode of treatment with advantage. 
 
 Case I. Mrs Roilcy applied to me on the 6th April, 
 1842. She stated she was 54 years of age ; that 
 for the last sixteen years she had been a great suf- 
 ferer from an affection of the head, attended with 
 pain in the eyes and weakness of sight ; that it was 
 now become so bad, that she could not continue to 
 read for more than a few minutes at a time, even 
 with the aid of glasses. She had undergone the most 
 active treatment under first rate medical men, includ- 
 ing bleeding general and local, blistering on one 
 occasion, she was twice bled with leeches, and had 
 five blisters to her head in one month and almost 
 every variety of internal medicine which could be 
 suggested for such a case ; but still without improving 
 her sight. For years she had required to have her head 
 shaved every few weeks, and cold affusions and 
 spirituous lotions frequently applied to it, to reduce
 
 166 CASES OF SIGHT. 
 
 the excessive heat and other uncomfortable feelings. 
 The skin of the palms of the hands was so hard, dry, 
 and irritable, as to render it liable to chap whenever 
 she attempted to open the hands fully. The pain 
 during the day, and general irritability, had rendered 
 it necessary for her to take a composing pill three 
 times in twenty-four hours, for some time ; still her 
 rest was so bad as to force her to rise and walk about 
 the room several times during the night ; and her 
 memory had become so much impaired, that she often 
 required to go up stairs and then down again several 
 times before she could remember what she went up 
 for. About three years before consulting me, she had 
 a paralytic attack, which deprived her of power of the 
 muscles of the right side of the face for a few days. 
 Such had been the general state of her health before 
 consulting me, and the state of her sight, and the 
 result of my operation will be understood by the fol- 
 lowing document, which is attested by herself and 
 others, who were present when I first operated on 
 her : 
 
 "Mrs Roiley, (aged 64,) Chapel Street, Salford, 
 formerly of South Windsor Street, Toxteth Park, 
 Liverpool, as Miss Robinson, (four years ago,) has 
 been gradually losing sight since thirty-eight years 
 of age. Called on me for the first time, Gth April, 
 1842. Could not read the heading of the newspaper, 
 excepting the words, Macclesfield Courier ;' after 
 being hypnotized for eight minutes, she could dis- 
 tinctly read 'and Herald,' and in a few minutes 
 more the whole of the smaller line, ' Congleton 
 (Ja/ette, Stockport Express, and Cheshire Advertiser,' 
 also the day, month, and date of the paper. That the
 
 MRS ROILEY. 167 
 
 above is a correct report, is attested by the patient 
 herself and other three patients, who were present the 
 whole time. (Signed) ALICE ROILEY. 
 
 M. A. STOWIE. 
 
 ANN STOWIE. 
 
 HENRY GAGGS." 
 
 When Mrs Roiley called on me two days after, she 
 gave me the following report. After leaving my 
 house on the 6th, she was much gratified to find her 
 sight so much improved, which induced her to go and 
 test it by looking at articles displayed in shop win- 
 dows, and in particular remarked that she had walked 
 up to Mr Agnew's shop window, and was able to see 
 distinctly the features of a portrait of Sir Robert 
 Peel, and to read under it, " Sir Robert Peel, Bart.," 
 without her glasses, neither of which she could have 
 done for long before. She also stated, that after 
 being at home, she took up the small diamond Poly- 
 glot Bible, and with the aid of her glasses, was 
 agreeably surprised to find she was enabled to read 
 the 118th Psalm, (29 verses,) although this had been, as 
 she expressed it, a sealed book to her for years. The 
 following is the report which was recorded and attested 
 by her on the 12th April, 1842 : " Mrs Roiley was 
 able to read a Psalm with the aid of her glasses in the 
 smallest sized Polyglot Bible same afternoon she was 
 first hypnotized. Two days after, (8th April,) was 
 hypnotized a second time. Next day, made a net hand- 
 kerchief with the aid of her glasses. April 12, has 
 gone on improving, and in my own presence and 
 several others, with the aid of her glasses, read the 
 Polyglot Bible with ease and correctness, which she
 
 168 CASES OF SIGHT IMPROVED. 
 
 said, had been a sealed book to her for years before I 
 operated on her. 
 
 (Signed) ALICE ROILET. 
 
 M. A. STOWIE. 
 
 WM. HALLIDAY." 
 
 It is gratifying to be able to add, that the improve- 
 ment of the sight has been permanent ; and not only 
 so, but that the whole painful catalogue of complaints 
 with which she had been afflicted speedily disap- 
 peared, namely, pain of the chest, head, and eyes, loss 
 of memory, disturbed sleep, irregularity of the secreting 
 and digestive functions, and instead of the arid skin, 
 regular action of it, so that the palms of the hands, 
 which were so harsh and arid that she could not extend 
 them without lacerating the skin, causing great pain 
 and annoyance, were very soon as soft as a piece of 
 chamois leather. * The whole' of this improvement 
 was accomplished entirely by this agency, as she had 
 no medicine whatever during her attendance on me ; 
 nor has she required any up to this date, 20th Feb- 
 ruary, 1843, when I read this report to her, and when 
 >hu remarked it was much under drawn ; that with 
 great truth I might have represented her as having 
 been a greater sufferer. 
 
 Mrs Roilcy is a very intelligent person, and one 
 whose Christian profession and principles place her 
 
 * Very lately, a lady about 25 years of age was hypno- 
 tized by me. On being roused, she expressed her surprise 
 to find her hands bathed in perspiration, as she observed the 
 wa$ never known to have the slightest moisture on her hands till 
 Utat moment.
 
 MRS STOWE. 169 
 
 statements above all suspicion. She lias been seen by 
 many eminent professional and scientific gentlemen, 
 who can bear testimony that they have had from her 
 own lips the same statements as I have recorded 
 above. 
 
 It appears to me that it would be impossible to 
 adduce a more striking proof than this case affords, of 
 the great and undoubted benefit resulting from the 
 application of any remedial measure. The improve- 
 ment was so remarkable, as to admit of no doubt as 
 to its reality, and so immediate after the hypnotizing, 
 as to prove they stood in the relation of cause and 
 effect, no other remedy being in operation ; and what- 
 ever may be supposed capable of being achieved 
 through the mere power of imagination, as regards 
 certain functions, the sense of sight could scarcely be 
 supposed capable of being so much meliorated directly 
 through that influence. 
 
 Case II. is that of Mrs M. A. Stowe. This lady was 
 present when I first operated on Mrs Roiley, and was 
 so much gratified by the effects she witnessed in that 
 case, as to induce her to consult me as to the state 
 of her own eyes, and the probability of benefiting 
 them by a similar operation. Mrs Stowe was 44 
 years of age, and had experienced such weakness of 
 sight as to require the aid of glasses for the last 
 twenty-two years, to enable her to sew, read, or write, 
 and, for some years past, she required them to enable 
 her to transact her most ordinary household duties. 
 The following is the statement of her condition, which 
 I noted at the time, and is attested by her own signa- 
 ture, and that of others then present : 
 
 Mrs Stowe, aged 44, 1, Bank Place, Red Bank,
 
 170 CASES OF SIGHT IMPROVED. 
 
 Manchester, has been troubled with weakness of sight 
 for twenty-two years, so as to require glasses to enable 
 her to read or sew. When tested to-day, 8th April, 
 1842, without her glasses, could not distinguish the 
 large (capital) letters of advertisements in a news- 
 paper, nor large heading of the paper. After being 
 liypnotized for eight minutes, she could distinctly read 
 both the large and small heading, and day, month, and 
 date of the paper. 
 
 (Signed) M. A. STOWE. 
 
 She has also been able to sign her name to attest 
 the accuracy of the above statement, before her 
 daughter, and another patient. 
 
 (Signed) ANN STOWE. 
 
 10th, Called on me, and informed me she had 
 been able to make herself a blonde cap, and to thread 
 her needle without spectacles,* which she could not do 
 before for twenty-two years. 12th, Continued im- 
 proving ; told me she had been able to write up her 
 accounts without glasses. 
 
 (Signed) STOWE. 
 
 WM. HALLIDAY. 
 
 ALICE ROILEY. 
 
 ANN STOWE. 
 
 This patient has retained the improvement of her 
 sight. She has also informed me, that she was 
 agreeably surprised, after she left my house, the first 
 
 * I have myself seen her thread a No. 8 needle on several 
 oecuions.
 
 MISS STOWE, &C. 171 
 
 day she was operated on, to find, as she went along the 
 streets, that she could read the sign-boards, which she 
 could not do for years before. She has also named to 
 many others, as well as myself, a very convincing 
 proof of her great improvement in this respect. Be- 
 fore being operated on by me, on the 8th April, 1842, 
 if she went a-shopping, without her glasses, she was 
 sure to make some mistake as to the quality of goods 
 purchased, and have the trouble of going back to have 
 them exchanged, but now she never requires to take 
 her glasses with her, as can be testified by the shop- 
 men where she makes her purchases. Her memory 
 and general health have also been greatly improved by 
 the same operations. 
 
 Case III. Miss Stowe, daughter of the former 
 patient, 22 years of age, " was under the necessity 
 of reading, and doing any particular work, with the 
 aid of glasses, for the last two years, but has never 
 required them since she was first hypnotized, and 
 can now read the small Polyglot Bible." This is 
 attested by her mother, herself, and Mr William 
 Halliday, and Mrs Roiley. 
 
 The improvement has been permanent, and she has 
 threaded a No. 12 needle in my presence, eight months 
 after I first operated on her. 
 
 Case IV. Mr J. A. Walker, 22 years of age, had 
 always had very weak sight, but since being hypno- 
 tized has been greatly improved in his sight, as well 
 as in his memory and general health. 
 
 Case V. Mrs C., aged 83, had, from her age, required 
 the use of glasses for many years, to enable her to 
 sew or read. Last August I hypnotized her for deaf-
 
 172 IMPROVEMENT OF SIGHT. 
 
 ness, with very decided advantage, and I told her I 
 also expected to improve her sight at the same time. 
 She was very incredulous, but was agreeably sur- 
 prised to find, that after a second operation she was 
 not only able to hear much better, but also to sew some 
 flannel, threading her needle without her glasses. She 
 had been thus occupied for several hours, when I 
 called to see her, after the second operation. 
 
 There have been cases in which I have tried this 
 method without success, but this proves only that 
 we must never expect to obtain possession of a 
 universal remedy. Cases of confirmed amaurosis, 
 which had resisted every other known remedy, and 
 which were only undertaken by me at the desire of 
 the patients, and sometimes of medical men also, as 
 a forlorn hope, have, as in most cases was suspected 
 might be the result, proved unsuccessful, and, through 
 these, attempts have been most ungenerously and 
 unwarrantably made to throw discredit on the power 
 of hypnotism altogether. It has proved successful 
 in too many instances, however, to be borne down by 
 such paltry and pitiful misrepresentation. I could 
 easily adduce many more successful cases, did I deem 
 it necessary, but shall only give two more. 
 
 Case V. Mr J has always had imperfect 
 
 vision, is near-sighted, has strabismus of right eye, 
 and the sight so dull, that it was with great difficulty 
 he could, without glasses, see the large letters (on 
 white paper) in the title page of the " Medical 
 Gazette." After the first operation he could see 
 better, and! after it had been repeated a few times 
 he could, without glasses, read a few words of the
 
 MRS S.'S CASE. 173 
 
 leading article of that work, and after a few more 
 operations, could read the type in which the lectures, 
 at the beginning of the work, are printed. 
 
 Case VI. Mrs S., one of my own near relatives, had 
 a severe rheumatic fever in January, 1839. During 
 the course of this disease the left eye became impli- 
 cated, involving both the internal and external struc- 
 tures of the organ. She had the benefit of the advice 
 of one of the first-rate oculists in Edinburgh. She 
 was under his care till the August following, when 
 he considered farther attendance unnecessary, but 
 gave such instructions as he deemed expedient for her 
 future management of it, and which had been duly 
 attended to till the period when I first saw her, in 
 June, 1842. At that time she came on a visit to my 
 house. The eye was free from pain, but was of no 
 service as an organ of vision. There was an opacity 
 over more than one half of the cornea, sufficient to 
 prevent distinct perception of any object placed oppo- 
 site the temporal half of the eye, all being seen through 
 a dense haze ; and objects placed towards the opposite 
 side were seen very imperfectly, owing to the injury 
 the choroid and retina had sustained in the points on 
 which the images of such objects were reflected. The 
 opacity of the cornea was not only an obstacle to 
 distinct vision, but was also a source of annoyance, 
 from its disfigurement, being obvious even to those at 
 a considerable distance. 
 
 Notwithstanding the great advantage I had seen 
 other patients, afflicted with affection of the eyes, 
 derive from hypnotism, it never occurred to me that 
 such a case as that of Mrs S. was likely to be benefited 
 by such an operation. I had, however, recommended
 
 174 IMPROVEMENT OF SIGHT. 
 
 it to her for a severe rheumatic affection of the right 
 shoulder and arm. She had been in my house about 
 three months before she could make up her mind to un- 
 dergo the operation, but at length, the violence of the 
 pain impelled her to try it, or any thing else I should 
 recommend. I of course hypnotized her, which 
 immediately relieved her pain so much, that after 
 the first operation, she could move the arm freely. 
 The operation was repeated the following day, with 
 complete relief as regarded the arm ; and to the sur- 
 prise and delight of the patient, myself, and others 
 present, she found her sight so much improved as 
 to be able to see every thing in the room, and to 
 name different flowers, and distinguish their colours, 
 whilst the right eye was shut, which she had not been 
 able to do for more than three years and a half pre- 
 viously. I consequently now repeated the operation 
 daily, and, in a very short time, had the satisfaction 
 of seeing the cornea so transparent, that it requires 
 close inspection to observe where any opacity remains. 
 Neither external nor internal means were used during 
 tin- improvement, nothing but the hypnotizing was 
 had recourse to ; and during the three months I had 
 an opportunity of watching it prior to these opera- 
 tions, there was no visible change in the condition of 
 the organ. I should observe, that after the first ope- 
 ration, there was considerable smarting in the eye, 
 which continued all night, and, in a less degree, after 
 future operations, which, no doubt, roused the absor- 
 bents, and effected the removal of the opacity of the 
 cornea. Stimulating the optic nerve to greater acti- 
 vity, however, must have been the chief cause of the 
 very rapid improvement, which enabled her to see
 
 MR HOLDITCH. 175 
 
 objects after second operation. I should remark, that 
 the sight, with regard to objects seen from the tem- 
 poral side of the eye, is much more distinct than 
 from the nasal side, owing to the retina and choroid 
 having sustained irreparable damage during the in- 
 flammatory stage at the commencement of the attack 
 in 1839. 
 
 Case VII. Mr Holditch, 39 years of age, had been 
 partially paralytic for ten years, which came on some 
 time after a fall. Shortly after the fall, he expe- 
 rienced an attack of double vision, which went off 
 after bleeding, blistering, and the usual treatment, but 
 was followed by paralysis of the lower limbs, which 
 induced him to consult me on the 18th of February, 
 1843. See Case XXVII. p. 217. He was very much 
 surprised, when I told him he had defective vision of 
 the right eye, said he was not aware of it, and would 
 not believe that I was not mistaken, till I tested him, 
 when he found he could barely see the capitals of 
 the words, " Medical Gazette," as heading of the 
 leading article of that work, whilst he could read the 
 ordinary size print of the page with the other eye. 
 After being hypnotized, I tested him in the same 
 position, and with the same degree of light, and he 
 could then read the small sized print with it, and 
 it has continued so ever since. He could also walk 
 across the room without crutch or stick, which he 
 could not do before, at which he was very much sur- 
 prised, as he was quite conscious the whole time, and 
 therefore could not believe any good could have re- 
 sulted to him from what was done, till he had the 
 positive evidence of it in being able to see and walk. 
 
 Here, then, we have seen three cases of improved
 
 176 DEAFNESS CURED. 
 
 vision consequent on hypnotizing for other affections, 
 and where, consequently, the improvement could not 
 at all be attributable to imagination, but to the 
 altered condition in the capillary circulation and dis- 
 tribution of the vis nerrosa. 
 
 In cases of active inflammation of the eyes, either 
 external or internal, I have never tried hypnotism. 
 By the mode calculated to excite the circulation, of 
 course it would be quite inadmissible ; and it could 
 only be speculation for me to hazard an opinion as to 
 its probable result by the other mode. 
 
 The extraordinary excitement of the auditory 
 organ, which I had observed in the course of my early 
 experiments, and the fact that hearing was the last 
 sense to disappear during this artificial sleep, (unless 
 we except that of the sensibility to a current of air,) 
 led me to anticipate most satisfactory results from 
 this process in the treatment of deafness, arising from 
 torpor of the auditory nerves. I consequently tried 
 it in such cases, and where there has not been destruc- 
 tion, or irreparable organic injury to the auditory 
 apparatus, I can confidently say, I know of no 
 means equal to hypnotism, for benefiting such cases. 
 Of course, it cannot suit all cases, but I am satisfied it 
 will succeed in a numerous class of cases, and in some 
 which bid defiance to all other known modes of treat- 
 ment. 
 
 I am enabled to state this confidently, not only 
 from my own personal success, but also from that of 
 others who have fairly tried it. One professional 
 friend, Mr Gardom, introduced to me two patients 
 whom he had improved so much by hypnotism only, 
 that they were enabled to hear the sermons of the'ir
 
 DEAF AND DUMB. 177 
 
 respective pastors, which they could | not do before, 
 in consequence of which one of them had to leave her 
 favourite minister, and go to another church ; but, 
 after being hypnotized, has been able to hear so 
 much better, that she has been thus induced to re- 
 turn to her former pastor. 
 
 The great success which I had experienced from 
 hypnotism, in improving those who were deaf through 
 disease, led me to hope it might be of service to some 
 of those who were born deaf and dumb, and I there- 
 fore tried it in such cases with a considerable degree 
 of success, ultimately with a success beyond my 
 most sanguine expectations. In consequence of what 
 had been done and exhibited at my lectures, the 
 medical profession of Liverpool, to their credit be it 
 recorded, recommended to the governors of the Deaf and 
 Dumb Institution there, to permit an experimental 
 trial to be made at their Institution. The governors 
 refused their assent to this within the walls of the 
 Institution, but agreed to permit a trial to be made 
 with such out-door pupils as could be induced to sub- 
 mit to it elsewhere, the consent of the parents having 
 been obtained. In consequence of this, a committee of 
 the governors and the medical faculty was appointed to 
 superintend the said investigation, and I was invited 
 to go over and conduct the experiments in their presence, 
 and it was proposed a report of the results should be 
 published in the Medical Journals, at the termination 
 of our labours. The difficulty of getting the pupils 
 and their parents to attend, induced us to abandon the 
 proceedings after two trials had been made, so that it 
 would be quite inconsistent with the conditions stipu- 
 lated, at the commencement of said investigation, to 
 
 M
 
 178 EXPECTATIONS REGARDING 
 
 publish any report of the result of this partial inves- 
 tigation. However, I think I cannot better illustrate 
 the extent of my expectations, in reference to such 
 cases, than by transcribing an extract from my ad- 
 dress to the said committee, prior to commencing our 
 experimental trial. 
 
 " Hitherto, these patients have been considered be- 
 yond the pale of human aid, so decidedly have they 
 resisted all means tried for their relief ; and the mor- 
 bid condition of the organs, as ascertained by dissec- 
 tion, was sufficient to warrant the inference that it 
 was improbable any remedy could ever be discovered 
 for such cases. Fully aware of this pathological diffi- 
 culty, I was nevertheless inclined to try the effect of 
 neuro-hypnotism with congenital deaf mutes, know- 
 ing it could be done with perfect safety, and without 
 pain or inconvenience to the patients. Moreover, 
 from having witnessed its extraordinary power of 
 rousing the excitability of the auditory nerves, I 
 entertained the hope that it might thus be capable of 
 exciting some degree of hearing, from the increased 
 sensibility of the nerves compensating for the imper- 
 fection of the organ. I was not, and am not even 
 now, so visionary, as to expect perfection of function, 
 when there is great imperfection of the organ. Per- 
 fection of organization and function must be co-exis- 
 tont ; at least the function cannot be perfectly per- 
 formed when the organization is much impaired. The 
 rou It of my first trial was beyond my most sanguine 
 expectations, which induced me to persevere, and the 
 rou It lias been, that I have scarcely met with a case 
 of congenital deaf mute, where I have not suceeded in 
 making the patient hear in some degree. Many may
 
 DEAF AND DUMB. 179 
 
 never hear so well as to make it available to holding 
 conversation by its aid ; but still it is most interest- 
 ing in a physiological point of view, to know the 
 fact, that by this means the imperfect organ can be 
 roused to any degree of sensibility to sound, as even 
 this must tend to the improvement of the general 
 functions of the brain, rather than being entirely de- 
 prived of one source of its appropriate stimuli. I 
 have no doubt, moreover, that many cases will, by 
 this means, be restored to such degree of hearing as 
 will be available for colloquial intercourse in society, 
 which never could have been accomplished by any 
 other means hitherto tried. If my success with the 
 cases assembled here is at all equal to what it has 
 been with others elsewhere, I think it cannot be 
 otherwise than gratifying to you to find that our art 
 has acquired a new and important power in this 
 agency. I must not, however, omit to add, that 
 many cases may shew no improvement at a first or 
 second trial, and yet be very satisfactory after a few 
 trials. According to my experience, there is much 
 greater chance of benefiting congenital deaf mutes, 
 than those who have become so from disease or acci- 
 dent, to the extent of total loss of hearing. 
 
 " In testing patients as to their power of hearing, T 
 consider it quite necessary to adopt a different plan 
 for those who are congenital deaf mutes, from what we 
 do with those who have known what perfect hearing 
 was at some former period of their lives. It is quite 
 true that the latter class may be unable to hear a 
 musical box, or the tick of a watch, when held at a 
 little distance from the ears, but can hear it when 
 pressed against the ear, or the mastoid process, or
 
 180 MODES OF TESTING 
 
 against the teeth, owing to the greater conducting 
 power of the bony structure. There are patients of 
 this class, however, who declare they have no sense of 
 sound when so tested, because their previous know- 
 ledge of the sense enables them to distinguish betwixt 
 hearing, properly so called, and common feeling. In 
 testing congenital deaf mutes, from their want of this 
 previous knowledge, they will all signify they hear, 
 if any sonorous or vibrating body is pressed against 
 the ear. This, however, I do not consider we have 
 any proof of being hearing, but feeling ; because they 
 had no previous knowledge to direct them as to the 
 peculiar sensation of correct hearing; and they will 
 give the same indication if the sonorous body is 
 placed on any other solid part of the body, according 
 to its respective degree of sensibility. In applying 
 tests to congenital deaf mutes, therefore, I consider 
 they have no sense of hearing, if they cannot hear the 
 sound of a musical box held close to, but not toiiching 
 the ears, or any other sonorous body whose vibra- 
 tions do not excite such oscillation in the air as is 
 sufficient to be recognized by common feeling. It 
 ought also to be borne in mind that the common feeling 
 of the deaf and blind is generally much more acute 
 than in those who have not been deprived of those 
 senses. At all events we cannot err in taking this as 
 our standard, because, if those who did not hear on 
 the application of such a test before the operation, do 
 not hear it also after the operation, we shall consider 
 there is no improvement ; and if those who hear it at a 
 certain distance before the operation, cannot after the 
 operation hear it at a greater distance, it must also be 
 considered no improvement has been made. But if
 
 DEAF AND DUMB PATIENTS. 181 
 
 the former can, after the operation, hear without the 
 box touching the ear, and the latter can hear at a greater 
 distance, then of course we are entitled to say an im- 
 provement has resulted from the operation." 
 
 These extracts should be sufficient to explain what 
 the extent of my expectations were as to meliorating 
 the condition of congenital deaf and dumb patients, 
 the principles upon which these expectations were 
 based, and my mode of testing the original and sub- 
 sequent condition of such patients. The following 
 cases will prove that my anticipations have been so 
 far realized in one case to an extent I never calcu- 
 lated on. The mode of operating 5s, hypnotize the 
 patient, extend the limbs, and gently fan the ears. 
 
 Case VIII. The case of Nodan has already been 
 referred to at page 164, and I shall therefore merely 
 add here, that he was 24 years old, was never 
 considered to have had the power of hearing, pro- 
 perly so called, according to the opinion of the head 
 master of the Deaf and Dumb Institution, where he 
 was a pupil ; that after the first operation I satisfied 
 myself he had no sense of hearing, but after the second, 
 which I carried still farther, he could hear, and was 
 so annoyed by the noise of the carts and carriages 
 when going home, after that operation, that he could 
 not be induced to call on me again for some time. 
 He has been operated on only a few times, and has 
 been so much improved, that although he lives in a 
 back street, he can now hear a band of music coming 
 along the front street, and will go out to meet it. I 
 lately tested him, and found he could hear in his 
 room on the second floor a gentle knock on the 
 bottom stair. His improvement, therefore, has been 
 both decided and permanent, and is entirely attri-
 
 182 IMPROVEMENT OF 
 
 butable to hypnotism, as no other means were adopted 
 in his case. 
 
 Case IX. "Mr John Wright, Pendleton, 19 
 years of age. Congenit.il deaf mute. Was four years 
 at the asylum under Mr Vaughan. Never heard 
 sound. On testing, could not discern the tick of a 
 watch pressed against the ears, nor a musical box, 
 unless when pressed against the ears, which was 
 evidently feeling, and not hearing, as he evinced the 
 same expressions when it was applied to the shoulder, 
 chest, or back of the hand. After being hypnoti/ed 
 for eight minutes, he could hear the musical box held 
 more than an inch from the left ear, but not at all with 
 the right, if not pressed against it, which was of 
 course only feeling. Certified as correct by the father 
 of the patient. (Signed) JOHN WRIGHT." 
 
 " MANCHESTER, 8th April, 1842." 
 
 " After writing the above statement, he was again 
 tested, and could hear the box half an inch from the 
 right ear. (Signed) JOHN WRIGHT." 
 
 The latter fact, of hearing better after being roused 
 than at the very moment they are roused, occurs in 
 cases generally. This patient attended daily for a short 
 time, and made considerable progress in the power of 
 hearing, but like too many others he had not patience 
 to persevere, which his father, who is a very respectable 
 and intelligent man, wished him to do. Unfortunately 
 the deaf and dumb are not aware of the extent of their 
 priration, or of the real advantage they would obtain 
 l.y persevering, and their expectation, and that of their 
 friends, in most cases seems to be, that the moment 
 they have the power of hearing restored in some
 
 DEAF AND DUMB PATIENTS. 183 
 
 degree, they should, as by a miracle, also be imme- 
 diately inspired with the gift of tongues, and be able 
 to speak and understand language without study, 
 toil, or trouble. This has been so well expressed by 
 John Harrison Curtis, Esq. that I shall quote a para- 
 graph from his pen on the subject. 
 
 " Kramer condemns the cases recorded as cures by 
 Itard, Deleau, and others, because, when published, 
 the patients had not acquired a facility of speech 
 equal to that evinced by other people of the same age ; 
 forgetting, that when the deafness has been cured, the 
 individual is placed precisely in the position of a child 
 that has to acquire the faculty of speech, and not 
 unfrequently the power of thought ; while, at the 
 same time, if he have approached the age of puberty, 
 he has to contend with false impressions created by 
 the erroneous perceptions which affected him while 
 unable, from his infirmity, to impart his feelings and 
 ideas to his fellow-creatures ; in fact, he is placed in 
 the same position in regard to hearing as Cheselden's 
 patient was with respect to vision. The organ, when 
 the cophosis is removed, requires to be carefully 
 educated to perceive, understand, and distinguish the 
 variety of sounds which will impinge upon the 
 auditory nerve, a task requiring much time for its 
 accomplishment. The cure of congenital deafness, 
 consequently, may be effected, and yet rendered effe'te, 
 for want of this necessary subsequent education." 
 
 After remarking that many cases of deaf dumbness 
 arise from disease, and are only partially deaf, he 
 added, " Many of these cases admit of amelioration, 
 some of cure ; and I hold, that wherever there is a 
 chance only of doing good, it ought not to be
 
 184 MR CTJRTIS'S REMARKS. 
 
 neglected ; it may certainly raise hopes which may 
 be nullified hereafter, but not in the patient, who 
 cannot comprehend the motives of the proceeding ; 
 nor would the friends be much annoyed thereat, if 
 the surgeon has performed his duty properly, by 
 shewing, that although there is a chance of success, it 
 is after all only a chance." "It does not occasion a 
 loss of valuable time, worthy to be put in competition 
 with the prospect of restoring even one individual to 
 the enjoyment of the society and converse of his fel- 
 lows." " Many would be rendered (by proper treat- 
 ment) useful members of society, who, under the 
 present system, remain hopeless objects of commisera- 
 tion as long as they live." Mr Curtis farther adds, 
 " I perfectly agree with Dr Williams, who says, a 
 cure ought always to be attempted, and that at the 
 earliest moment at which deafness is detected ; and 
 children so affected should mix with others not deaf, 
 and no symbolical education should take place until 
 all chances of cure are gone." Medical Gazette, 23d 
 September, 1842. 
 
 These remarks are so judicious and important as to 
 require no comment by way of enforcing them on any 
 intelligent and candid reader. 
 
 The following case having been the cause of much 
 controversy, I shall give it in detail. Before operating 
 on the boy, in the presence of the gentleman who 
 brought him to me, I asked the lad, in writing, if he 
 ever heard, to which he returned answer, (also in 
 writing,) " No." I then proceeded to operate on him, 
 and the following is a report of his case from my note- 
 book. 
 
 Case X. " James Shelmerdino, Mr Barker's, 83 High
 
 JAMES SHELMERDINE. 185 
 
 Street, Manchester, aged fourteen years and a half, was 
 born deaf and dumb, and educated at the Manchester 
 Deaf and Dumb Asylum, and came out last June, 
 in consequence of his age. 4th January, 1842, I 
 subjected him to the mesmeric influence, by causing 
 him look at my glass rod, and in thirteen minutes 
 aroused him by a clap of the hands, when he 
 could hear the tick of my watch applied to the right 
 ear, but only very slightly so when applied to the 
 left. Could hear me speak loudly, but could not tell 
 what I said to him. This took place in presence of 
 his master, who brought him to me, and now attests 
 the correctness of the above. The boy has other two 
 brothers deaf and dumb. 
 
 (Signed) MATTHEW BARKER." * 
 
 5th January. Again subjected him to the operation. 
 In twelve minutes he could hear my watch at nine 
 inches from right ear, and at six from left. 
 
 7th January. Called upon me, and could hear with 
 the right ear at four and a half inches, and one inch 
 from left ear. After being hypnotized for ten minutes, 
 he could hear the watch at seven inches from right, 
 and at four inches from left ear. 
 
 17th January. After operation could hear six and 
 a half inches with left, and seven and a half with 
 right. 20th. Could, after being roused, hear my 
 watch at seven and a half inches from left ear, and at 
 nine inches from right." 
 
 The boy was now tested by competent judges, and 
 
 * Mr Barker was not the boy's master, but employed some 
 of his friends, as was afterwards explained to me.
 
 18G JAMES SHELMERDINE'S CASE. 
 
 pronounced capable of imitating articulate sound 
 wit/iout seeing the motion of the lips. To render this 
 the more certain, he was tried with a word requiring 
 no motion of the lips and spoken near his ear, which 
 he distinctly imitated. 
 
 I now commenced to teach him to speak a few 
 simple words, and he got on very well ; and that he 
 could do so very satisfactorily, I considered there was 
 ample proof by what he accomplished at my lectures. 
 There were some who could not believe he could have 
 been born entirely deaf and dumb, when they heard 
 how well he imitated articulate sounds when the 
 motions of the lips were concealed. This was par- 
 ticularly and warmly disputed at a lecture I gave at 
 Liverpool, on the 1st of April, 1842. The boy was 
 asked, without my knowledge, by Mr Rhind, head 
 master of the Deaf and Dumb Institution of Liver- 
 pool, if he ever heard before being operated on by me, 
 to which he answered, " No." Next day, in the 
 presence of several friends, I again questioned him in 
 writing as to his original condition, when he gave the 
 following answers, which he certified by his signature 
 as beiiif correct. Fortunately, this document, by the 
 merest accident, (having been written on the back of 
 a letter belonging to another gentleman,) has been 
 preserved, and I shall here transcribe it verbatim. 
 " Could you ever hear before I operated on you ?' 
 * No.' ' How did the master of the school teach you 
 to say, papa, mamma 1* ' Few days.' ' How did he 
 doit?' 'Ba, be, bi, bo, bu.' 'Did the master ask 
 you to watch the motions of his lips ?' ' Yes.' * Did 
 he try to teach you to speak by applying his mouth 
 to your ear?' 'No.' 'Did you ever say what you
 
 IMPROVEMENT. 187 
 
 did to me before?' 'No.' 'Did you ever read it, so 
 far as you remember ?' ' No.' 
 
 (Signed) JAMES SHELMERDINE." 
 
 Hitherto the boy had only been taught single 
 words. The last two questions refer to part of the 
 " Lord's Prayer," in English, which I had been teach- 
 ing him to speak by means of hearing ; and although 
 he speedily made a good attempt at repeating part of 
 it, the effect was so different from that of the mode 
 adopted at school, or that conveyed to his mind 
 through the organ of sight, when reading it, as he 
 must have been accustomed to do, that he did not know 
 what it was I had been teaching him to speak. Could a 
 stronger proof than this be adduced that the boy did 
 not learn to speak by hearing before he was under 
 my treatment ? 
 
 I also, on the same day, taught this boy to repeat 
 part of the Lord's Prayer in Latin, to do away with 
 all ground of cavil as to what he might have learned 
 at the Institution ; and at my next lecture at Liver- 
 pool, the week after, he was heard to be able to 
 repeat it when spoken to him in a moderate tone of 
 voice, whilst the motions of the lips were concealed, 
 and that taking the words in any order, so that there 
 could be no ground of mistake as to his hearing what 
 he repeated. 
 
 Various surmises having now got out, that this boy, 
 James Shelmerdine, might have had, or must have 
 had, the sense of hearing originally, and that his 
 present condition could not possibly be the result of 
 hypnotism, I addressed a letter to Mr Bingham, 
 who was head master of the Asylum during the five
 
 188 MR BINOHAM'S TESTIMONY. 
 
 years this boy was at school, requesting him to favour 
 mo with information as to James Shelmerdine's real 
 condition up to the time when he left school. The 
 following is his reply, and I may add, I am not per- 
 sonally acquainted with Mr Bingham. After describ- 
 ing the partial hearing of this boy, which varied 
 greatly, Mr Bingham adds, " I never considered his 
 hearing sufficient to distinguish one sound from 
 another in conversation, and consequently, never 
 attempted to teach him to speak in any other way 
 than that which I use with all children born deaf. 
 If hypnotism, or mesmerism, has enabled him to 
 imitate the sounds you wished to communicate to 
 him, without his observing the lips, I do not hesitate 
 to say that you have achieved that which I never 
 could have expected ; and, under such circumstances, 
 I think every encouragement ought to be given to 
 your plan. You would greatly oblige me by saying 
 if this has been accomplished, as the boy was quite in- 
 capable of distinguishing one word from another when he 
 left me, if spoken behind his back" 
 
 Fortunately I had no difficulty in satisfactorily 
 substantiating this, for, besides having been so re- 
 peatedly proved in the public lecture-room, here and 
 elsewhere, he had also been tested before a number 
 of the most distinguished members of the British 
 Association, last June, and, more recently, before a 
 dozen witnesses, including the present head master of 
 the Deaf and Dumb Institution of this town. I 
 instituted this investigation in consequence of some 
 gross attempts which had been made to misrepresent 
 my conduct in reference to this case. The following 
 is an extract from the report of his condition on the
 
 MR BINGHAM'S TESTIMONY. 189 
 
 25th July last, (1842,) and is attested by Mr A. 
 Patterson, head master of our Deaf and Dumb School, 
 and twelve more witnesses : "James Shelmerdine 
 was examined at Mr Braid's before the undersigned, 
 in reference to his hearing, and he readily repeated 
 part of the Lord's Prayer, both in English and Latin, 
 both backwards and forwards, after Mr Braid repeat- 
 ing the words in a moderate tone of voice, without 
 being able to see the movement of the lips." 
 
 I had not seen the boy for about a month before 
 this investigation, and I would ask, did he not here 
 manifest a decided improvement from the state he 
 was in when he left school, when, as borne testimony 
 to by Mr Bingham, " he was quite incapable of dis- 
 tinguishing one word from another," if spoken so 
 that he could not see the motion of the lips ? and I 
 am quite certain this was his condition immediately 
 after my first operation. As has been already stated, 
 he could not then distinguish one word from another, 
 however loudly spoken close to his ear. 
 
 After communicating these statements of what the 
 boy could do, as recorded at the investigation on the 
 25th July, Mr Bingham favoured me with a second 
 letter, from which I make the following extract : 
 " James Shelmerdine's performance in repeating the 
 Lord's Prayer, in Latin and English, when the mo- 
 tions of the lips were concealed from him, is a con- 
 vincing proof that he must have benefited greatly by 
 it (hypnotism,) as he could not distinguish one 
 sound from another by oral communication." 
 
 The following fact also proves the great improve- 
 ment in the boy's hearing. One afternoon he was in 
 my hall, when a lady was playing the piano, and
 
 190 INFERENCES FROM WHOLE. 
 
 singing, in a room up stairs. He seemed so much 
 pleased with the music that I gave him permission to 
 go and hear it. He instantly went up stairs, and into 
 the drawing-room, by himself, and seemed quite 
 delighted with the sound of the music, as several who 
 saw him can testify. This, I am quite certain, he 
 could not have done for some time after he came 
 under my care. 
 
 In fine, I feel confident, that had this boy persevered 
 with the operation, and been taken pains with by his 
 parents, to teach him to speak, and understand the 
 meaning of what he spoke, he would, long ere now, 
 have been able to hold oral communication with 
 others with less trouble, and in a more moderate tone 
 of voice than we must resort to with many whom \ve 
 meet with, who have become hard of hearing from 
 ago or disease. It is, however, so much more trouble, 
 at first, for the friends to teach them language, than 
 to hold intercourse with them by signs, that they will 
 not bestow it, and the patients, from not knowing the 
 extent of their privation, can be less expected to exert 
 themselves for acquiring the good they know not ; 
 ami therefore, I feel assured there will never be much 
 achieved for the poor in this way, unless within the 
 walls of some public institution ; but, that there are 
 many who might be permanently benefited in such 
 situations I have no doubt. In the paper by Mr 
 Curtis, to which I have already referred, he writes 
 thus in reference to the pathological condition of the 
 organ in those born deaf and dumb : "I am of the 
 same opinion as Itard in this respect, that structural 
 disease does not occasion more than one case in five, 
 leaving, consequently, many cases in which medical
 
 SARAH TAYLOR. 191 
 
 assistance may prove of service ; and I do not acknow- 
 ledge that the ' weakness of the nerve, approaching to 
 paralysis, or an actual paralysis of the nerve,' which 
 Dr Kramer assumes to exist in those cases where con- 
 genital cophosis is present, and no structural derange- 
 ment, must necessarily be as incurable as structural 
 deficiency. We are not apt to abandon incipient 
 palsy of a nerve of sense or motion, in other parts of 
 the system, without an attempt at relief ; and I see 
 no reason why the unfortunate being afflicted with 
 deaf dumbness, should be surrendered to his fate, 
 without a well directed attempt being previously 
 made to redeem him therefrom." 
 
 This, together with the statement of his experience, 
 ought to encourage farther trials, and especially now 
 that we have got a new and more powerful agent to 
 operate with than any hitherto brought into opera- 
 tion in such cases. The results of the following case 
 have far more than realized my most sanguine expec- 
 tations. It clearly proves, that persons with perfect 
 organization may have been deaf and dumb from 
 birth, and continue so merely for want of a sufficient 
 stimulus to set the machinery in motion. 
 
 In consequence of the remarkable improvement of 
 hearing, through hypnotism, evinced in the case of 
 Mrs C., (Case IV. already recorded,) I was asked to 
 give my opinion as to the probability of a similar 
 operation benefiting a girl who had been deaf and 
 dumb from birth, and who was sister to a servant in 
 the family I was then visiting. I told them what 
 my experience had been in respect to such cases, and 
 it was accordingly arranged that I should see the
 
 192 SARAH TAYLOR. 
 
 patient, and try what could be done for her, the fol- 
 lowing day. 
 
 Case X. 9th August, 1843. The girl, Sarah Taylor, 
 was nine and a-half years of age, very small for her 
 age, and very stupid looking. The following is the 
 history of the case, as stated by father, mother, and 
 elder sister. She was a seven months' child, remark- 
 ably small, the head large for the size of the body, and 
 soft, (" like a bladder full of water,") and it was long 
 before they expected to be able to rear the child. As 
 she grew up they were much annoyed with her not 
 speaking, and by her paying no attention to what 
 was said to her. At last they found that this was not 
 obstinacy, to which it had been at first attributed. 
 They now came to the painful conviction that she was 
 deaf and dumb. The father has assured myself, and 
 many others, that in his anxiety to obtain proof of her 
 having any degree of hearing, he has "often stood 
 behind her, and shouted (as he expressed himself) till 
 he was hoarse again," without her evincing any sign of 
 hearing ; and that when she was out of sight they were 
 in continual terror she would be run over by carts or 
 carriages, as she could not hear their approach. The 
 testimony of the mother and sister was to the same 
 effect, that they never could make her hear, or pay 
 any attention by calling her, when her back was to- 
 wards them. In such position they could only make 
 her observe them by touching her. They all agree, 
 also, in stating, that she never could speak so as to be 
 understood, till after being operated on by me, ex- 
 cepting two or three words, father, mother, sister, 
 which she had learned from watching the motions of
 
 PROFESSOR TAYLOR'S TEST. 193 
 
 their lips. I regret not having had her tested by a 
 musical box before I operated on her ; but I am quite 
 certain, that after the first operation she could not 
 distinguish one word from another ; and I afterwards 
 had the best possible proof of her never having heard 
 for any useful purpose, as she was quite ignorant of 
 the name of any part of her own body, or of any person, 
 place, or thing, as is well known to many who saw 
 her after I had operated on her. After the third and 
 fourth operation I could manage to make her speak 
 a few simple words, and also to make a tolerable 
 attempt at following me when singing the musical 
 scale. 
 
 Ten days after the fourth trial, she was tested and 
 proved able to do this before fifty or sixty highly 
 respectable witnesses, including many professional 
 gentlemen. For months past she has been attending 
 the Scotch Sessional School, and is making very good 
 progress in learning, and I have no doubt, will prove 
 to be a clever girl ; she hears so correctly now, as not 
 only to be able to imitate speaking, but also singing. 
 Mr E.Taylor, Gresham Professor of Music, lately affor- 
 ded a number of my professional and scientific friends 
 a good proof of this, as he composed an extemporary 
 tune which she and other two patients sang correctly, 
 whilst in the state of n euro-hypnotic sleep. She 
 could have done the same whilst awake, and hundreds 
 have witnessed her speak and sing, both when asleep 
 and when awake. 
 
 It is curious, that in some who have a very incor- 
 rect musical ear, so that they could not be taught to 
 sing the most simple air correctly when awake, can 
 
 N
 
 104 HYPNOTISM INCREASES 
 
 nevertheless be made to do so, when in this peculiar 
 sleep. This was remarkably exemplified in a young 
 lady, whom I wished to be taught a simple air which 
 she might sing by way of exemplification, at some 
 lectures I was to give at a distance, but it could not be 
 accomplished; she could not follow in tune more 
 than a note or two together ; but when asleep, she 
 can sing any air correctly which I have tried her 
 with. Still, when awake, she cannot do so. For an 
 example of the same sort during natural somnambu- 
 lism, see pages 296 298, and 309, of Dr {Abcr- 
 crombie's work on the Intellectual Powers. Of one 
 it is noted, " She often sung, both sacred and common 
 pieces, incomparably better, Dr Dyce affirms, than 
 she could do in the waking state." Of the other, " she 
 was, when awake, a dull awkward girl, very dull in 
 receiving any kind of instruction, though much care 
 was bestowed upon her, and, in point of intellect, she 
 was much inferior to the other servants of the family. 
 In particular, she shewed no kind of turn for music, 
 and she did not appear to have any recollection of 
 what passed during her sleep." During somnambu- 
 lism, she sang beautifully, and exhibited great intel- 
 lectual powers. 
 
 I shall conclude this department by recording 
 the following case from my note book. The in- 
 ability of this patient to sing in tune may have been 
 partly owing to a defect in the organ of hearing, and 
 partly to a state of nervousness affecting the vocal 
 organs. The experiment was undertaken merely to 
 gratify the particular desire of the patient, as at that 
 time I had had no similar case, and was not prepared
 
 TASTE FOR MUSIC. 195 
 
 to say, whether it was likely or not to be successful. 
 However, I felt assured it would do him 110 harm, and 
 made the trial accordingly, and assuredly nothing 
 could have proved more successful or more gratifying 
 than the result. 
 
 Case XI. 7th July, 1842, 1 was consulted by Alex- 
 ander M'Roberts, 29 years of age, residing with 
 Mr Hannay, of 42, Thomas Street, Manchester. 
 He said, he had never been able to join in tune, al- 
 though he had frequently attempted to do so. After 
 being hypnotized for some time, (about ten minutes,) 
 I roused him, and desired him to walk into the dining- 
 room, and after hypnotizing him once more, a friend 
 played the organ, and I directed (or led) him to sing 
 the scale, beginning with D, as he could not sing C, 
 owing to the natural pitch of his voice. He very soon 
 managed to sing the scale quite correctly, upwards 
 and then downwards. I now roused him, and made 
 him sing it when awake, which he did remarkably 
 well. I now tried him with the first part of " Robin 
 Adair," which he followed in correct tune several 
 times. This took place in presence of Mr James 
 Reynolds, Mr Daniels, Mr James Braid, my nephew, 
 and myself. In the evening of that day, after being 
 again hypnotized, he sung the first part of " Robin 
 Adair" very correctly several times, and also PleyePs 
 German Hymn, and the Old Hundred Psalm, quite 
 correctly. PleyeFs German Hymn he never heard 
 before. This took place in presence of four gentle- 
 men. 
 
 His inability to sing prior to these operations was 
 borne testimony to by several of his friends, one of
 
 196 M'ROBERT'S CASE. 
 
 whom had a good knowledge of music, but despaired 
 of ever seeing M'Roberts able to sing, and he was 
 exceedingly surprised at the result. This patient was 
 operated on several times afterwards, and when I 
 last saw him, could sing a considerable number of 
 tunes, and follow any simple air with ease and cor- 
 rectness. 
 
 The next sense I shall refer to is that of smell. 
 Having put the patient into the hypnotic state, he 
 ought to be kept in it a longer or shorter time, accor- 
 ding to the object had in view. If to excite or 
 quicken the sense, the limbs should be extended and 
 a gentle current of air should be passed against the nos- 
 trils occasionally ; but if to diminish the sense, this 
 ought not to be done. 
 
 Case XII. is an interesting example of restoration 
 of the sense of smell by hypnotizing. A young lady 
 was subjected to this operation for a different com- 
 plaint. On being aroused, and after I left the room, 
 she made inquiries as to the cause of the great noise 
 she heard in the house, and expressed her surprise at 
 the noisy manner in which the various duties of the 
 apartment where she was were performed. They 
 assured her there was nothing going on in the room 
 where she was, different from what was usually the 
 case, nor was there any thing to account for the noise 
 she complained of, and they therefore held her com- 
 plaints to be only imaginary. She persisted they 
 were real. The fact was, she had been for a length 
 of time dull of hearing, and the improvement of 
 this sense consequent on the hypnotizing, had so 
 quickened the faculty as to account for the difference
 
 SENSE OF SMELL. 197 
 
 she experienced. Moreover, she had for a consider- 
 able time previously lost the sense of smell, and it 
 was now ascertained that this sense had also been 
 restored, through the same operation. Another patient 
 who had lost the sense of smell for nine years, had 
 it restored after being twice hypnotized. For a beau- 
 tiful illustration of the extent to which this sense is 
 roused during the hypnotic sleep, see foot note, * ex- 
 
 * " A beautifully contrived experiment was here put in 
 practice by Mr Clarke, and Mr Townend, to test the truth of 
 the phenomena. Mr Braid had drawn their attention to the 
 wonderful exaltation of the sense of smell. A rose had been 
 held before the patient, the scent of which she had followed 
 about the platform in every direction with the most excessive 
 eagerness now standing on tiptoe to reach it when held 
 aloft, anon bending herself forward with the most graceful 
 ease, till her face came almost in contact with the floor now 
 darting after it across the platform (notwithstanding that her 
 eyes were bandaged) with unerring aim as to the direction in 
 which it was moved or throwing herself into the most 
 fantastic attitudes, but always with surprising ease, to catch 
 its fragrance when moved merely round her person in tanta- 
 lizing play. At length she no longer followed it, and Mr 
 Braid now explained that the sense of smell had entirely 
 gone, and could only be renewed by a current of air across 
 the nostrils. Mr Clarke here motioned Mr Townend to go 
 across the platform, which he did very softly, and Mr Clarke 
 then threw the rose to him, a distance probably of from four 
 to five yards. Mr Clarke having thus taken the precaution 
 to guard against the suspicion of collusion or trick, himself 
 passed a current of air across the nostrils of the patient, so as 
 to again exalt the sensibility of the organ. She now moved 
 forward as though in search of some object that had escaped 
 her, and was advancing in front of the stage, which was not
 
 198 TOUCH AND RESISTANCE. 
 
 tracted from a report of my conversazione to the mem- 
 bers of the British Association, as recorded by the 
 " Manchester Times." 
 
 The next senses I shall refer to, are touch and 
 resistance ; under which I shall adduce examples of 
 the beneficial results of this agency, in the cure of 
 abnormal exaltation or depression of these functions. 
 There are few diseases more striking in their mani- 
 festations, or more important in their character and 
 tendency, than those included in this class, namely, 
 paralysis of sense or motion, or both ; or the reverse, 
 exalted feeling, and tonic or clonic spasm. 
 
 Tic doloureux is well known to be one of the most 
 agonizing affections to which the human frame is 
 liable. It may arise from a functional disorder of the 
 
 exactly in the direction the rose was thrown, when suddenly 
 her limbs and entire body shook with a tremulous motion, and 
 she stooped slightly, and evinced the utmost terror. Mr 
 Braid explained that this was occasioned by the rattling of a 
 carriage over the pavement under the window partly, and 
 partly by a feeling of insecurity, arising from the boards on 
 which she stood being limber, and yielding considerably to 
 the foot. When the noise of the carriage had ceased, she 
 turned her face about till it pointed in the direction 
 where Mr Townend stood, when, though he held the rose at 
 a distance of three yards from her, she evidently caught the 
 -out, and darted towards it with unerring precision, and 
 appeared almost to revel with delight hi its fragrance. A 
 midden burst of applause from the audience, quick as thought, 
 dissipated the charm, and she stood aghast, apparently in an 
 agony of terror. Mr laughed, and attempted to con- 
 vey to a small circle around him the impression that all this 
 was feigned, but the attempt was disregarded. In the very 
 front of the company, and amongst those most narrowly
 
 TIC DOLOUREUX. 199 
 
 nervous system, of a local or more general character, 
 or from an organic cause. The symptoms are much 
 the same in both varieties, but the chances of effecting 
 a cure are very different. In the former variety, a 
 cure may be effected, and by no means I know, so 
 speedily and certainly as by hypnotism ; but in the 
 latter, the chances of success are very different, either 
 from this or any other known remedy. I have 
 repeatedly applied it in the one case, without any 
 apparent effect, either good or bad, but, in the other, 
 with the most immediate and striking advantage. I 
 give a few cases in illustration of this success in func- 
 tional disorder. 
 
 Case XIII. W. M'Leod had been suffering for two 
 months from a violent attack of tic of the head and 
 
 watching the experiments, were the Dean of Manchester, the 
 Rev. C. D. Wray, the Rev. N. W. Gibson, the Rev. H. 
 Ethelston, Colonel Wemyss, and a number of others whom 
 we might mention, including several surgeons, who were 
 capable of forming an opinion of their own, and we heard 
 from several of them expressions at once of surprise at the 
 phenomena, and of conviction that they were real. In fact, 
 it was the conviction of common sense, since it would have 
 been far more wonderful as a piece of trickery than as Mr 
 Braid accounts for it. Every one must have felt that it was 
 impossible for any person in a natural state to follow a flower 
 about the stage blindfolded, (supposing the patient was 
 awake,) passed about as it was from hand to hand backwards 
 and forwards, with such ease, certainty, and rapidity ; but 
 taking Mr Braid's solution of the difficulty, that the senses 
 are unnaturally exalted, the mystery is at an end. The only 
 thing extraordinary that then remains is, that such an agency 
 should not before have been discovered."
 
 200 CASKS OF TIC. 
 
 face, which had resisted the treatment prescribed by 
 his surgeon. He had been taking carbonate of iron 
 in ample quantity. After eleven minutes' hypnotism, 
 he was aroused quite free from pain, and it never 
 returned in the same degree of violence, and by a few 
 repetitions of the same process, he was completely 
 cured, and has remained well for about a year. The 
 general state of his health required the aid of other 
 means, but the violence of the tic was overcome 
 before he took a single dose of medicine from me. 
 
 Case XIV. A young lady was suffering from a most 
 violent attack of tic doloureux, so much so, that I 
 heard her screams before entering the house. " The 
 paroxysms came on so frequently that she was roused 
 before I could succeed in hypnotizing her at first trial. 
 I now administered thirty drops of laudanum, in a 
 little water, sprinkled some over the poultice on her 
 face, and instantly commenced hypnotizing her 
 again. In five minutes she seemed to be in a com- 
 fortable sleep, the features perfectly placid, the respira- 
 tion calm, not a muscle seemed to move during the 
 time I remained in the room, (which was a quarter 
 of an hour,) whereas she had a violent paroxysm 
 every three minutes previously, contorting her whole 
 body, and when I examined her, after having been 
 down stairs a considerable time, she was lying in 
 exactly the same posture as when I left her, with 
 the same appearance of placid sleep. When I called 
 next morning I was told she had slept for five hours 
 and a half, and had had no return of tic after awaking. 
 As she was in the somnolent state, and the paroxysms 
 of pain suspended within five minutes, it is quite clear 
 this could not be due to the few drops of laudanum,
 
 CASES OF TIC. 201 
 
 as they could not have been adequate to arrest such a 
 violent complaint, at all events, not in the course of five 
 minutes. * 
 
 Case XV. Miss had been suffering severely 
 
 from tic for several weeks, and had several teeth ex- 
 
 * The following is the statement of the above case, attested 
 by Mr Mullard, druggist, who had been called to visit this 
 patient before my arrival, which I give because of some very 
 unwarrantable interference by other medical men, "I was 
 present with Miss G. when Mr Braid visited her, in conse- 
 quence of a violent pain in the face, coming on in severe 
 paroxysms, as occur in tic doloureux. I had applied poultices, 
 and had other means in readiness, but owing to the violence 
 of the pain, Mr Braid, the usual medical attendant of the 
 family, was sent for. Her screams were heard in my house, 
 during the paroxysms, and they recurred about every minute, 
 and lasted nearly a minute and a half, as nearly as I can re- 
 collect. Mr B. had an opportunity of hearing her on coming 
 into the house ; and shortly after being in her bedroom she 
 had a second attack. Mr B. now tried to hypnotize her in 
 his usual way, but she was roused by the violence of the 
 pain. He now gave her a few drops in water, and sprinkled 
 a few over the poultice, and applied it to the cheek again, 
 and immediately repeated his operation, after which she 
 seemed to be in a sound sleep, and gave no farther indication 
 of pain in less than five minutes. Mr Braid, as well as my- 
 self, remained a considerable time, at least three quarters of 
 an hour, and both left convinced she was comfortably asleep, 
 and next morning I heard she had passed a good night, having 
 slept about five and a half hours, and that the tic had not 
 returned since we left. Every word of this has been care- 
 fully read and considered before being signed. 
 
 (Signed) A. T. MULLARD." 
 
 21it June, 1842.
 
 202 PARALYSIS OF SENSE 
 
 tracted without relief. During a violent paroxysm, I 
 succeeded in hypnotizing her, and when aroused, it 
 was quite gone, and has never returned. 
 
 In the affection to which these cases belong, there 
 is frequently such irritability of the skin, that a slight 
 touch over tho affected nerve is quite sufficient to ex- 
 cite a paroxysm of pain. I shall now adduce some 
 cases illustrative of the opposite condition, when there 
 was deficiency or entire loss of feeling ; and which 
 have nevertheless been greatly benefited, or entirely 
 cured by hypnotism. The following case is illustra- 
 tive of its successful application where there was 
 paralysis both of sense and motion. 
 
 Case XVI. Mrs Slater, 33 years of age, in the 
 autumn of 1841, had suffered a good deal during 
 her pregnancy, and in December of that year was 
 delivered of a seven months' child. From this period, 
 her legs, which had been very weak for some time 
 previously, became very much worse, and in a short 
 time she lost all voluntary power over them, together 
 with loss of natural feeling. She had been under the 
 care of three professional gentlemen, but as she be- 
 came worse instead of better, notwithstanding the 
 means used, the case had been considered hopeless, 
 and left to itself, for some time previous to my being 
 consulted, which was on the 22d April, 1842. I found 
 she had not only lost feeling and voluntary motion of 
 her legs and feet, but that the knees were rigidly 
 flexed, the heels drawn up, the toes flexed, and the 
 feet incurvated, and fixed in the position of slight 
 club foot (varus.) She had not menstruated since 
 her confinement, but there was no other function as 
 regarded the secretions or excretions, which appeared
 
 AND MOTION CURED. 203 
 
 to be at fault. Her speech was imperfect and her 
 memory impaired. I hypnotized her, and endeavour- 
 ed, whilst in that condition, to regulate the morbid 
 action of the muscles, and malposition of the feet and 
 legs. In five minutes I roused her, when she thanked 
 God she now felt she had feet, could feel the floor with 
 them, and could move her toes. I now raised her on 
 her feet, and with the assistance of her husband sup- 
 porting her by the one arm, and myself by the other, 
 she went across the room and back again to the sofa, 
 moving her legs and supporting half the weight of 
 her body on them. I operated on her again the same 
 evening, after which she was able to support herself 
 standing with the soles of her feet on the floor. 
 She required merely to be steadied by placing the 
 points of the fingers of one of my hands against her 
 back. Before being operated on, the heels were drawn 
 up, and the feet twisted so that she could only have 
 touched the floor with a small portion of the outer edge 
 of the feet, near the root of the little toes. I hyp- 
 notized her in the same manner daily for some time 
 with increasing improvement, so that in a week she 
 was able to walk in to her shop alone, merely requiring 
 to steady herself by the wall, and in two weeks more 
 she could walk into it without any assistance whatever. 
 Two months from my first seeing her, she went to 
 Liverpool, and was able to walk several miles in a 
 day. She could walk from the middle of the town 
 where she lodged, to the pier head and back, and 
 from her lodgings to Everton and back, all in the 
 same day, which was several miles partly on very 
 steep acclivities. She had no relapse, and hag con- 
 tinued well ever since.
 
 204 SAMUEL EVANS'S 
 
 In a very few days after I first operated on this 
 patient, the catamenial discharge appeared for the 
 first time since her confinement. She had no internal 
 medicine, nor external application whatever to her 
 legs for several days after I first saw her. Her extra- 
 ordinary improvement, therefore, resulted entirely 
 from the effects of the operations. After I had 
 attended her some days, she required some simple 
 aperient medicine, and I afterwards prescribed a diu- 
 retic, which I hoped might expedite the cure. The 
 feeling and power of her legs and feet were greatly 
 restored, her speech perfect, and her memory much 
 improved, before she had a single dose of medicine 
 from me. Her improvement therefore was strictly 
 the result of hypnotism only. 
 
 The extraordinary effects manifested in this case, 
 as well as in many others, after a few minutes' opera- 
 tion so different from what is realized in the appli- 
 cation of ordinary means may appear startling to 
 those unacquainted with the powers of hypnotism. 
 On this account, I have been advised to conceal the 
 facts, as many may consider it impossible, and reject 
 the less startling, although not more true reports of its 
 beneficial action in other cases. In recording cases, 
 however, I consider it my duty to report facts as I 
 have found them, and to make no compromise for the 
 sake of accommodating them to the preconceived 
 notions or prejudices of any one. 
 
 Case' XVII. Samuel Evans, 45 years of age, had 
 suffered much from pain in the spine, and also been 
 afflicted with impaired feeling as well as power of the 
 superior extremities for four years. He suffered also 
 occasionally in the head, for which he had undergone
 
 GREAT IMPROVEMENT. 206 
 
 every variety of treatment usual in such cases, under 
 many medical men, myself included, but with so 
 little success that he had not been able to dress him- 
 self for five years : he could not lift the left arm, and 
 natural feeling was almost entirely gone from it. The 
 right arm was also affected, but in a less degree, when 
 he applied to me on the 25th April, 1842. I hypno- 
 tized him, and he was so fully satisfied with the im- 
 provement he experienced, as to induce him to come 
 to Manchester to be operated on daily. In a very 
 short time his improvement, both as regarded strength 
 and feeling, was most decided, as he could lift a heavy 
 chair with the worst arm, and could feel a small 
 object such as a pin, which could not have been dis- 
 tinguished by him with that hand when I first saw 
 him. The pain in his back was also speedily much 
 relieved. He was exhibited at my conversazione to 
 the British Association, 29th June, 1842, in this im- 
 proved state, and has made still farther progress since, 
 although not yet able to follow his usual avocation. 
 I should not omit to add, that this patient was under 
 my own care for some time in 1841, when, although 
 he derived benefit from the means used, he was not 
 nearly so much or so rapidly relieved, as by my pre- 
 sent mode of treatment by hypnotism. 
 
 Case XVIII. Mr 58 years of age, consulted 
 
 me in consequence of a paralytic affection of two 
 and a-half years' standing. Stated by his friends 
 that he had had an apoplectic seizure two years and 
 a-half before, which was at first accompanied with 
 total loss of consciousness, and of sense and mo- 
 tion of the right side for six weeks. He then gradually
 
 206 MISS MELLOR S 
 
 recovered, so as to be able to walk a little in the 
 course of four or five months. When he called on me 
 3d June, 1842, his gait was very feeble and insecure, 
 always advancing the right side foremdst, his arm 
 had always been supported in a sling, he could raise it 
 with an effort as high as the breast, had not the power 
 of opening the hand, the thumb was much and rigidly 
 flexed. Had little or no feeling in that hand. After 
 being hypnotized for five minutes, feeling was restored, 
 he could open the hand and grasp much firmer, and 
 raise it to his forehead. His speech, which had been 
 very imperfect, was also much improved. This patient 
 was operated on for some time with partial improve- 
 ment, so that he could manage his arm without a 
 sling, and the feeling continued improved, and there 
 was also slight improvement in his gait, but I was of 
 opinion, that there was organic mischief in the brain 
 which would prevent a perfect restoration, and there- 
 fore discontinued farther trials. 
 
 Case XIX. Miss Sarah Mellor had been under my 
 care for nine months, for an affection of the lower 
 part of the spine, accompanied with pain and weak- 
 ness of the lower limbs, and with contraction of 
 the knees, so that she had been unable to stand or 
 walk without crutches during that period. I had used 
 every means usually adopted in such cases, but instead 
 of improving, she was getting worse in every respect, 
 till I tried hypnotism, the satisfactory results of 
 which were too immediate and apparent to admit of 
 the slightest doubt of its great value on this occasion. 
 The following is a statement attested by the patient : 
 
 " Had suffered severe pain in my ankles, with con-
 
 REMARKABLE IMPROVEMENT. 207 
 
 traction of the knees, and pain at the bottom of my 
 back, so that I had been unable to walk without a 
 pair of crutches for nine months. During this period, 
 I had taken medicines internally, used liniments to 
 the legs and spine, been leeched and blistered over 
 the lower part of the spine, but still, instead of im- 
 proving, I was getting worse, both as regarded the 
 pain and contraction, so that I was becoming quite 
 deformed, from the legs being bent on the thighs, and 
 they on the body. I was thus about nine or ten 
 inches less in stature than formerly, and than I am 
 now. About the beginning of last March (1842) I 
 came to Mr Braid, who had prescribed the other 
 means to me without benefit, when he said he would 
 try his new method with me. After being hypnotized 
 three times, I was able to walk from my lodgings to 
 the house of a friend who lived a few houses distant 
 in the same street WITHOUT MY CRUTCHES, and in two 
 days after, from that house to Mr Braid's WITHOUT 
 CRUTCHES. I was operated on almost daily for three 
 weeks, when I returned home, and at that time I was 
 able to walk half a mile without crutches. After being 
 at home five weeks, I returned to Manchester, and 
 have been attended by Mr Braid for two months, and 
 always found myself better after the operations. I 
 took no medicine during my first stay in Manchester ; 
 and on this occasion having only done so when re- 
 quired for a violent cold on two occasions, from im- 
 prudent exposure. Since I came to Manchester last, 
 one day I walked to Grosvenor Street, Piccadilly, and 
 back again to my lodgings in Lower Mosley Street, 
 fully a mile and a half, without inconvenience ; on 
 another occasion to Hulme and back again, fully two
 
 208 MRS J/S CASE. 
 
 miles. I was quite sensible, and could hear all that was 
 said or done during all the operations. 
 
 (Signed) SARAH ANN MELLOR. 
 
 JANE LIVESEY, Witness. 
 C. WILSON, Witness." 
 MANCHESTER 12th July, 1842. 
 
 This patient was exhibited at my conversazione 
 29th June, 1842. After returning home, she had the 
 misfortune to get entangled by one of the feet in a 
 cart rut, in a lane, which threw her back, but having 
 returned and been hypnotized, I was enabled to send 
 her homo much improved, and when she called on 
 me lately, she continued so. 
 
 Case XX. Mrs J., 29 years of age, requested 
 my attendance, 17th February, 1842. Had been 
 attacked in the autumn of 1840, with slight degree 
 of weakness of left side, and difficulty of speech, 
 neither of which had ever been entirely removed. 
 Three months after she was delivered of a still-born 
 child, and had been affected with convulsions ten days 
 prior to delivery, for which she seemed to have been 
 treated in the usual manner. In about a month after 
 delivery, 31st January, 1841, she had an apoplectic 
 attack, attended with total loss of consciousness, and 
 paralysis of the left side, for which her medical atten- 
 dant had prescribed the usual treatment. I was called 
 to attend her on the 17th February, and continued 
 to do so for five weeks, when, as as there was no 
 particular improvement manifested, she passed into 
 other hands, and after being under treatment with 
 them for ten weeks, without improving, she was .sent 
 into the country, where she remained for about
 
 REMARKABLE IMPROVEMENT. 209 I 
 
 thirteen months, when she was brought back to town 
 to be placed under my care, loth June, 1842. The 
 following \\-as her condition at this period. Her 
 mouth very much drawn to the right side ; her speech 
 very imperfect ; and her mind confused. The left 
 hand and arm were quite powerless, and rigidly fixed 
 to the side, the hand clenched, the fingers and thumb 
 being rigidly and permanently flexed. The left leg 
 very rigid, the heel drawn up, and the foot twisted so 
 that it could only approach the ground by resting on 
 the outer edge near the root of the little toe ; she 
 could move this leg a little, but had never been able 
 to stand, or walk a step, or support any weight on it. 
 I hypnotized her, though owing to her mind being 
 so confused, I experienced considerable difficulty in 
 getting her to attend to the necessary instructions 
 for producing the condition. However, I at length 
 succeeded, and after the first operation I kept her 
 in the hypnotic state for ten minutes she could 
 hold her mouth much straighter, could move the 
 fingers a little, and lift the hand and arm a few 
 inches, and, with the assistance of her mother-in- 
 law and myself supporting her by the arms, she 
 was able to support half the weight of her body in 
 walking across the room and back again. Her 
 speech was also improved, and she evinced less 
 confusion of mind. Next day I found the improve- 
 ment was permanent, and hypnotized her again with 
 advantage. 17th, Found her improved, and still 
 more so after being again operated on. She could 
 now, on merely steadying herself by laying hold of 
 her mother-in-law's shoulder, stand supporting her- 
 self on the left leg, when the right foot was lifted 
 o
 
 210 TERMINATES IN APOPLEXY. 
 
 clear from the floor. Her speech was still more im- 
 proved, and mind more collected, so that I had very 
 little difficulty in hypnotizing her uow. 
 
 She was operated on daily, with advantage, till the 
 end of that month, and the results shewn to some of 
 the most eminent professional and scientific gentle- 
 men in this town. During the next two months she 
 was operated on at times only, being so much better. 
 In a few weeks she could walk to the door, steadying 
 herself against the wall, and in a few weeks was able 
 to walk into the street with the aid of a crutch. She 
 had n6 medicine during this attendance. I only saw 
 her occasionally now, and on the 17th September, when 
 I had not seen her for nine days before, whilst taking 
 her usual airing in the street, she was seized with 
 apoplexy, from which she died within sixteen hours. 
 On inspection, the whole of the superior and anterior 
 lobes of the right side of the brain were found to bo 
 in a state of atrophy, only a thin layer, and that in a 
 state of ramolissement, covering the ventricle, which 
 was filled with serum, as was also the space between 
 the pia mater and arachnoid, to make up the space 
 vacated by the wasting of the cerebral substance. 
 There was no effusion of blood. It is not at all surpris- 
 ing that such a case should have resisted former treat- 
 ment, or proved fatal at last ; but it seems surprising 
 that, with such a state of brain, hypnotism should 
 have had the power of producing so much improve- 
 ment as it did. 
 
 Case XXI. 14th June, 1842, Mr Thomas Morris, 
 42 years of age, consulted me. He had had a pa- 
 ralytic stroke fifteen years previously, which de- 
 prived him entirely of the use of the right leg, and
 
 MR MORRIS'S CASE. 211 
 
 rendered the left weak and numb. In six weeks was 
 able to walk a little, but never recovered entirely, 
 being always weak and lame. Fifteen months ago 
 had a second attack, with total loss of consciousness 
 for a week, and also complete loss of voluntary power 
 of the whole body. For several weeks required the 
 urine to be drawn off by catheter. He has lately 
 had the urine passing involuntarily sometimes, at 
 other times voided with great difficulty. He has 
 never regained the power of his legs so as to enable 
 him to stand or walk without assistance ; and has 
 been, for the last six months, growing worse. The 
 arms very weak, being unable to raise the right 
 higher than the head, and even that accomplished 
 with great difficulty. Speech also very imperfect, and 
 his ideas so confused that he could make himself 
 understood with great difficulty. Hypnotized him 
 for five minutes, when he could speak much better ; 
 could raise his arm and hold an umbrella perpendicu- 
 larly, or horizontally, with his body, with perfect 
 ease, and could walk across the room, and back 
 again, WITHOUT ASSISTANCE, for the first time since last 
 seizure. 
 
 (Signed) THOS. MORRIS. 
 Witnessed by JOHN SHIPLEY. 
 
 Duncan Street, Strangeways. 
 
 C. C. MORRIS. 
 
 JOHN W. PACEY. 
 
 JAMES BRAID, Junior. 
 
 15th, Had the pleasure of finding the improve- 
 ment noted above was permanent, and also, that he 
 had been able to retain his urine and void it at pleasure,
 
 212 MR MORRIS'S PROGRESS. 
 
 whereas it had been passing involuntarily, both by 
 night and day, immediately before being hypnotized. 
 He was again hypnotized to-day with additional 
 advantage. 17th, Found him still better, having 
 been able to walk in the street with one stick for the 
 first time for last five years. Repeated the operation. 
 18th, Still better, so that, with the aid of his two 
 sticks, he had walked into Ducie Street by himself. 
 Operation repeated. 
 
 This patient went on improving, and on the 29th 
 Juno was exhibited at my conversazione. His speech 
 was greatly better immediately after first operation, 
 and his ideas seemed more vivid and clear. He was 
 also able to sign his name, and which he did very 
 well, for the first time since his last seizure. Nor 
 should I omit to add, that he had regained power over 
 the rectum, which he had not previously ; and in 
 about ten days he had got sufficient power of his 
 hands to enable him to work. After he was con- 
 siderably recovered he had the misfortune to fall, and 
 injured the lower part of the back very much, which 
 impaired the recently acquired power of the legs. 
 They are somewhat better, but not nearly so well as 
 they were a few weeks after he had been under my 
 care. His arms, however, still retain their increased 
 power, as I saw him lately lift a bed-room chair with 
 the right arm, and hold it up nearly at full arm's 
 length ; and the mind keeps pretty clear, much more 
 so than before being hypnotized, notwithstanding he 
 has had a severe attack of bowel complaint, from 
 which ho has been liable to suffer occasionally. 
 
 It would be difficult to adduce a more striking 
 proof than the above, of the extraordinary power of
 
 s. EDWARD'S CASE. 213 
 
 hypnotism, there having been so many points at 
 fault, all of which were immediately meliorated, and 
 some of them permanently so. 
 
 Case XXI. Mr John W., 21 years of age, called 
 to consult me, 18th April, 1842, for a paralytic state 
 of the left side of the face, of thirteen days' standing. 
 He had no power of the muscles of the left side of 
 the face, consequently the mouth was drawn to the 
 right, and he had no power of closing the left eyelid. 
 In ten minutes after being hypnotized, and fric- 
 tion used, he could open and close the eyelid with 
 facility, and had the power of retracting his mouth to 
 the left of the mesial plane. 
 
 Case XXIII. llth July, was consulted by Samuel 
 Edwards, who had been unable to work for six weeks, 
 in consequence of a paralytic state of the extensor 
 muscles of the wrist, and a semi-paralytic state of the 
 flexor and extensor muscles of the fingers. He had 
 injured the arm by a heavy lift, and by a blow 
 about two years before. The paralytic state came on 
 suddenly about six weeks previously to my seeing 
 him, accompanied by a tingling or prickling feeling 
 in the fingers. I hypnotized him, calling into action 
 the weak and entirely paralytic muscles in the best 
 way I could. In consequence of this, he acquired the 
 power of flexing and extending the wrist, when the 
 arm was held horizontally with the ulna downwards, 
 and of grasping pretty firmly with the fingers, imme- 
 diately after the first operation, which he could not 
 do before, as witnessed by several highly respectable 
 individuals who were present the whole time. On 
 the evening of the following day, he was able to milk 
 a cow with this hand, and when he called on me two
 
 214 s. EDWARD'S CASE. 
 
 days after, I found him greatly improved. I operated 
 on him again with additional advantage, and found 
 him able to grasp so firmly that he could hold a single 
 finger fast enough to enable him to be thus pulled 
 from his seat without losing his hold. 
 
 He had undergone various treatment, including 
 blistering, under two surgeons before I saw him. 
 
 17th July, 1842, he called on me, and had still 
 greater power of the hand. After being again hypno- 
 tized, he could readily lift the one side of a heavy 
 library table with the hand, which was quite power- 
 less when I first saw him six days before. He stated, 
 he had been able to work with it constantly from the 
 time I saw him, on the 14th. 
 
 31st, He called on me, stated he had been improv- 
 ing. Was hypnotized once more. 
 
 August 7th, he called on me, and the first thing he 
 did was to hold out his arm at full length, and shew 
 me he could bend and extend the wrist, whilst the 
 arm was in the state of pronation. He had been able 
 to do so for some days. Had been able to milk five 
 cows the day previous. Hypnotized him again, after 
 which he had still more power. He has not required 
 to call on mo since, being nine months ago. This 
 patient must have continued well, as I have heard 
 nothing more of him, which I was to do if he had any 
 relapse. 
 
 I could easily multiply cases of successful practice 
 in the treatment of paralysis by hypnotism, were it 
 not for occupying too much space. I shall, therefore, 
 condense a fw. 
 
 XXIV. A gentleman sixty years of age had a par- 
 alytic stroke two years and a half before consulting
 
 ADDITIONAL CASES. 215 
 
 me, which deprived him entirely of the use of the 
 right arm, and enfeebled the right side and leg. When 
 he called on me, he walked very feebly, could scarcely 
 close the fingers and thumb, and could not extend 
 them fully. He could with great difficulty raise the 
 hand as high as the pit of the stomach, the pupil of 
 the right eye was considerably larger than the left, 
 and not quite circular ; speech very imperfect. After 
 being hypnotized for five minutes, he was able to open 
 and close the hand freely, and to raise the hand above 
 the head, and pass it to the back of the head, and he 
 could also walk and speak much better. Pulse regular, 
 before operation, his pulse was very irregular. When 
 he called on me next morning, I found the improve- 
 ment had been permanent. I hypnotized him once 
 more with advantage, and again on the two following 
 days ; seven weeks afterwards he called on me, when 
 I found the improvement was permanent. He could 
 speak and walk much better, could raise the arm, and 
 move the fingers and hand freely, could pass the 
 hand above and over the head, and take off his hat 
 with it. The right pupil also was quite circular now, 
 and nearly the same size as the other. 
 
 Case XXV. 4th June, 1842, Mr J. H., 67 years of 
 age, had a paralytic stroke, 19 months previously, 
 which deprived him entirely of speech, and of motion 
 of right leg and arm. When he called on me, his 
 speech was very imperfect, his hearing dull, and he 
 had very little power in closing the hand, could raise 
 the hand to the mouth, said he could sometimes raise 
 it a little higher, but never so high as his head. After 
 being hypnotized for five minutes, he could speak and 
 hear much, better, could grasp much stronger, and
 
 216 THOMAS JOHNS-TONE'S CASE. 
 
 would raise the hand afoot above the head, and put his 
 coat on without assistance, passing it over his head. 
 His walking was also much firmer. He seemed greatly 
 pleased with being able to put his coat on, as it was 
 the first time since his seizure. He was also able to 
 sign his name for the first time, to attest the accuracy 
 of my report of his case, which he did before two wit- 
 nesses who had been present during the operation. 
 He called on me twice after this, the last time two 
 weeks from his first visit, when I found the improve- 
 ment was permanent. 
 
 Case XXVI. Thomas Johnstone, 36 years of age, 
 had a paralytic seizure, 13th February, 1842, which 
 deprived him of feeling and motion of left arm and 
 hand. Had partially recovered motion so as to be 
 able occasionally to move the fingers a little, and to 
 raise the arm nearly to the horizontal position, but 
 frequently was suddenly struck with pain and total 
 loss of power of the arm, and hand, and fingers, for 
 four or five hours after. Had been struck in this way 
 just before I saw him, and he w r as quite powerless, as 
 above described, or rather the arm was spasmodically 
 fixed to the side ; had been under medical treatment 
 ever since his first seizure. 4th May, 1842, hypno- 
 tized him for four minutes, after which he could move 
 the fingers, hand, and arm freely, elevating it above 
 his head, across his body in either direction, and 
 could retain it in any situation he was asked. The 
 feeling, however, was still very imperfect. 6th May, 
 called on mo to go to my lecture, when he had the 
 complete control of the hand, arm, and fingers. He was 
 hypnotized in the lecture-room the same night, and 
 in four days after the feeling, as well as power, was
 
 MR HOLDITCH'S CASE. 217 
 
 restored to it. 26th, called on me again, and has per- 
 fect voluntary power of the arm, as well as natural 
 feeling and heat of the member. Attested as correct 
 by the patient. 
 
 (Signed by proxy to which the patient affixed 
 his mark) THOMAS JOHNSTONE. 
 
 Witnessed by JOHN HAKDING. 
 
 I have also a copy of a certificate of his condition 
 from the physician who attended him immediately 
 before he consulted me. On the 20th January, 1843, 
 his father informed me that his son had requested him 
 to call on me, and say he was in America, and had 
 remained well ever since I saw him, and, that he 
 wished his father to express how grateful he felt for 
 the benefit he had derived from my operations. 
 
 I shall only give one more case illustrative of this 
 class. 
 
 Case XXVII. Mr H., 39 years of age, had been 
 partially paralytic of the inferior extremities for ten 
 years, which came on some time after a fall, accom- 
 panied with double vision. The latter disappeared 
 under treatment, but the former increased. When he 
 called on me, 18th February, 1843, he was walking 
 with a crutch and stick, and with the assistance of 
 both and a servant, it was with great difficulty he 
 could ascend the few steps at my door. After the first 
 operation, he could walk across the room and back 
 again, without either crutch or stick, and after being 
 operated on next day, he was able to mount twenty- 
 eight steps to his bed-room without his crutch, and 
 has done so ever since. In ten days, I was agreeably 
 surprised to see him on the fourth bench of the lec- 
 ture-room of the Manchester Athenaeum, to which
 
 218 GENERAL SUCCESS. 
 
 he had ascended eighty-one steps, with the aid of a 
 stick in one hand. 
 
 This patient had not been aware, until I called his 
 attention to the fact, that he had very defective vision 
 of the right eye, and was surprised to find on testing 
 this, that when the left eye was closed, he could with 
 difficulty see the large heading of the leader of the 
 Medical Gazette, whereas he could read the ordinary 
 sized print of that article with the left. After being 
 operated on, he could read the small print of the leader 
 with the right eye also, at which he felt greatly sur- 
 prised, as well as at the increased power of his legs, 
 because, as he had been conscious all the time of the 
 operation, he could not believe I had done any thing 
 to him, till he found on trial he had been so much 
 benefited in both functions. 
 
 Here, then, we have the beneficial results most une- 
 quivocally ensuing even when the patient imagined 
 110 effect could have been induced. The improvement 
 in the sight has remained permanent, and he also 
 improved in the power of his limbs, till he had the 
 misfortune to fall, whilst carelessly looking at some- 
 thing when walking on the street one day. 
 
 In confirmation of the efficacy of a few minutes of 
 hypnotism, in curing many cases of paralysis, I 
 may refer to the reports of the Liverpool papers, 
 as to what took place at my lectures in that town in 
 April, 1842. There were hundreds who witnessed 
 the effects when I publicly operated on such patients, 
 who were entire strangers to me. Cases where the 
 patients had been for years powerless of limbs, so 
 that they could not unlock the clenched hands, nor 
 raise the arm to the chin, even with the aid of the
 
 MRS E.'s CASE. 219 
 
 other arm, have been enabled in eight or ten minutes, 
 to open the hand, and lift the arm above the head. 
 My intelligent friend, Mr Gardom, lately informed 
 me, he had treated a paralytic case most successfully 
 by hypnotism. 
 
 Case XXVII. Mrs E., thirty-seven years of age, 
 had a paralytic affection when thirteen months 
 old, which deprived her entirely of the use of the 
 right leg, which has never been recovered. At seven 
 years of age, she had a second attack, which deprived 
 her also of the use of the right arm, which was 
 recovered after nine months' professional attention to 
 it. At fifteen years of age she had a third attack, 
 which drew her face, and deprived her of speech for 
 some time, but was recovered from ; and she had no 
 farther attack of the sort till 8th January, 1842, (being 
 twenty-two years from former attack.) The latter 
 attack enfeebled the right arm, and completely para- 
 lyzed the whole of the left side. 
 
 Being of full habit, she was bled from the arm, had 
 active cathartics, leeches, and blisters. In six days 
 there was improvement to this extent, that the right 
 hand could be raised as high as the shoulder, the left 
 arm could be moved feebly, and the hand closed 
 feebly and slowly. When sitting on a chair, the left 
 leg could be moved with great difficulty, so as to 
 raise the heel from the ground. I hypnotized her, 
 and in five or six minutes she could raise her right 
 hand and arm above her head, could move the left arm 
 freely, and grasp firmly, and could raise the left leg so 
 as to place the heel eighteen inches from the ground. 
 Next day she was able to walk across the floor with 
 her one crutch. A pain in the knee induced her to
 
 _':'n MISS E. ATKINSON'S CASE 
 
 avoid walking afterwards, but in three weeks she could 
 walk quite cleverly as before last attack. 
 
 The other cases were all in the chronic state, of 
 long standing, and had resisted all ordinary means, 
 and the restorative powers of nature and time, and 
 yet we have seen what extraordinary powers can be 
 exerted, and effects produced, in such cases by hypno- 
 tism. The latter proves its superior efficacy, to other 
 means, in more recent cases. 
 
 Case XXVIII. I shall conclude the subject of 
 paralysis with the following most interesting case. 
 The subject of it was Miss Atkinson, a middle-aged 
 and very intelligent lady, and I shall give the case as 
 recorded by herself in a letter she was so obliging as 
 to furnish me with, for the purpose of publication in 
 this work. 
 
 LETTER FROM Miss E. ATKINSON, 
 (of the Priory, Lincoln.) 
 
 u MOSLEY ARMS, MANCHESTER. 
 Monday, 4tA July, 1842. 
 
 " Dear Sir, I have very great pleasure in furnishing 
 you with a statement of my case. I beg you will 
 make whatever use of it you think proper, and most 
 sincerely do I wish that it may lead others suffering 
 from disorders on the nerves, to seek relief from the 
 same source, and with the same success. 
 
 " In January, 1838, 1 was attacked with cold and 
 influenza, accompanied by a violent cough, on the 
 29th of this month. Ten or twelve days after the 
 first attack, without any previous warning, my voice
 
 OF RESTORATION OF VOICE. 221 
 
 left me instantaneously, and I could not utter a sound 
 louder than the faintest -whisper. For three weeks I 
 had no medical advice, hoping daily, from my igno- 
 rance of the nature of the complaint, that my voice 
 would return ; but being disappointed, and feeling my 
 health and strength declining, I consulted Mr Howitt, 
 an experienced and eminent surgeon in Lincoln, who 
 immediately requested I would confine myself to my 
 own lodging-room, which was to be kept at a regular 
 temperature. He prescribed such medicines as my 
 case required, and ordered blisters to my throat and 
 chest, which were kept open, until I became so com- 
 pletely debilitated that it was considered necessary to 
 discontinue them. Towards the latter end of April 
 my health was considerably improved, and I was 
 allowed to leave my room, though my voice was still 
 merely a feeble whisper. Shortly afterwards, I paid 
 a visit to a sister in York, whose family surgeon, Mr 
 Caleb Williams, a man in extensive practice, pre- 
 scribed for me, and took great interest in my case. 
 Soon after my return to Lincoln, I consulted Mr 
 Joseph Swan, 6, Tavistock Square, London, who 
 entirely approved of the treatment I had undergone, 
 and prescribed such additional remedies and medicines 
 as he thought would be beneficial. Since then he has 
 continued to visit me whenever he has been in the 
 country. Galvanism has been tried without pro- 
 ducing any effect ; electro-magnetism also, by a scien- 
 tific friend (not a medical man.) I have frequently 
 conversed with several other professional gentlemen, 
 who have also taken a great interest in my case. 
 They all agree in opinion that the attack was para- 
 lysis of the organs of voice, without disease ; and that
 
 222 MISS E. ATKINSON'S CASE 
 
 the treatment I have undergone has been most judi- 
 cious ; in fact, that every thing has been done for me 
 the medical profession could suggest. Every one of 
 them has told me, that when my health and strength 
 returned, there was every reason to believe I should 
 recover my voice. I remained in a very weak and 
 delicate state for some time, but have now been in 
 perfect health for more than twelve months, yet 
 without having the power of speaking above a 
 whisper. 
 
 ** I considered the recovery of my voice hopeless, 
 until hearing of the many cures you had performed 
 by hypnotism, I was induced to state my case to 
 you, and request your opinion as to the probability 
 of this system benefiting me. Your reply was, * If, 
 as seems to be the opinion of most of the profes- 
 sional gentlemen consulted, your loss of voice is 
 owing to i-.r/iaiiisfion of the nervous energy of the vocal 
 nerves, and not to positive destruction of any portion 
 of them, I consider my mode of operating is likely to be 
 very speedily successful. On the other hand, if there 
 ii positive destruction of the nervous substance, with 
 lou of continuity of the principal trunks of the nerves, it 
 will alter the chances very materially. However, as 
 this cannot be positively known without trial, and as 
 the extraordinary power we possess of rousing nervous 
 energy may be sufficient to enable the function to be 
 restored with a state of nerve which could not be of 
 service under any other agency, I should decidedly 
 give it as my opinion that it ought to be tried, as no 
 risk can attach to the trial, and a week or two ;it most, 
 will IKJ all the time required for giving it a fair trial.' 
 This raised my hopes; I came to Manchester on
 
 OF RESTORATION OF VOICE. 223 
 
 Tuesday the 28th of June. You operated on me twice 
 that evening, and twice each succeeding day, but 
 without producing any change on my voice until 
 Saturday, July 2d, when, on rousing me from the 
 hypnotic state, I spoke aloud without the slightest 
 effort. My voice was then weak ; you have continued 
 to operate on me until now, Monday morning, (4th 
 July,) and my voice is fully restored to its original 
 strength, with the power to vary its tone at will. 
 Thus has hypnotism given me back the power to 
 make myself understood by those to whom I address 
 myself, of which I had been deprived for the last four 
 and a half years. I have not suffered the slightest 
 pain or inconvenience while submitting to the opera- 
 tions, nor any unpleasant effects afterwards ; neither 
 did I ever once lose consciousness of all that was 
 passing around me. 
 
 "With heartfelt humble thanks to our heavenly 
 Father for this and every blessing, particularly for the 
 hitherto unknown power bestowed on man ; and with 
 deep gratitude to you for your kind attentive care 
 while so skilfully and successfully using this power 
 for the restoration of my voice, I beg you to believe 
 me, dear sir, yours very respectfully, and greatly 
 obliged, 
 
 " ELIZABETH ATKINSON. 
 
 It is but justice to the professional gentlemen who 
 had been consulted in this case prior to application 
 being made to me, to say, that I consider they had 
 treated the case most judiciously, according to our 
 previous experience in such cases; and it must be 
 interesting to them to find that in this agency our
 
 224 MISS B. ATKINSON'S CASE 
 
 art has acquired a new and efficient resource for such 
 cases. 
 
 This case is interesting in many points of view. ' 
 The circumstance of the patient having been operated 
 on twice each day successively, that is, eight times, 
 without any visible improvement for I had her 
 tested before and after each operation and being 
 able to speak aloud, without effort, on being roused 
 from the hypnotic condition on the fifth day, is suffi- 
 cient proof that the improvement was not the effect of 
 imagination, but of the physical condition induced by 
 carrying the operation farther. Any effect to have 
 been anticipated from mere mental emotion, we should 
 have expected to have been greatest at first, and to 
 have become less and less as the party became 
 familiar with such operations. Here, however, it was 
 quite the reverse. I found, on testing the patient on 
 the 2d of July, immediately before being operated on, 
 that no improvement had been effected from the for- 
 mer operations, (she had been operated on eight 
 times,) and therefore resolved to carry it farther that 
 time ; and the result was, as noted above, that on 
 being aroused she spoke aloud without effort. It is 
 also important, as corroborating the statement of 
 many others who have been cured of various obstinate 
 complaints by hypnotism, that they could hear quite 
 diilinctly, and retained consciousness the whole time, of 
 all that was going on around them. In some cases, 
 however, it is necessary to carry it to the ulterior 
 stage, or that of insensibility. 
 
 On the 19th October, 1842, I had the pleasure of 
 receiving a letter from Miss E. Atkinson, from which 
 I make the following extract, in proof of the perma-
 
 POWER OF IMAGINATION. 225 
 
 nency of the cure. " You will be glad to hear that I 
 have retained my voice without any intermission, 
 since I left you. The only difference is, that it has 
 become stronger ; and my health is in every respect 
 perfectly good." I had also the pleasure of hearing 
 from a friend, a few days ago, that she still continues 
 well, and it is now nine months and a half since her 
 voice was restored. 
 
 I doubt not there may be some who, on reading the 
 cases I have recorded in this treatise, will be disposed 
 to appeal to the well-known fact, that various com- 
 plaints have been suddenly cured by mere mental 
 emotion, hoping thus to throw discredit on the cura- 
 tive powers of hypnotism. Whilst I grant the 
 premises, I deny the justness of the inference. That 
 I may meet the subject fairly, I shall now quote some 
 of the most remarkable cases of the sort which have 
 been recorded. " Dr Gregory was accustomed to 
 relate the case of a naval officer, who had been for 
 some time laid up in his cabin, and entirely unable to 
 move, from a violent attack of gout, when notice was 
 brought to him that the vessel was on fire ; in a few 
 minutes he was on deck, and the most active man in 
 the ship. Cases of a still more astonishing kind are 
 on record. A woman, mentioned by Diemerbroeck, 
 who had been many years paralytic, recovered the 
 use of her limbs when she was very much terrified 
 during a thunder-storm, and was making violent 
 efforts to escape from a chamber in which she had 
 been left alone. A man, affected in the same manner, 
 recovered as suddenly when his house was on fire ; 
 and another, who had been ill for six years, recovered 
 the use of his paralytic limbs during a violent paroxysm
 
 226 POWER OF IMAGINATION. 
 
 of anger." Abercrombie on the Intellectual Powers, 
 pp. 398-9. 
 
 To these might have been added the influence of 
 the sight of a tooth key or forceps, or even the 
 approach to the house of a dentist, in curing tooth- 
 ache. 
 
 Now, what are the legitimate conclusions to be 
 drawn from the history of such cases? Is it not 
 simply this, that such results are possible, and that 
 they can be effected by different means f Now, as it 
 is apparent that analogous results can be induced by 
 hypnotism, I would ask is hypnotism not quite a 
 convenient and desirable a remedy as setting a ship on 
 fire, raising a thunder-storm, converting the patient's 
 house into a bonfire, or exciting him into "a violent 
 paroxysm of anger?" 
 
 Again, of those who talk so much about the power 
 of imagination, I would ask, what is it ? How does 
 imagination act to produce such extraordinary and 
 contradictory results ? For example, the mental emo- 
 tions of joy and sorrow, love and hatred, fear and 
 courage, benevolence and anger, may all arise either 
 from real, or from imaginary causes only, and may 
 seriously affect the physical frame. In many in- 
 stances these different and opposite emotions have 
 proved almost instantly fatal ; in other instances 
 equally sanative. How is this achieved ? Are not 
 the whole of the emotions accompanied by remark- 
 able physical changes, in respect to the respiration 
 and circulation as well as sensation ? Are they not 
 highly excited in one class, and depressed in the 
 other? And may not this act as the proximate cause 
 in effecting the permanently benef rial results during
 
 RHEUMATISM. 227 
 
 hypnotism ? As already explained, analogous physi- 
 cal results can be produced by hypnotism ; and it 
 is no valid reason why we should not profit by it in 
 the treatment of disease, that we cannot positively 
 decide as to its modus operandi. It seems quite evi- 
 dent that we have acquired, in hypnotism, a more 
 ready and certain control over the physical manifes- 
 tations referred to, and which can be turned to useful 
 purposes, than by any mode of acting on the imagi- 
 nation only, which has hitherto been devised. 
 
 Rheumatism is another affection, for the relief of 
 which I have found hypnotism a most valuable 
 remedy. I have met with some cases of rheumatism, 
 however, which have resisted this, as they had every 
 other method tried ; and others, where it afforded only 
 temporary relief ; but I am warranted in saying, that 
 I have, on the whole, seen far more success, more 
 rapid and decided relief, follow this mode of treatment, 
 than any other. It has been chiefly in chronic cases 
 in which I have tried it. In its application, I first 
 induce the somnolent state, and then call into action 
 the different muscles which I consider directly affected, 
 or which, by being so called into action, are calculated 
 to change the capillary circulation and nervous sensi- 
 bility of the part implicated. The patient must be 
 retained in such position a longer or shorter time, ac- 
 cording to circumstances. The following cases will 
 illustrate the effects of this mode of treatment : 
 
 Case XXIX. Joseph Barnet, near Hope Inn,Heaton 
 Norris, Stockport, 62 years of age, called to consult me 
 on the 10th December, 1841, for a severe rheumatic 
 affection of the back, hip, and leg, of thirteen years'
 
 228 RHEUMATISM. 
 
 standing, which had been so severe, that he had not 
 been able to earn a day's wages during that period. 
 He h.id been equally a stranger to comfort by day, as 
 to refreshing sleep by night. He came to me leaning 
 feebly over his stick, suffering anguish at every step, or 
 movement of his body. He was treated at the com- 
 mencement of his complaint by a surgeon ; but feeling 
 no relief, like many others similarly afflicted, he had 
 recourse to all sort of nostrums, and also to hot salt 
 water baths. I hypnotized him, placing him in such 
 attitudes as his particular case required, and in fifteen 
 minutes aroused him, when he was able to bend his 
 body freely, and not only to walk, but even to run. 
 He called on me in a few days after, when he stated 
 he had slept comfortably, and been perfectly easy 
 from the time he left me till the night before. I 
 hypnotized him again with advantage, and a few more 
 times sufficed to restore him entirely. This patient 
 was seen, and bore testimony to these facts, at two of 
 my lectures. After one of them, from being too late 
 for the coach, he walked home, a distance of six miles. 
 This was by no means judicious, but proves iucontes- 
 tably his great improvement. 
 
 I was not at that time so well aware, as I have been 
 since, of the great power of hypnotism in such cases, and 
 therefore ordered him some medicine after the first ope- 
 rations; but from observingthat the relief immediately 
 followed the operation before taking medicine, and that 
 the pain returned in some degree the night before next 
 risit, and when, had there been benefit resulting/rom 
 the medicine, it ought to have been diminished after using 
 it, and that relief was again afforded during the hyp-
 
 RHEUMATISM. 229 
 
 notism, I felt convinced the medicine had no share in 
 the improvement, and therefore discontinued it, and 
 trusted entirely to hypnotism. In the beginning of 
 January, 1842, when this patient called on me, he 
 was so well, that I told him farther operations would 
 be unnecessary for the present, but added, that should 
 he have any relapse, if he called on me again, I would 
 hypnotize him, without charge, of which offer he 
 promised to avail himself. 
 
 At my lecture on the 27th December, 1841, several 
 questions were put which elicited the following an- 
 swers : "Do you mean to say you were never so 
 well as you are now ?" " Yes ; I never earned two shil- 
 lings during all that time. This last winter I was 
 worse than ever." " Did you walk, sir, before ever you 
 left my surgery, without taking any medicine 1" " I 
 did, and ran too." See Manchester Guardian, 1st 
 January, 1842. 
 
 I heard nothing farther of this patient for about 
 seven months, and therefore, after the offer I had 
 made him at last visit, had every reason to conclude 
 he had remained well. However, it appears he had 
 a relapse shortly after he left me, and his family, 
 upon whose exertions he depended, being out of work, 
 he could not afford to pay the railway charge for 
 coming to see me again. His relapse having been 
 laid hold of, and construed into a charge against me 
 as having falsely represented his case, I was induced 
 to call on the patient, accompanied by two friends, 
 when he furnished us with the following docu- 
 ment, 
 " Joseph Barnet, Providence Street, Heaton Norris,
 
 230 RHEUMATISM. 
 
 liail suffered from a severe -rheumatic affection, prior 
 to hist December, when he applied to Mr Braid. He 
 
 was first under the care of Mr Higher Hillgate, 
 
 who bled, blistered, and prescribed medicines for him ; 
 but the complaint remained unabated. From this 
 period, took various medicines, and other means re- 
 commended to him by those who had been similarly 
 afflicted, and who considered he would be benefited by 
 such means as had relieved them, but received no 
 relief. After that applied to Mr of Manches- 
 
 ter, from whom he considered he derived benefit for 
 :i fortnight ; but the pain returning, he went to 
 Liverpool to the warm baths, where he remained as 
 long as money lasted, but without being relieved. 
 
 " From this time tried various means as recommended 
 by different parties. During the whole of this period, 
 he had never been able to earn a day's wages. When 
 he applied to Mr Braid in December last, (1841,) had 
 been suffering extreme pain in every movement of 
 the body ; in short, he had walked nearly double, sup- 
 ported on a stick. He was operated on by Mr Braid, 
 and in a quarter of an hour he was roused, and found 
 himself able to walk and run. At first, Mr Braid 
 walked him about by the hand, and afterwards made 
 him run without any assistance whatever, as his wife 
 and others present can testify. The case as stated by 
 Mr Braid in his lectures in my (his) presence was per- 
 fectly correct, as I (he) bore testimony to at the time. 
 Owing to being unable to pay the expenses of the 
 railway, he did not return to Mr Braid, when he had 
 a nrnnvnceof the pain. He had never informed Mr 
 Braid, that he had had a recurrence of the pain, and
 
 RHEUMATISM. 231 
 
 never saw him afterwards until the evening of the 
 26th July, 1842. his 
 
 (Signed) JOSEPH 4. BARNET. 
 
 mark 
 
 J. A. WALKER. 
 THOMAS BROWN. 
 HARAIT BROOKS." 
 (Daughter of J. BARNET.) 
 
 Case XXX. llth January, 1840. Mrs B. 48 years of 
 age. Catamenia ceased last spring. Has suffered from 
 a severe rheumatic affection for the last three months, 
 and been confined for the last two months to her bed- 
 room. The legs, arms, neck, and head, were exces- 
 sively painful, so that the slightest movement was 
 attended with great agony. She was quite alarmed at 
 my taking hold of her arm to feel the pulse. When 
 in bed could not turn over, nor bear the slightest touch, 
 llth January, 1842, hypnotized her, and roused her in 
 ten minutes, when she was quite free from pain, being 
 able to walk, stoop, and move the arms, wrists, and 
 fingers, with perfect freedom. 12th, had slept com- 
 fortably all night ; had been able to lie on her side, 
 which she could not do before for three months ; 
 could rise from the chair, and move legs and arms 
 without pain. There was, however, a soreness or un- 
 easy feeling, although not amounting to pain, in some 
 parts of the limbs. Hypnotized her for eight minutes, 
 when she felt less of the numbness, and followed me 
 down stairs, and ascended them again, without taking 
 hold of the banister, and taking the steps regularly 
 and cleverly with both feet alternately. 14th, Found 
 her down stairs enjoying herself with her father, hus-
 
 232 RHEUMATISM. 
 
 band, and friends, almost quite well. Hypnotized her 
 again, and also in a day or two after, and she had no 
 recurrence of the rheumatism, although a degree of 
 stiffness of the limbs remained. She had no medicine 
 from me till the rheumatism was gone, when she had 
 some for a different complaint. This patient was seen 
 at my house seven months after by about sixty 
 friends, including several professional gentlemen, 
 when the above statement was read in her presence, 
 and confirmed by her as correct to that time ; and as 
 I have heard no intimation, I feel assured she has not 
 had a relapse. 
 
 Case XXXI. Mrs S. has been already referred to, 
 case VI. She had suffered much from rheumatism for 
 many years, and had never been entirely free of it, 
 notwithstanding she had undergone much treatment. 
 After first operation she was much relieved, and after 
 a few more was entirely free from pain. It has 
 recurred occasionally since, but has always been 
 removed by one or two more operations of the same 
 sort, and which are neither painful, nor in any way 
 unpleasant. 
 
 Case XXXII. Another rheumatic case of a patient 
 53 years old, of seven years' standing, whore sleep had 
 not only been courted by exhausted nature, but also 
 by the most powerful doses of narcotic drugs ; on one 
 occasion 400 drops of laudanum had been taken in two 
 hours; still the pains continued, and yet, by fifteen 
 minutes of hypnotic sleep, procured by the simple 
 agency I recommend, this patient was relieved of his 
 agonizing pains. In this case, from my knowledge of 
 the eminence of the professional gentleman who had 
 prescribed for him, I feel assured every known
 
 RHEUMATISM. 233 
 
 remedy had been resorted to, but without effect, and 
 yet this agency succeeded in a few minutes. This 
 patient had suffered severely for seven years ; was 
 first hypnotized 10th February, 1842, and again on 
 the 17th and 19th. He seemed as nearly as possible 
 entirely free from pain, and had suffered very little 
 after the first operation, less than at any previous 
 period during the seven years he had been a rheumatic 
 subject. I have lately heard he had a relapse some 
 time after I last saw him ; but no reasonable person 
 could expect three operations should have sufficed to 
 eradicate such an obstinate complaint permanently ; 
 most probably a repetition of the process would. 
 
 Case XXXIII. Mr John Thomas, 155, Deansgate, 
 consulted me at the end of April, 1842, for a severe 
 rheumatic affection of the loins, and right hip and 
 leg, which had continued for two weeks. Had a 
 rheumatic fever two years before, which confined him 
 to bed for sixteen days, and to his room for a week 
 longer ; and he did not get rid of the pains for three 
 months after he was able to go out, although he tried 
 Buxton and Matlock baths, and also the medicated 
 and sulphur baths in Manchester. When he called on 
 me, (April, 1842,) I hypnotized him, and when roused 
 he was almost entirely free from pain, and never 
 required a repetition of the operation. He had no 
 medicine. On the 28th July, he called on me to say 
 he had continued quite well in every respect from the 
 time he was hypnotized, and attested the same, and 
 the correctness of the above statement, by appending 
 his name to it in my case-book, and he has also been 
 seen by many professional and other friends who can
 
 234 RHEUMATISM. 
 
 bear testimony to the same effect. He continued well 
 when I saw him lately. 
 
 Case XXXIV. Master J. Lancashire, 12 years of 
 age, was brought to me in September, 1842. He was 
 suffering from a violent rheumatic affection of the 
 legs, back, and chest, so that he required to be carried 
 into my house. After being hypnotized, he %s:is so 
 much relieved as to be able to walk about the room 
 freely, and to walk to his cab without assistance. 
 Next day he called, and was hypnotized again, and 
 left my house quite free from pain, and has kept so 
 well as never to require another operation. He had 
 no medicine, either externally or internally. His 
 mother and he called some time after to inform me he 
 had remained quite well, when they both attested the 
 correctness of the above statement of his case. 
 
 Case XXXV. Mrs P., a lady upwards of 50 years of 
 age, had suffered so severely from rheumatism that she 
 had not enjoyed a sound night's sleep for seven 
 months. External and internal means, which had 
 been beneficial in a former similar attack, had been 
 tried without effect, before I was sent for to visit her. 
 She was suffering excruciating pain in one leg, parti- 
 cularly about the knee joint. When I proposed to 
 relieve her by hypnotism, she repudiated the idea, 
 tol.l UK- >|, t > had no faith in it, and felt assured in her 
 own mind such an operation could be of no use to 
 her. I told her I cared little for her want of faith in 
 the reme.ly, provided she would submit to be operated 
 on as I should direct. She at last consented, and in 
 the presence of her three daughters was hypnotized. 
 In eight minutes she was aroused, and was quite free
 
 RHEUMATISM. 235 
 
 from pain ; wished to know what I had done to her ; 
 said she felt assured hypnotizing her could not have 
 relieved her. To this I replied by asking where her 
 pain was felt now. She answered she felt no pain, 
 but persisted she was sure I had done nothing to take 
 it away. The manner in which she could walk and 
 move her limbs was sufficient proof the pain was 
 gone, notwithstanding her scepticism about the agency. 
 When I called next day, I was informed by her 
 family she had slept comfortably all night, and had gone 
 out, being quite well. Two days after I called again, 
 and was informed by her that she had been overtaken 
 in a shower, and had over-exerted herself on that occa- 
 sion, and had had a return of the pain, although not 
 so bad as at first. I hypnotized her again with com- 
 plete relief, and she has never required a repetition of 
 the operation since, so that she has now enjoyed a 
 release from her old enemy for eleven months, in 
 defiance of her scepticism. Here, then, we have a 
 very decided proof that it was not imagination ; in 
 short, that it was a physical and not a mental change 
 which effected the cure. 
 
 Case XXXVI. Mr Hampson, another rheumatic case, 
 I was called to 16th May, 1842. The patient was a 
 powerful young man, 23 years of age ; had suffered 
 severely for three weeks, the last two been entirely 
 confined to bed, unable to move his legs, or to feed 
 himself; for two weeks had not known what it was 
 to have ten minutes continuous sleep, from the violence 
 of the pain, and spasmodic twitching of the limbs rous- 
 ing him. His left hand, fingers, and wrist were so 
 swollen and painful, that he was quite alarmed at my 
 attempting to feel his pulse. After being hypnotized
 
 236 ACUTE RHEUMATISM. 
 
 for five minutes whilst in the recumbent posture, I 
 had his arms extended, and he was now roused and 
 able to move the wrist and fingers with comparative 
 ease. I now hypnotized him once more, and operated 
 on his legs. In six minutes he was able to get on his 
 feet, walk round the bed and back again, and get 
 into bed and lie down without assistance. Next 
 morning I found him up and dressed, and able to 
 walk very comfortably. He had slept well through 
 the night. I hypnotized him again. Next night he 
 slept uninterruptedly, and in the morning felt 
 nothing of his pains excepting in the left shoulder ; 
 but this was quite well by the next day. He had no 
 medicine except a mild aperient. 
 
 The cases adduced I consider sufficient to prove this 
 to be a valuable agency in the treatment of chronic 
 rheumatism. I shall now adduce the results of its 
 application in two cases of acute rheumatism. 
 
 Case XXXVII. Mr G., a literary gentleman, con- 
 sulted me last winter. I found him complaining 
 of severe pain in the right arm and hand ; one 
 point, the size of a crown piece, on the outer edge 
 of the arm, a little below the elbow joint, was 
 exquisitely painful. He was enveloped in double 
 clothing, but, notwithstanding, was quite starved and 
 chilly with cutis anscrina, pulse 120 strokes a minute. 
 I told him I considered it was the commencement of 
 an attack of rheumatic fever, and I should wish to try 
 wh.-ther it could be cut short by hypnotizing him. 
 He had never been operated on in this way before, 
 but readily assented. In six minutes I had him 
 bathed in perspiration, and his pain greatly relieved. 
 He was now ordered to bed, to take a mixture with
 
 ACUTE RHEUMATISM. 237 
 
 vinum colchici. Next morning I found him much 
 freer from pain, it had never been severe since the 
 operation the day beforej the skin comfortable, and 
 his pulse only 80. To remain in bed and continue 
 his medicine. Next day the pulse was 70, and no 
 complaint of pain, and the following day he was able 
 to go out and attend to his business. No relapse. 
 
 Case XXXVIII. Mrs B., the mother of a numerous 
 family, had a severe attack of rheumatic fever, affect- 
 ing different joints in succession, and also violent pain 
 in her head. I proposed she should be brought out 
 of bed and hypnotized. The pain of her knees, feet, 
 and ankles, was so severe that she could not stretch 
 her legs, nor attempt to support herself, in the least 
 degree, upon them. She had therefore to be carried 
 from the bed to the chair where she was to be hypno- 
 tized. In five minutes she was roused, the headache 
 gone, and the pain in her legs and feet so much re- 
 lieved that she was able to walk to bed, requiring 
 only to be slightly supported by the arm. The pains 
 never returned with the same degree of severity. She 
 was hypnotized a few times more, and always with 
 benefit. Of course I prescribed such medicines as I 
 considered necessary to improve the state of the 
 secretions, so as to put as speedy a termination to the 
 attack as possible, but there could be no doubt that 
 hypnotism contributed very much to meliorate her 
 suffering, and also in bringing the attack to a more 
 speedy termination, than would have been the case 
 had I trusted to the effects of medicine only. 
 
 The following cases can perhaps scarcely be intro- 
 duced in any other place with more propriety than 
 the present. They are cases of painful affection of
 
 233 IRREGULAR CONTR ACTION 
 
 the members, arising from irregular action of the 
 muscles, consequent on mechanical injury. 
 
 Case XXXIX. Mr J. J. consulted me on the Gth 
 November, 1842. He stated he had a fall from a 
 horse five months previously, when he sustained 
 severe injury of the left hip and thigh. He was con- 
 fined to bed for two weeks, under medical treatment, 
 supposing the parts to be only bruised and sprained. 
 He then began to move about with crutches, but with 
 great pain ; and a consultation being held, it was con- 
 sidered there was dislocation of the hip joint, but the 
 attempts made to reduce it failed. At the end of nine 
 weeks from the accident, another surgeon, 40 miles 
 off, was sent for, who confirmed the opinion that 
 there was dislocation of the hip joint, and he succeeded 
 in reducing it. The patient was now confined to bed 
 for two weeks, and, on rising, was able to move about 
 with the aid of a stick, but without crutches. How- 
 ever, he was still very lame, and in much pain. When 
 he called on me, which was on the Gth November, 
 1842, he was not suffering much pain, but was ex- 
 tremely lame. The knee was a little advanced for- 
 wards, and the toes considerably everted. In attempt- 
 ing to walk without the aid and support of his stick, 
 the body was thrown so much to the left at every 
 stop, as if the leg were considerably shorter, that with 
 other circumstances coupled with this, led me to sus- 
 pect fracture of the neck of the femur within the 
 capsular ligament. A minute examination satisfied 
 me this was not the case ; and I now considered the 
 affection was one of irregular action of the whole 
 muscles of the hip and thigh, some being atrophied 
 and semi-paralyzed, and others inordinately tense.
 
 OF MUSCLES. 239 
 
 With this view I believed I should be able to rectify 
 the irregular distribution of nervous and muscular 
 energy by hypnotism, an opinion the correctness of 
 which was quickly verified. Having hypnotized the 
 patient, and placed the leg in that position calculated 
 to restore the functions according to the view I had 
 taken, in about six minutes he was roused, and was 
 agreeably surprised with such a remarkable improve- 
 ment. Next morning he was again operated on, and 
 was then almost entirely free from lameness, and 
 entirely free from pain, so that he asked my opinion 
 whether I considered it at all necessary for him to 
 take his stick in going through the town on some 
 business. He called on me the three following days, 
 after which he went home, equally gratified as my- 
 self with the result of our operations. He had no 
 internal medicine, nor external application, whilst 
 under my* care. He attested the accuracy of the above 
 report before leaving ; and, as I have not heard from 
 him since, have reason to believe he continues well. 
 
 This patient was seen by several gentlemen, some 
 
 of them members of the profession, who can bear 
 
 testimony to the correctness of these statements, as 
 
 they had an opportunity of hearing the whole from 
 
 .the patient himself. 
 
 Case XL. Mr J. H., 68 years of age, called to con- 
 sult me on the 8th November, 1842, relative to a pain- 
 ful state of his left shoulder, the consequence of a 
 blow he had sustained two months previously. He 
 had been under the care of two eminent professional 
 gentlemen from the time he received the injury till 
 within a few days before I saw him. There was a 
 wasting of the muscles about the shoulder, great pain
 
 240 MECHANICAL INJURY. 
 
 in moving the arm, and it was so weak that he had 
 not been able even to button his coat with it. After 
 being hypnotized the first time he could use it, raising 
 it above his head, and moving it in any direction with 
 ease and freedom. After being operated on next day 
 he had still more power. The following day he felt 
 a little pain behind the shoulder, under the scapula, 
 which was entirely removed by being once more 
 hypnotized, and calling the affected muscles into 
 action. On Saturday, the 12th November, 1842, he 
 left me, quite well, to return home to attend to his 
 business. Both this patient and his son attested the 
 correctness of the above report in my case book. 
 
 Case XLI. J. W., 25 years of age, had a severe 
 injury of the hip, which was followed by suppuration 
 between the trochanter and ischium, where there 
 was a fistulous opening ; the leg was flexed and per- 
 fectly useless, being supported by a sling passed over 
 his shoulders, whilst he supported himself very feebly 
 on two crutches, his health having suffered greatly 
 during his affliction. He stated that he had just left 
 a public institution, where he was given to under- 
 stand no hopes were entertained of his recovery. I 
 hypnotized him, and during that condition regulated 
 the malposition of the limb, stretching the contracted 
 muscles, and strengthening others, by exciting into 
 action those which had been weakened by being 
 overstretched and enfeebled by inaction. The result 
 was, that on being aroused he could straighten his 
 leg, and walked (using his crutches of course) with 
 the sole of his foot resting on the floor. He was 
 operated on daily with the most marked improvement 
 both as regarded his leg and his general health. In
 
 HEADACHE. 241 
 
 three weeks he could walk with one crutch, in two 
 weeks more threw that aside, and walked with a 
 stick, and shortly after could walk without that aid, 
 and is now well, excepting a little weakness of the 
 ankle joint. He had no internal medicine from me, 
 and no external application, excepting one box of 
 ointment, the discharge having entirely ceased within 
 a week of his being under my care. 
 
 I shall now advert to the remarkable power of this 
 agency in speedily overcoming nervous headache. I 
 have so many examples of this, sometimes two or 
 three fresh cases in a-day, that it is almost useless to 
 instance individual cases. However, I shall give a 
 few. 
 
 Case XLII. Mrs B., the mother of a family, has been 
 constantly annoyed with headache and maziness, for 
 the last two or three years, varying in intensity at 
 different times, but never entirely free from it. Con- 
 sulted me, 22d January, 1842, for the above com- 
 plaints, and also stated that she was subject to attacks 
 of epilepsy. I hypnotized her, and in five or six 
 minutes aroused her, when she was quite free from 
 headache. She was hypnotized almost daily for some 
 time, and remained quite free from headache, five 
 weeks after she was first operated on, and had much 
 less of the mazy feeling, and no fit for two months. 
 She appeared so much better as to be taken notice of 
 by all her friends. 
 
 Case XLIII. Miss B., daughter of the above, was 
 brought to me on the 23d January, 1843, in con- 
 sequence of the improvement her mother had expe- 
 rienced from the operation. She had suffered severely 
 from headache for six months, so much so, as fre- 
 Q
 
 042 HEADACHE. 
 
 quently to cause her cry and shed tears, and was never 
 entirely free from it for that period. I hypnotized 
 her, and in five or six minutes roused her quite free 
 from headache or any other ache. She was operated 
 on almost daily for some time, and has had no return 
 of the headache to this time, four months, and 
 has had her appetite much improved, and looks very 
 nincli better. She had no medicine. 
 
 Case XUV. Miss S., on the 25th January, 1843, 
 was suffering from a most violent headache, and had 
 been so all day. She could scarcely open her eyes or 
 see when they were open, and seemed quite prostrated. 
 I hypnotized her, and in five minutes she was aroused 
 quite well, and has had no return of it at the end of 
 ten days. 
 
 Case XLV. Miss N., 20 years of age, had suf- 
 fered severely from headache from childhood, and 
 iiever knew what it was to be entirely free from that 
 complaint, but frequently had it so severely as to 
 incapacitate her for any exertion, and almost to deprive 
 her of sight. She also had constant uneasiness at 
 stomach, sometimes amounting to severe pain, and 
 when the attacks of headache were at the worst, the 
 pain at stomach was also much aggravated, and a severe 
 attack of vomiting generally terminated the violence 
 of thi-M- paroxysms. In April, 1842, I hypnotized 
 her, and from that period she has been almost 
 entirely free from both headache and stomach com- 
 plaint. At the end of fifty-four weeks, I had the 
 pleasure of hearing from herself, as I had previously 
 from her mother, that she scarcely had suffered from 
 headache at all since the operation, and never severely, 
 or even in the slightest degree for one hour at a time.
 
 SPINAL AFFECTION. 243 
 
 Case XLVI. Mrs. T. had been suffering from 
 severe pain of the head for more than two weeks, 
 without intermission either by night or day when 
 awake. She had also had severe pain of the left side 
 of the chest for three weeks, which was aggravated 
 by a cough. For the last two days, the pain of the 
 side had been most distressing. The pulse was rapid, 
 the cough frequent and severe, and the pain in the 
 side so acute as to prevent free expansion of the chest 
 as in ordinary respiration. I found there was con- 
 siderable spinal tenderness on pressing betwixt the 
 shoulder blades. I hypnotized her, and in five minutes, 
 when aroused, she was quite free from headache, the 
 pain in the side so much relieved, that she could 
 move her body freely, and take a moderate breath 
 with very little inconvenience. Next day I found she 
 had no return of the headache, and very little of the 
 pain in the side. She was again hypnotized with 
 advantage, which I repeated daily, and in six days the 
 pain of the side was quite gone, the pain of the head 
 had never returned, the cough was gone, the spinal 
 tenderness which disappeared at first operation had 
 never returned after the first operation, and the patient 
 was now quite convalescent. She had no medicine 
 but some pectoral mixture to moderate the cough. 
 
 I shall now refer to spinal irritation, which is well 
 known to be the source of much suffering, not merely 
 in the course of the spinal column, but also, from its 
 influence on the origins of sentient nerves, on distant 
 parts of the body. I have already referred, to this in 
 the cases 16 and 19, where there was loss of feeling 
 and motion in one case, and pain of the legs with 
 contraction in the other. Where the affection does
 
 244 SPINAL IRRITATION. 
 
 not depend on active inflammation, I hesitate not to 
 say, that the pain of the spine, and other painful 
 affections dependant on the state of the spinal nerves 
 which arise therefrom, may be relieved more speedily, 
 and certainly, and effectively, by hypnotism, than by 
 any means I have either tried, read, or heard of. I 
 ^liall give an example or two. 
 
 Case XLVII. Miss C. had suffered for years from 
 -phial irritation and headache, the pain extending 
 round the chest, so that deep breathing or free motion 
 of the chest could not be tolerated. I tried every 
 variety of treatment, but in vain, and at last despaired 
 of benefiting her, and, from the extreme difficulty of 
 liivritliing, suspected it must end in pulmonary con- 
 sumption. I now tried hypnotism, which imme- 
 diately succeeded in relieving the whole catalogue of 
 painful symptoms, and she was speedily restored to 
 perfect health, and has continued so ever since. 
 
 Case XLVIII. Miss had suffered much from 
 
 spinal irritation for years, and had undergone much 
 severe treatment. Had been restored to health and 
 strength under my treatment, but was again threat- 
 ened with a relapse. I hypnotized her, and when 
 roused, the spinal tenderness was gone. A few more 
 operations made a most marked improvement, and 
 she continued well for some mouths. She had a 
 recurrence of the complaint, when hypnotism was 
 again had recourse to, with immediate and decided 
 advantage. 
 
 I could easily multiply cases of this sort, were it 
 not for swelling the volume unnecessarily. I shall 
 therefore pass on to cases of irregular or spasmodic 
 action of the muscles. I have found it decidedly use-
 
 EPILEPSY. 245 
 
 ful in several cases of chorea ; and also in cases of 
 nervous stammer. In epilepsy it also frequently 
 proves highly useful, but there are some varieties of 
 this complaint over which it has no control. These 
 I presume are such cases as depend on organic causes, 
 and which are found to resist every known remedy. 
 It is however well known that many cases which 
 were supposed to have been of this class have worn 
 themselves out, or time and the efforts of nature have 
 effected some organic change. Whether hypnotism, 
 if persevered in, might have a tendency to expedite 
 the favourable result in such cases, I am not prepared 
 to say, but think it highly probable it might do so. 
 I feel quite confident, however, that in cases which 
 are amenable to treatment, this will be found one of 
 the most speedy and certain remedies. Of all the 
 complaints for which mesmerism has been lauded as 
 beneficial, there are none so conspicuous as epilepsy, 
 as has already been referred to in the introduction. 
 As the effects of hypnotism are so nearly allied to 
 mesmerism, it would be superfluous for me to detail- a 
 number of cases, I shall therefore give only a few. 
 
 Case XLIX. A girl who had been liable to six or 
 eight fits in 24 hours, had only one the day after she 
 was first hypnotized, none for next five days, and was 
 shortly quite well. 
 
 Case L. John Barker, aged 19 years, applied to 
 me in August, 1842, for epileptic fits. He had first 
 been seized with them when four or five years of 
 age, at first every week or fortnight, but as he got 
 older, became more frequent, so that, for some months 
 previous to applying to me, he had had as many as 
 three fits a- week had been under treatment at a
 
 24C EPILEPSY. 
 
 public institution for two months before calling on 
 me, and had a great variety of treatment, but derived 
 no benefit, and was then told by the attendant, that 
 he must never expect to get rid of them. He was 
 subjected to my usual hypnotic operation for such 
 cases, was operated on ten times altogether, and has 
 had but one fit since he was operated on ; and that 
 was the day after first operation. He had no medi- 
 cine from me excepting three aperient powders. He 
 has now been free of the fits for upwards of nine 
 months. 
 
 Case LI. Mrs B., the mother of a family, had been 
 subject to epilepsy for seven years, and notwith- 
 standing every variety of treatment, allopathetic and 
 homoepathetic, she had an attack at least once a 
 month. From the time she was hypnotized she had 
 no fit for four months, and has had none since. 
 
 Case LII. Miss B. had been subject to fits for nearly 
 two years, latterly had as many as five and six a-day ; 
 consulted me the end of December, 1842 ; was hyp- 
 notized seven times, and had no return of the fits for 
 four months, when she had one, and in two weeks 
 after a second. 
 
 Hypnotism may be applied with great success in 
 the treatment of various distortions, arising from 
 weakness of certain muscles, or inordinate power or 
 contraction of their antagonists ; and I feel convinced, 
 that by this means, we may rectify many of those 
 cases which have hitherto been treated by section of 
 the tendons or muscles. The success which I have 
 ain-ady had, by this means, of treating lateral curva- 
 ture of the spine, warrants me to speak very con- 
 fidently on the subject, in most cases. I feel convinced,
 
 SPINAL CURVATURE. 247 
 
 there are very few recent cases which may not be 
 speedily cured by hypnotism, without either pain or 
 inconvenience to the patient. Patience and perseverance 
 will of course be necessary where the disease has been 
 of long standing, and though in sucli cases the cure 
 may not be perfect, the patient may be greatly 
 improved by hypnotism. 
 
 The method of treating such cases is, first to induce 
 the sleep, and then to call such muscles into action as 
 are calculated to bring the body into the most natural 
 position. By bringing these muscles into play during 
 this condition, they acquire increased power, and 
 ultimately are permanently strengthened. As one 
 side of the chest is enlarged, and the other collapsed, 
 I endeavour to restrain the enlarged side, by applying 
 compression to it during the sleep, whilst the patient 
 is directed to take deep inspirations, so as to expand 
 the opposite side. I also endeavour to make the patient 
 stand in a position the very reverse of that which I con- 
 sider to have been the chief cause of the curvature. As 
 already remarked, I feel convinced this method will 
 prove very speedily successful, more decidedly so than 
 any other mode of treatment I know of, and especially 
 in such cases as are accompanied with spinal irritation. 
 
 Case LIII. The following is a case of its remarkable 
 success with a young lady, 14 years of age, who had 
 had the advice of some of the most eminent members 
 of the profession in the provinces, and also in Dublin 
 and London. She was first observed to become mal- 
 formed when four years old. When brought to me 
 on the 12th September, 1842, her chin rested on her 
 breast, and there was no power of raising it, from 
 the weakness of the recti muscles of the back, and
 
 248 SPINAL CURVATURE. 
 
 contraction of the sterno-cleido-mastoid muscles. 
 The dorsal part of the spine and shoulders wen- 
 thrown backwards, the lumber vertebra) and pelvis 
 were thrown forwards, so that the deformity was 
 very great, and the vigour of the mind, as well a* of 
 the body, was greatly impaired. She had no medicine 
 nor external application, but was hypnotized night 
 and morning, and treated in the manner referred to, 
 rind the result was, that in six weeks she could hold 
 herself so much better, that when the outline was 
 taken, it was found that her spine was three inches 
 nenrcr the perpendicular than when I first saw her. 
 During this period, no mechanical means had been 
 used, nor throughout any part of the time she was 
 under my care were any resorted to, with the excep- 
 tion of a support for the chin, by way of remem- 
 brancer, till the habit of attention was acquired of 
 supporting the head by mere muscular effort, which 
 she now had the full power of doing. Nor should I 
 omit to add, there was also a great improvement in 
 the mental faculties. 
 
 Neuralgic pain in the heart and palpitation, I have 
 also found to be relieved, or entirely cured, by neuro- 
 hypnotisni, more certainly and speedily, than by 
 any other means. The following are examples : 
 
 Case LIV. Miss Tomlinson, 16 years of age, I have 
 already referred to. She had suffered severely from 
 painful affection of the heart, with palpitation, which 
 had resisted ail treatment, and she had been pre- 
 scribed for by eminent professional men, both physi- 
 cians and surgeons. After being twice hypnotized, 
 the affection of the heart disappeared, and has 
 never returned but once, when it was immediately
 
 AFFECTIONS OF THE HEART. 249 
 
 removed by hypnotism. It is now seventeen months 
 since she was first operated on, and she is in perfect 
 health. 
 
 Case LV. Miss Stowe, 22 years of age. I have 
 already referred to her as one of the cases in which 
 sight was remarkably improved by hypnotism. She 
 had also suffered most severely from palpitation of 
 the heart, accompanied with difficulty of breathing 
 and dropsy, and various other symptoms which led 
 the medical attendants, one of them an eminent phy- 
 sician, to pronounce the case hopeless, considering 
 there was serious organic disease of the heart. After 
 being twice hypnotized, all symptoms of affection of 
 the heart disappeared, (sufficient proof it had been 
 only functional derangement,) and she was speedily 
 in the enjoyment of perfect health, and has been so 
 now for the last twelve months, and that from hyp- 
 notism only. This patient had leucorrhreal discharge, 
 which had resisted every remedy for years, and was 
 so offensive as to cause suspicion she had malignant 
 uterine disease. It was completely gone in a week, 
 after being first hypnotized. She had no medicine 
 excepting a simple aperient pill occasionally. I should 
 add, her hearing, as well as sight, .was very much 
 improved by it. 
 
 Case LVI. Mr had suffered severely from 
 
 pain in the heart and palpitation. He was hypno- 
 tized with decided relief, and a second operation com- 
 pletely restored him, and he has kept well for the last 
 eight months. 
 
 Case LVII. Miss had suffered much from 
 
 palpitation of the heart, so that she could not ascend 
 an easy stair without bringing on the most violent
 
 250 PAIN OF OPERATION 
 
 palpitation. I tested this before operating on her. 
 After being operated on, caused her ascend the same 
 flight of steps, which produced no palpitation, and she 
 has never required the operation to be repeated. 
 
 Case LVIII. A young man had suffered much from 
 valvular disease of the heart and palpitation and diffi- 
 culty of breathing for four years, the consequence of 
 a rheumatic fever. He could not walk more than 
 twenty or thirty paces without being forced to stand 
 or sit down. After being hypnotized for a short time 
 he could manage to walk upwards of a mile at a 
 stretch. In this case there was so much organic dis- 
 ease as precluded the hope of a perfect cure, but no 
 means could have achieved for him what hypnotism 
 did, and in such a short time too. 
 
 When considering the power of hypnotism in blunt- 
 ing morbid feeling, I may advert to its power of 
 relieving, or entirely preventing, the pain incident to 
 patients undergoing surgical operations. I am quite 
 satisfied that hypnotism is capable of throwing a 
 patient into that state in which he shall be entirely 
 uiifitiscious of the pain of a surgical operation, or of 
 greatly moderating it, according to the time allowed 
 and mode of management resorted to. Thus, I have 
 myself extracted teeth from six patients under this 
 influence without pain, and to some others with so 
 little pain, that they did not know a tooth had been 
 extracted ; and a professional friend, Mr Gardom, has 
 operated in my way lately, and extracted a very firm 
 tooth without the patient evincing any symptom of 
 feeling pain during the operation ; and when roused, 
 was quite unconscious of such an operation having been 
 performed. He has extracted a second for this patient,
 
 MODIFIED OR PREVENTED. 251 
 
 and one for another, without their being conscious of 
 the operation. To insure this, however, I consider 
 that, in the majority of instances, it is quite necessary 
 the patient should not, when he sits down, know or 
 imagine the operation is to be performed at that time, 
 otherwise the distraction of the mind, from this cause, 
 may render it impossible for him to become hypno- 
 tized deeply enough to render him altogether insen- 
 sible to pain. The following case will illustrate this 
 view. 
 
 Case LIX. Mr Walker called on me, stating he had 
 been suffering from a violent toothache ; said he was 
 anxious to have the tooth extracted, but that he suf- 
 fered so much pain from the operation, on former 
 occasions, that he could not make up his mind to sub- 
 mit to it, unless when hypnotized. He had been 
 frequently hypnotized, and was highly susceptible of 
 the influence. I told him I should be most happy to 
 try, but that unless he could restrain his mind from 
 dwelling on the operation, I might not be able to suc- 
 ceed in extracting the tooth, entirely without pain. He 
 sat down, and speedily became hypnotized, but I could 
 not produce rigidity of the extremities, nor insensi- 
 bility to pinching, which in general were so readily in- 
 duced in him. I therefore roused him, and told him 
 the fact. He stated he went on as usual to a certain 
 point, but then began to think, " now he will be 
 putting the instrument in my mouth," after which 
 the hypnotic effects went no farther. The pain 
 was gone, and he left. In the evening he again 
 called on me, when I tried him once more with the 
 same results. I now aroused him, told him it could not 
 be done with him reduced to a state of total insenai-
 
 252 PAIXS OF OPERATION MODIFIED. 
 
 bility, and that I should therefore extract it now that 
 he was awake. I now extracted the tooth. He was 
 conscious of my laying hold of it, but had felt so 
 little pain that he could not believe the tooth had 
 been extracted. Nor would he believe it till he had 
 the tooth put into his hand. I now requested him to 
 be hypnotized once more, when he became highly 
 rigid and insensible, in a shorter time than I had 
 ever teen in him before. From this, and other ca>e*, 
 I infer, that if it is intended to perform a surgical 
 operation entirely without pain, whilst in the hypnotic 
 condition, the patient's consent should be obtained 
 for it to be done sometime, but he ought on no account 
 to know when it is to be done, otherwise, in most 
 cases, it would foil the attempt. 
 
 However, that patients may be operated on with 
 greatly less pain even when in the first degree of 
 hypnotism, and whilst expecting an operation, is 
 
 quite certain, from the result of the case of Mrs , 
 
 ri-lati-d below, which I now refer to as Case LX. 
 I have also performed other operations under similar 
 circumstances, and with similar results, namely, with 
 greatly diminished pain, although not entirely without 
 pain. 
 
 Case LX. A lady had abscess connected with 
 disease of the orbitar process of the frontal bone, had 
 the matter discharged by small puncture, the wound 
 closed by first intention and again opened, as required, 
 by the lancet. She experienced so much pain on 
 each occasion as to induce me to hypnotize her, after 
 which she made no complaint, although I durst not 
 carry it far owing to the state of the brain. On one 
 occasion I was anxious to ascertain how she would
 
 CUTANEOUS DISEASES CURED. 253 
 
 feel by operating loithout hypnotizing, when the 
 result was so distressing, as to induce ine always in 
 future to hypnotize her, before such operations, and 
 then all went on well. 
 
 Case LXI. An adult with worst variety of Talipes 
 varus, of both feet, had the first operated on in the 
 usual way, and the other whilst in the primary state 
 of hypnotism. The present ease and future advantage, 
 in respect to the latter operation, was most remarkable. 
 I have operated on upwards of three hundred club 
 feet now, and I am warranted in saying I never had 
 so satisfactory a result as in the one now referred to. 
 
 In cases of dyspepsia it is of the greatest service. 
 Most patients feel the appetite greatly increased by 
 being hypnotized, and that the digestion is more 
 vigorous than before being operated on. All com- 
 plaints, therefore, immediately connected with, or 
 dependent on, indigestion, may be expected to be 
 benefited by hypnotism. It is well known, many 
 cutaneous diseases are of this class ; and the following 
 will illustrate the remarkable power exercised by 
 hypnotism on this symptom, as well as several others 
 associated with it : 
 
 Case LXI. Mrs 0., 33 years of age, the mother of 
 a family, had been very nervous for fifteen years, 
 with tremor of the arms, was easily alarmed, much 
 disturbed by distressing dreams, and required being 
 aroused several times every night from severe attacks 
 of nightmare. She had also suffered severely from an 
 inveterate eczema of the chest and mamma, and in- 
 teguments of the abdomen, which, for five months, had 
 resisted every remedy, both external and internal, un- 
 der highly respectable medical men. The fingers of
 
 254 CUTANEOUS DISEASES CURED. 
 
 one hand were also affected with impetigo. She con- 
 sulted me 31st August, 1842, when she was hypno- 
 tized, and was aroused greatly relieved from the 
 distressing feelings of the head, and general nervous- 
 ness. Her husband assured me, that on walking out 
 with her same evening, had he not seen her, he could 
 not have believed it was his wife who had hold of 
 his arm, so much was the tremor of her arm im- 
 proved, and she slept soundly all night without being 
 troubled either by dreams or nightmare. She was 
 hypnotized daily, and in a few days she was quite 
 well, both as regarded her general health, and the 
 obstinate skin disease ; and as she had no medicine 
 nor external application, there could be no disputing 
 that it resulted entirely from the influence of hypno- 
 tism. She has been well nearly ten months. 
 
 Case LXII. J. C., aged 40, had been severely 
 afflicted for eighteen months with impetigo sparsa, 
 extending from a little below the knee to near the 
 toes. He had also severe pain in the ankle joint, so 
 that he had been disabled for work for eighteen 
 months. I hypnotized him, when he could walk 
 better, after first operation, without his stick, than he 
 could do immediately before with it. In a few days 
 the improvement was very remarkable, and within a 
 week the disease of the skin was nearly well, and very 
 little pain in the joint. He was hypnotized almost 
 daily till the end of the month, had no medicine, and 
 no dressing but a little spermaceti ointment to pre- 
 vent the cloth surrounding his leg from adhering to 
 the sore ; and the skin disease being now quite well, 
 and very little pain in the ankle joint, in a few days 
 after he was enabled to resume his work. He had
 
 CONTRACTION. 255 
 
 undergone much treatment, under both public and 
 private practitioners, but was becoming worse instead 
 of better. The immediate improvement in the ap- 
 pearance of the cutaneous disease, as well as feelings 
 of the patients in the two last cases, were too obvious 
 to admit of a doubt as to the remarkable powers of 
 hypnotism. 
 
 The next cases I shall refer to, are those of perma- 
 nent contraction or tonic spasm. The following are 
 interesting examples of this form of disorder, and the 
 success of hypnotism in the treatment of them. 
 
 Case LXIV. Mr J. 0. 21 years of age, called on me 
 1st October, 1842, complaining of a pain in the left 
 temple, a continual noise in the left ear, with occa- 
 sional shoots of pain, and the hearing of that ear 
 very imperfect. He complained also of inability to 
 open the mouth so as to enable him to take his food 
 comfortably, and that mastication caused great pain, 
 so that he frequently felt compelled to decline taking 
 his meals. Complaints had been coming on since 
 previous Easter, and were becoming worse, notwith- 
 standing he had been under the care of two medical 
 men up to the day before he called on me. That day, 
 10th October, 1842, he could not eat breakfast but 
 with great difficulty, and had been compelled to take 
 rice and milk for dinner for two days, as he could eat 
 nothing solid. I found he could not permit the 
 mouth to be opened more than half an inch without 
 great pain and difficulty ; and besides the dulness of 
 hearing already referred to, I found he had also very 
 imperfect sight of the left eye, which I tested very 
 accurately. He had not been aware of this until I 
 called his attention to it. I hypnotized him for about
 
 256 SPASMODIC AFFECTIONS 
 
 eight minutes, during which I was enabled to open 
 the mouth till the front teeth were nearly two inches 
 asunder, and he experienced no inconvenience from 
 me doing so. On being aroused, all the pain in the 
 temple was gone ; he could himself separate the teeth 
 one inch and three quarters, as accurately measured, 
 in presence of four very intelligent gentlemen who 
 had been present during the operation ; and he could 
 move the jaws with the most perfect freedom, and 
 without pain. The hearing was also much better, 
 and the sight of the left eye also most remarkably 
 improved. 2d October, called on me again, when he 
 stated he had been enabled to eat a good supper after 
 he left me the night before, and to take his breakfast 
 and dinner with perfect comfort to himself; that his 
 hearing was much better ; and the sight of both eyes 
 as nearly as possible equal. He had had no pain in 
 the temple since he was operated on, unless when the 
 mouth was opened to the utmost extent, and even then 
 it was trifling. He could now open the mouth to 
 nearly one inch and three quarters, before being ope- 
 rated on to-day, and after the operation, to the extent 
 of two inches, that is, the front teeth were two inches 
 apart. 
 
 This patient called on me a few days after to be 
 operated on a third time, and retained the improve- 
 ment noted above. He was to call again if he had 
 any relapse, but as he has not done so, I conclude he 
 continues quite well, and it is now nearly seven 
 months since I last saw him. 
 
 I shall now refer to other cases of spasmodic affection, 
 which are most interesting, as they afford us strong 
 grounds to hope that Tetanus, Hydrophobia, and other
 
 CURED BT HYPNOTISM. 257 
 
 analogous affections, may be arrested and cured by 
 this agency. 
 
 Case LXV. A girl was seized with violent tonic spasm 
 of the right hand and arm, and side of the face. A re- 
 spectable surgeon was consulted, who ordered a blister 
 to the nape of the neck, medicine, fomentation, and 
 liniments to the parts affected. The symptoms be- 
 came more urgent, and they sent for the surgeon 
 again, but as he was out, and as they were much 
 alarmed, I was consulted. The blister had been 
 applied, but the medicines had not been used as 
 directed. I found the hand so firmly clenched that 
 it was impossible to open it, the arm so rigid it could 
 not be moved ; but, knowing the efficacy of my new 
 remedy, I hypnotized her, and in two minutes, with 
 the most perfect ease, I unlocked the hand, and re- 
 moved the other spasmodic contractions, and she was 
 instantly quite well, and has continued so ever since, 
 now more than a year. 
 
 I shall only record one additional case, and a more 
 remarkable or satisfactory one I think could scarcely 
 be adduced. I give the case as correctly recorded by 
 the patient's father, in a letter he sent for my 
 approval, previous to having it sent to be recorded in 
 some periodical. I preferred having its publication 
 postponed, and now give it precisely in his own 
 words. 
 
 Case LXVI. Miss Collins of Newark. "My 
 daughter, 16 years of age, had been afflicted for six 
 months with a rigid contraction of the muscles on the 
 left side of the neck, to so great a degree, that it 
 would have been impossible 10 insert an ordinary 
 card between the ear and shoulder, so close was their 
 R
 
 258 TONIC SPASM 
 
 contact ; and consequently she was rapidly becoming 
 malformed. She had had the best advice to be pro- 
 cured in the country, and I had taken her to London 
 with a written statement of the treatment previously 
 employed, and had the opinion of Sir Benjamin 
 Brodie, who approved of what had been done, but 
 gave no hope of speedy relief. 
 
 " In consequence of seeing a report of a lecture given 
 oil the subject by Mr Braid, surgeon, St Peter's 
 Square, Manchester, and a letter written to that 
 gentleman by Mr Mayo of London, I went with her, 
 by the advice of Dr Chawner, who indeed accom- 
 panied us, and placed her under the care of Mr Braid 
 on Thursday evening, the 24th March last, (1842.) 
 In less than a minute after that gentleman began to 
 fix her attention, she was in a mesmeric (neuro- 
 hypnotic) slumber, and in another minute was par- 
 tially cataleptic. Mr Braid then, without awaking 
 her, and consequently without giving her any pain, 
 placed her head upright, which I firmly believe could 
 not, by any possibility, have been done five minutes 
 before, without disruption of the muscles, or the 
 infliction of some serious injury, and I am thankful 
 to say, it not only continues straight, but she has the 
 perfect control over the muscles of the neck. A 
 nervous motion of the head, to which she had been 
 subject after her return from Manchester, has entirely 
 ceased, and she is at present in excellent health. It 
 is necessary to remark, that at Dr Chawner's recom- 
 mendation she was frequently watched while asleep, 
 but not the slightest relaxation was observed in the 
 contracted muscles.
 
 CUBED BY HYPNOTISM. 259 
 
 " Many respectable persons can bear testimony to 
 the statements herein made. 
 
 (Signed) JAMES COLLINS." 
 
 " NEWARK, Uth May, 1842." 
 
 I have been informed that some very absurd reports 
 have been circulated, even in the metropolis, as to 
 my mode of operating on this patient, namely, that I 
 had exhibited a vast display of gesticulations and 
 hocus pocus, in order to work upon her imagination. 
 
 SUCH STATEMENTS* ARE UTTERLY UNTRUE. I simply 
 
 desired her to maintain a steady gaze at my lancet 
 case, held above her eyes in the manner pointed out 
 at page 27 of this work, and after the eyes had been 
 closed, and the limbs extended for about two minutes, 
 I placed my left hand on the right side of her neck, 
 and my right hand on the left side of her head, and, 
 by gentle means, gave a new direction to the sensorial 
 and muscular power, and was thus enabled by art, 
 rather than mechanical force, in less than half a 
 minute, to incline the head from the left to the right 
 of the mesial plane. The muscular contraction being 
 thus excited on the right side of the neck, in muscles 
 which had been inactive for six months previously, 
 was the surest and most natural mode of withdrawing 
 the power from their antagonists, and reducing the 
 spasm of the contracted muscles on the left side. After 
 allowing the patient to remain two minutes supporting 
 her head, now inclined towards the right, by her own 
 muscular efforts, to give them power on the principle 
 already explained, I aroused her in my usual way, 
 by a clap of my hands. The patient's father, and Dr 
 Chawner of Newark, were present the whole time,
 
 Ji^t CONCLUDING REMARKS. 
 
 and to them I appeal as to the correctness of this 
 statement, and in refutation of the vile, unfounded 
 calumny above referred to. 
 
 After the lapse of a year Mr Collins was so kind as 
 write, to inform me his daughter continued in perfect 
 health, with complete control over the muscles of the 
 neck. 
 
 I could easily adduce many more interesting cases, 
 but trust those already recorded may be sufficient to 
 prove that hypnotism is an important addition to our 
 curative means, and a power well worthy the atten- 
 tive consideration of every enlightened and unpreju- 
 diced medical man.
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Abercrombie, Dr, 90, 94, 149, 226. 
 
 Armstrong, Dr, 84. 
 
 Atkinson's, Miss E. case, 70, 220. 
 
 Barnet's, Joseph, case, 227. 
 
 Barrallier's, Mr, report of sleep from fixing eyes, 77. 
 
 Bertrand's opinions, 6, 7, 8, 9. 
 
 Bingham's, Mr, testimony, 188. 
 
 Brain, modes of dividing, 100. 
 
 modes of communication with body, 103. 
 
 Brown, Dr Thomas, 89. 
 Brown, Captain Thomas, 16. 
 Brooke's, Mr H. 8. 
 
 Collins', Miss, remarkable cure, 69, 257. 
 
 Colton, 81, 87. 
 
 Concluding remarks, 158, 259. 
 
 Critique on Mr Ward's operation, 152. 
 
 Cross magnetizing, rationale of, 125. 
 
 Curtis, Mr, 183, 190. 
 
 Cutaneous diseases cured by hypnotism, 253.
 
 262 INDEX. 
 
 Deafness cured by hypnotism, 176. 
 
 Deaf and Dumb, erroneous expectations of, 190. 
 
 case cured, 192. 
 
 Distortions, 246. 
 Dreaming, 44. 
 causes of, 46. 
 
 Elliotson, Dr, avowal regarding volition and sympathy, 98. 
 
 Epilepsy cured by hypnotism, 245. 
 
 Eyes, effects of their consensual adjustment on pupils, 35. 
 
 Erroneous expectations of Deaf and Dumb, 190. 
 
 Evan Samuel's case, 204. 
 
 Edward Samuel's case, 213. 
 
 Faria's, Abbe*, mode of magnetizing, 7. 
 Gardom, Mr, his success as a hypnotist, 176, 248. 
 
 Headache, cases of cure of, by hypnotism, 238 246. 
 
 Hypnotism separated from animal magnetism, 4, 21 ; pre- 
 judices against refuted, 10, 75 ; origin and definition of 
 terms, 13 ; modes of inducing, and success, 24, 27 ; causes 
 of failure in producing, 25 ; peculiar phenomena of, 29, 
 54 57, and 61 67 ; modes of dehypnotizing, 30, 52 ; 
 proceeds from a law of animal economy, 31 ; rationale of, 
 31 48 ; wherein differs from common sleep and reverie, 
 49 56 ; accompanied with no electric nor magnetic 
 change, 33 ; power of habit and imagination, 36, 61 ; 
 remarkable effects of a current of air during, 37 39 ; in- 
 fluence of on smell, 39 ; and ordinary reverie contrasted, 
 49 ; probable cause of perfection of arts amongst Greeks, 
 56 ; phenomena of consecutive, 61 ; its remarkable cura- 
 tive power, 62, 165 to end ; its effects, local or general, at 
 will, 64 ; its effects on mind as well as body, 71 ; so as to 
 produce refreshing sleep, 76 ; power of hearing faint 
 sounds, 126 ; how to apply it as a curative power, 162 ;
 
 INDEX. 263 
 
 to improve sight, 165 ; hearing, 176 ; susceptibility for 
 
 music, 194. 
 
 Hall, M. Spencer T. 114, 118, 1224. 
 Holditch, Mr, 175, 217. 
 Heart, affections cured by hypnotism, 248. 
 
 Imagination, effects of, 225. 
 
 Insane patient, treated in accordance with phrenology, 120. 
 
 Johnstone, Thomas, remarkable case, 216. 
 
 Irritation, Spinal, 243. 
 
 Kramer, his opinions criticised by Curtis, 183. 
 
 Lafontaine's conversazione, 2, 16. 
 
 Liebig's views as to the action of the alkaloids, 48. 
 
 Magnetism, animal, modes of producing phenomena of, 20. 
 Materialism, arguments in refutation of, 81, et aeq. 
 Mayo's, Mr Herbert, testimony, 23, 33, 80. 
 M'Nish on reverie, 49. 
 
 Medical Gazette, papers in, contrasted with Mr Braid's 
 views, 34, 35 ; extract from, 59. 
 
 Times, extract of experiments from, 37 39. 
 
 Mesmer's experiments in Dr Franklin's garden, 20. 
 
 Mellor's, Miss, case, 200. 
 
 Miiller, important extract from, 47, 48, 103. 
 
 Morris's, Mr, case, 210. 
 
 M'Robert's remarkable case, 195. 
 
 Mind and matter, how related to each other, 81. 
 
 the cause of organism, 91. 
 
 Music, its remarkable effects on hypnotic patients, 56. 
 
 Nodan's case, 181. 
 
 Okeys were most probably affected through imagination 
 and habit, when operated on by Mr Wakley, 61.
 
 264 INDEX. 
 
 Okeys, rationale of the power of predicating death. 
 
 Palpitation of heart cured by hypnotism, 248. 
 
 Plato's opinion of mind and matter, 90. 
 
 Phrenology does not necessarily lead to materialising, et seq. 
 
 Passions excited by music, 95 ; sight, 96 ; sympathy, 96 ; 
 
 touch, 96 ; mechanical pressure, only during hypnotism, 
 
 103. 
 
 Prichard, Dr, 7, 10. 
 Phreno-hypnotism, 80. 
 
 lUieumatism treated successfully by hypnotism, 227 235. 
 Roiley, Mrs, her remarkable case, 165. 
 
 S. Mrs, opacity of cornea removed, 173. 
 Shelmerdine's, James, case, 184. 
 Sight restored and improved by hypnotism, 165. 
 Stowe's, Mrs, case, 169. 
 
 , Miss, case, 171, 249. 
 
 Slater, Mrs, case of paralysis cured, 202. 
 Sleep, natural phenomena of, 43, 54, 58, 59. 
 
 causes of, 45, 58 60. 
 
 Stewart, Dugald, 90. 
 Somnambulism, 44. 
 Sunderland, La Roy, his views, 122. 
 Smell restored by hypnotism, 196. 
 
 interesting experiments on, 40, 197. 
 
 Smellie's predication, 1 05. 
 Spinal irritation cured by hypnotism, 243. 
 Spasm, tonic, cured by hypnotism, 255. 
 Surgical operations during hypnotism, 250. 
 
 Taylor, Sarah, deaf and dumb girl cured, 192. 
 Tic Doloureux cured by hypnotism, 198. 
 
 Vaughan's, Mr, testimony, 1G4.
 
 INDEX. 265 
 
 Walker, Mr, hypnotized, 17, 19. 
 
 whilst operating on another gentle- 
 man, 40. 
 
 -, sight improved by hypnotism, 171. 
 
 Wakley's, Mr, admission regarding phenomena, 33. 
 rationale of his experiments with the Okeys, 61 , 
 
 EDINBURGH 
 PB1NTKD BY ANDREW SHOHTREDE, 
 
 CiKORGK IV. iiKlDGK.
 
 ERRATA ET ADDENDA. 
 
 Page 14, line 2, for Arsal, read A real. 
 
 17, bottom line,/or phenomena, read phenomenon. 
 
 34, line 17, for 33, read 38. 
 
 - 57, line 32,/or effects, read efforts. 
 
 78, line 16,/or state, read stage. 
 
 24, line 26, after the word themselves, add, as farther 
 proof of the tuccets of hypnotism, At the conversazione given 
 on the 29th June, 1842, to the Members of the British Asso- 
 ciation, two men and two youths were brought off the street. 
 ( >ne man and both youths were operated on ; all the three 
 were hypnotized, and one of the youths reduced to the 'rigid 
 state. 
 
 Page 129, line G,for warrants, read seem to warrant. 
 143, line 7, for the relation which, read that some 
 relation.
 
 NOTICES 
 
 or 
 MR BRAID'S WORK ON HYPNOTISM. 
 
 " We hail with pleasure the publication of this volume." 
 Glasgow Argus. 
 
 " This is a very able and interesting treatise. Whatever novelty 
 may attach to the writer's views, they deserve careful investiga- 
 tion and study, alike from the ability with which they are sup- 
 ported, and the praiseworthy object they aim at effecting." 
 Reformers' Gazette, 
 
 The author has conferred an incalculable benefit on the 
 public by explaining so clearly the '' Rationale of Nervous 
 Sleep." Edinburgh Evening Post. 
 
 " Here is a splendid benefit opened up to the view of mankind. 
 We recommend Mr Braid's book to the public." Scotsman, 
 
 11 This is a curious book, full of details not less striking and 
 original, than valuable. * * Exhibiting extensive research, 
 and broad and liberal views. * * We feel that an important 
 service has been rendered to the cause of science, both general 
 and medical, by the labours of Mr Braid." Glasgow Citizen. 
 
 " Mr Braid's views are broad and liberal. In the present state 
 of Mesmerism, his work is an important contribution to those who 
 are looking amid its wild mazes for the truth. We, therefore, 
 recommend his labours to the merely curious, to the sceptical, 
 and to him who is led away by the superhuman pretensions of 
 the Animal Magnetists." Kilmarnock Journal. 
 
 " The work is lucidly written, the author having been evidently 
 influenced solely by a desire to convey as much information aa 
 possible." Liverpool Albion. 
 
 " We can venture to state that in its perusal the reader will find 
 very much to interest and instruct." Manchester Times. 
 
 " With regard to the curative efficacy of the system, we are 
 able to bring our personal testimony to the fact, and can fully 
 corroborate many of the cases quoted by Mr Braid." Manchester 
 Courier. 
 
 " We cannot but recommend his work to every one interested 
 in the important phenomena of which it treats. Its details of 
 cases, some of the most thrilling of which we have witnessed, 
 would alone repay an attentive perusal." Phreno-Maynet.
 
 WORKS 
 
 CAPTAIN THOMAS BROWN, M.P.S. 
 
 TBi wra*RiAKMci>TY; HONORARY MEMBER OF THE OBOLOGICAI. 
 ocirrv or MANCHESTER: roRMBRLY PRESIDENT or THE ROYAL 
 riiTMCAL OCIBTY ; AND CURATOR or THB MANCHESTER 
 
 MATORAL HISTORY BOCIETY'U MUSEUM. 
 
 OF THE CONCHOLOGY OF GREAT 
 
 I'.KITAIN AM) lliEL\m 
 
 Second Edition, *itk contiderabU Addition*. 
 
 To be completed in Sixteen Numbers, royal 4to. containing 
 Four coloured Plates, price 3s. each in all .Sixty-two Plates, 
 with complete descriptions, localities, &c. of all the species dis- 
 covered op to the present time, including marine, laud, and fresh 
 water, together with a representation of the animals of nearly the 
 whole genera. The Engravings of this Work are nearly all 
 scented by MR \V. 11. LIZARS of Edinburgh. 
 
 Fourteen Numbers have already appeared, and the work 
 will bo speedily completed. 
 
 II.I.rsTllATIoNs iiF THK FOSSIL CONCHOLOGY OF 
 i,i;i.AT P.UITAIN AND IRELAM). 
 
 " To be completed in Twenty -fire Numbers, royal 4 to. containing 
 Four coloured Plates, price three shillings, or two shillings, plain ; 
 in all 100 Pbtte*, with complete descriptions, localities, and 
 geological position* of all the species. 
 
 The Engravings of this Work are principally executed, in the 
 Ant styU of art, by LIZARS, AIKMAN, and other celebrated 
 Eofrrarers of Edinburgh. 
 
 twenty-two Numbers hare appeared, and the work will be 
 
 JT.JL On completion, Uu Work iritt be advanced in price. 
 
 THK I'.I.F.MI.NTS . >F Fossil, iiiNC||ii|,Oi,Y. 
 
 W"*lMiil by a well marked species of each Genus, Engraved 
 e* SeMLby AIKHAM and MILNE. In one vol. royal IBmo, with 
 Twetv* Kognviagi, prioe Five Shillingn, boards.
 
 University of California < 
 
 SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 Return this material to the library 
 
 from which it was borrowed. 
 
 QLOCT03
 
 UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 III 
 
 A 000 083 329 3